No.

2B308-200EN*E

OPERATION MANUAL
FOR
INTERVENTIONAL ANGIOGRAPHY SYSTEM

MODEL INFX-8000C
(2B308-200EN*E)

IMPORTANT!
Read and understand this manual before operating
the equipment. After reading, keep this manual in an
easily accessible place.

 TOSHIBA MEDICAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2014-2016

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Introduction
This operation manual describes the operating procedures for Infinix-i
INFX-8000C interventional angiography systems. To ensure safe and
correct operation of the system, read the operation manual carefully
and obtain a good understanding of the system before starting
operation.
For details, contact your Toshiba representative.
This operation manual provides information concerning the following
two Infinix-i INFX-8000C systems.

Infinix-i Outline of the system

CC-i Single-plane angiography system for the heart.
This is referred to as the "CC-i system" in this manual.
VC-i Single-plane angiography system for the head, abdomen, and lower
extremities.
INFX-8000C This is referred to as the "VC-i system" in this manual.
If the system is used in combination with a CT system, refer to the
following operation manual.
 When a CT system is used in combination: 2B308-089EN

Trademarks
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Infinix is a trademark of Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation.
This manual may include trademarks and registered trademarks of other companies.
Note that the ™ mark and the  mark may or may not be used in this manual.

IMPORTANT!

1. No part of this manual may be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part,

without prior written permission.

2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice
and without legal obligation.

3. The contents of this manual are correct to the best of our knowledge.
Please inform us of any ambiguous or erroneous descriptions, missing
information, etc.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
Intellectual Property

1. Availability of This Software and Related Documents Is

Restricted
The software used for this system includes software owned by Toshiba
Medical Systems Corporation and licensed to Toshiba Medical Systems
Corporation by a Licensor.

(1) The software and related documents must be used only for this system.

(2) The intellectual property of this software and related documents is not
assigned to you.

(3) You must not copy the software or documents, nor modify the software in
whole or in part.

(4) You must not recompile or reassemble the software.

(5) You must not assign, disclose, transfer, or sublicense the software or
documents to a third party.

(6) The software is subject to the U.S. and Japanese Export Administration
Laws and Regulations and you must not export or re-export the software in
whole or in part unless properly authorized by the U.S. or Japanese
government.

(7) The information in the documents, or programs in the software are subject to
change without notice.

(8) The licensor shall have no liability for any express or implied warranties or
any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, or consequential damages related
to the software and related documents.

2. Agreement for Microsoft Software

Read the end-user license agreement for Microsoft software on the following
pages.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
3
MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS
WINDOWS 7 ULTIMATE FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
WINDOWS 7 PROFESSIONAL FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ALL VERSIONS)

These license terms are an agreement between you and Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation.
Please read them. They apply to the software included on this device. The software also
includes any separate media on which you received the software.
The software on this device includes software licensed from Microsoft Corporation or its affiliate.
The terms also apply to any Microsoft
 updates,
 supplements,
 Internet-based services, and
 support services

for this software, unless other terms accompany those items. If so, those terms apply.
If you obtain updates or supplements directly from Microsoft, then Microsoft, and not Toshiba
Medical Systems Corporation, licenses those to you.
As described below, using the software also operates as your consent to the
transmission of certain computer information for Internet-based services.
By using the software, you accept these terms. If you do not accept them, do not use the
software. Instead, contact Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation to determine its return
policy for a refund or credit.
If you comply with these license terms, you have the rights below.
1. OVERVIEW.
a. Software. The software includes desktop operating system software. This software
does not include Windows Live services. Windows Live services are available from
Microsoft under a separate agreement.
2. USE RIGHTS.
a. Use. The software license is permanently assigned to the device with which you
acquired the software. That device is the “licensed device”. You may use the software
on the licensed device.
b. Processor Limit. You may use the software with no more than two processors at any
one time.
c. Alternative Versions. You may only use the version of the software that is installed on
the licensed device. You may not change it to any other version (such as the 32-bit or
64-bit version, or another language version).
3. ADDITIONAL LICENSING REQUIREMENTS AND/OR USE RIGHTS.
a. Specific Use. Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation designed the licensed device for
a specific use. You may only use the software for that use.
b. Other Software. You may use other programs with the software as long as the other
programs
 directly support the specific use for the licensed device, or
 provide system utilities, resource management, or anti-virus or similar protection.
Software that provides consumer or business tasks or processes may not run on the
licensed device. This includes email, word processing, spreadsheet, database,
scheduling and personal finance software. The licensed device may use terminal
services protocols to access such software running on a server.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
4
 c. Device Connections. You may not use the software as server software. In other
words, more than one device may not access, display, run, share or use the software at
the same time. You may allow up to twenty other devices to access the software to use
 File Services,
 Print Services,
 Internet Information Services, and
 Internet Connection Sharing and Telephony Services.
The twenty connection limit applies to devices that access the software indirectly
through “multiplexing” or other software or hardware that pools connections. You may
use unlimited inbound connections at any time via TCP/IP.
d. Remote Access Technologies. You may access and use the software remotely from
another device using remote access technologies as follows.
Remote Desktop. The single primary user of the licensed device may access a session
from any other device using Remote Desktop or similar technologies. A “session”
means the experience of interacting with the software, directly or indirectly, through any
combination of input, output and display peripherals. Other users may access a
session from any device using these technologies, if the remote device is separately
licensed to run the software.
Other Access Technologies. You may use Remote Assistance or similar technologies to
share an active session.
Other Remote Uses. You may allow any number of devices to access the software for
purposes other than those described in the Device Connections and Remote Access
Technologies sections above, such as to synchronize data between devices.
e. Font Components. While the software is running, you may use its fonts to display and
print content. You may only
 embed fonts in content as permitted by the embedding restrictions in the fonts;
and
 temporarily download them to a printer or other output device to print content.
f. Icons, images and sounds. While the software is running, you may use but not share
its icons, images, sounds, and media.
4. POTENTIALLY UNWANTED SOFTWARE. The software includes Windows Defender. If
Windows Defender is turned on, it will search this device for “spyware,” “adware” and other
potentially unwanted software. If it finds potentially unwanted software, the software will ask
you if you want to ignore, disable (quarantine) or remove it. Any potentially unwanted
software rated “high” or “severe,” will be automatically removed after scanning unless you
change the default setting. Removing or disabling potentially unwanted software may result
in
 other software on your computer ceasing to work, or
 your breaching a license to use other software on this device.
By using this software, it is possible that you will also remove or disable software that is not
potentially unwanted software.
5. SCOPE OF LICENSE. The software is licensed, not sold. This agreement only gives you
some rights to use the software. Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation and Microsoft
reserve all other rights. Unless applicable law gives you more rights despite this limitation,
you may use the software only as expressly permitted in this agreement. In doing so, you
must comply with any technical limitations in the software that allow you to use it only in
certain ways. For more information, see the software documentation or contact Toshiba
Medical Systems Corporation. You may not:
• work around any technical limitations in the software;

No. 2B308-200EN*E
5
 • reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the software;
• make more copies of the software than specified in this agreement;
• publish the software for others to copy;
• rent, lease or lend the software; or
• use the software for commercial software hosting services.
Except as expressly provided in this agreement, rights to access the software on this device
do not give you any right to implement Microsoft patents or other Microsoft intellectual
property in software or devices that access this device.
• INTERNET-BASED SERVICES. Microsoft provides Internet-based services with the
software. Microsoft may change or cancel them at any time.
a. Consent for Internet-Based Services. The licensed device may contain one or
more of the software features described below. These features connect to
Microsoft or service provider computer systems over the Internet. In some cases,
you will not receive a separate notice when they connect. For more information
about these features, visit
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=104604.
By using these features, you consent to the transmission of this information.
Microsoft does not use the information to identify or contact you.
Computer Information. The following features use Internet protocols, which send to
the appropriate systems computer information, such as your Internet protocol
address, the type of operating system and browser, and the name and version of
the software you are using. Microsoft uses this information to make the Internet-
based services available to you. Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation has elected
to turn on the following features in the licensed device.
 Plug and Play and Plug and Play Extensions. You may connect new hardware
to your device. Your device may not have the drivers needed to communicate
with that hardware. If so, the update feature of the software can obtain the
correct driver from Microsoft and install it on your device.
 Web Content Features. Features in the software can retrieve related content
from Microsoft and provide it to you. Examples of these features are clip art,
templates, online training, online assistance and Appshelp. You may choose
not to use these web content features.
 Digital Certificates. The software uses x.509 version 3 digital certificates.
These digital certificates confirm the identity of users sending information to
each other and allow you to encrypt the information. The software retrieves
certificates and updates certificate revocation lists over the Internet.
 Auto Root Update. The Auto Root Update feature updates the list of trusted
certificate authorities. You can switch off this feature.
 Windows Media Digital Rights Management. Content owners use Windows
Media digital rights management technology (WMDRM) to protect their
intellectual property, including copyrights. This software and third party
software use WMDRM to play and copy WMDRM-protected content. If the
software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to
revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content.
Revocation does not affect other content. When you download licenses for
protected content, you agree that Microsoft may include a revocation list with
the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access
their content. Microsoft software that includes WMDRM will ask for your
consent prior to the upgrade. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to
access content that requires the upgrade. You may switch off WMDRM features
that access the Internet. When these features are off, you can still play content
for which you have a valid license.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
6
  Windows Media Player. When you use Windows Media Player, it checks with
Microsoft for
• compatible online music services in your region;
• new versions of the player; and
• codecs if your device does not have the correct ones for playing content.

For more information, go to: go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?linkid=104605.

 Malicious Software Removal/Clean On Upgrade. Before installation of the
software, the software will check and remove certain malicious software listed
at www.support.microsoft.com/?kbid=890830 (“Malware”) from your device.
When the software checks your device for Malware, a report will be sent to
Microsoft about any Malware detected or errors that occurred while the
software was checking for Malware. No information that can be used to identify
you is included in the report.
 Network Awareness. This feature determines whether a system is connected
to a network by either passive monitoring of network traffic or active DNS or
HTTP queries. The query only transfers standard TCP/IP or DNS information
for routing purposes. You can switch off the active query feature through a
registry setting.
 Windows Time Service. This service synchronizes with
www.time.windows.com once a week to provide your computer with the correct
time. The connection uses standard NTP protocol.
b. Use of Information. Microsoft may use the computer information, error reports, and
Malware reports to improve our software and services. We may also share it with
others, such as hardware and software vendors. They may use the information to
improve how their products run with Microsoft software.
c. Misuse of Internet-based Services. You may not use these services in any way
that could harm them or impair anyone else’s use of them. You may not use the
services to try to gain unauthorized access to any service, data, account or network
by any means.
6. VALIDATION.
a. Validation verifies that the software has been activated and is properly licensed. It also
verifies that no unauthorized changes have been made to the validation, licensing, or
activation functions of the software. Validation may also check for certain malicious or
unauthorized software related to such unauthorized changes. A validation check
confirming that you are properly licensed, permits you to continue to use the software,
certain features of the software or to obtain additional benefits. You are not permitted
to circumvent validation. This is to prevent unlicensed use of the software. For more
information, see go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?Linkid=104610.
b. The software will from time to time perform a validation check of the software. The
check may be initiated by the software or Microsoft. To enable the activation function
and validation checks, the software may from time to time require updates or additional
downloads of the validation, licensing or activation functions of the software. The
updates or downloads are required for the proper functioning of the software and may
be downloaded and installed without further notice to you. During or after a validation
check, the software may send information about the software, the computer and the
results of the validation check to Microsoft. This information includes, for example, the
version and product key of the software, any unauthorized changes made to the
validation, licensing or activation functions of the software, any related malicious or
unauthorized software found and the Internet protocol address of the computer.
Microsoft does not use the information to identify or contact you. By using the software,
you consent to the transmission of this information. For more information about
validation and what is sent during or after a validation check, see
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?Linkid=104611.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
7
 c. If, after a validation check, the software is found to be counterfeit, improperly licensed,
or a non-genuine Windows product, or if it includes unauthorized changes, then the
functionality and experience of using the software will be affected. For example:
Microsoft may
· repair the software, and remove, quarantine or disable any unauthorized changes
that may interfere with the proper use of the software, including circumvention of
the activation or validation functions of the software; or
· check and remove malicious or unauthorized software known to be related to such
unauthorized changes; or
· provide notice that the software is improperly licensed or a non-genuine Windows
product;
and you may
· receive reminders to obtain a properly licensed copy of the software; or
· need to follow Microsoft’s instructions to be licensed to use the software and
reactivate;
and you may not be able to
· use or continue to use the software or some of the features of the software; or
· obtain certain updates or upgrades from Microsoft.
d. You may only obtain updates or upgrades for the software from Microsoft or authorized
sources (including Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation). For more information on
obtaining updates from authorized sources see go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?Linkid=104612.
7. PRODUCT SUPPORT. Contact Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation for support options.
Refer to the support number provided with the device.
8. MICROSOFT .NET BENCHMARK TESTING. The software includes one or more
components of the .NET Framework (“.NET Components”). You may conduct internal
benchmark testing of those components. You may disclose the results of any benchmark
test of those components, provided that you comply with the conditions set forth at
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=66406.
Notwithstanding any other agreement you may have with Microsoft, if you disclose such
benchmark test results, Microsoft shall have the right to disclose the results of benchmark
tests it conducts of your products that compete with the applicable .NET Component,
provided it complies with the same conditions set forth at
go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkID=66406.
9. BACKUP COPY. You may make one backup copy of the software. You may use it only to
reinstall the software on the device.
10. DOCUMENTATION. Any person that has valid access to your computer or internal network
may copy and use the documentation for your internal, reference purposes.
11. UPGRADES. To use upgrade software, you must first be licensed for the software that is
eligible for the upgrade. Upon upgrade, this agreement takes the place of the agreement
for the software you upgraded from. After you upgrade, you may no longer use the software
you upgraded from.
12. PROOF OF LICENSE. If you acquired the software on the device, or on a disc or other
media, a genuine Certificate of Authenticity label with a genuine copy of the software
identifies licensed software. To be valid, this label must be affixed to the device, or included
on or in Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation’s software packaging. If you receive the
label separately, it is not valid. You should keep the label on the device or packaging to
prove that you are licensed to use the software. To identify genuine Microsoft software, see
http://www.howtotell.com.
13. TRANSFER TO A THIRD PARTY. You may transfer the software only with the device, the
Certificate of Authenticity label, and these license terms directly to a third party. Before the

No. 2B308-200EN*E
8
 transfer, that party must agree that these license terms apply to the transfer and use of the
software. You may not retain any copies of the software including the backup copy.

14. NOTICE ABOUT THE H.264/AVC VISUAL STANDARD, THE VC-1 VIDEO STANDARD,
THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD AND THE MPEG-2 VIDEO STANDARD. This software
may include H.264/AVC, VC-1, MPEG-4 Part 2, and MPEG-2 visual compression
technology. If the software includes those visual compression technologies MPEG LA, L.L.C.
requires this notice:
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER ONE OR MORE VIDEO PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSES SUCH AS, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE AVC, THE VC-1, THE MPEG-4
PART 2 VISUAL, AND THE MPEG-2 VIDEO PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSES FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE ABOVE STANDARDS (“VIDEO STANDARDS”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VIDEO UNDER SUCH PATENT PORTFOLIO
LICENSES. NONE OF THE LICENSES EXTEND TO ANY OTHER PRODUCT
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH PRODUCT IS INCLUDED WITH THIS PRODUCT IN
A SINGLE ARTICLE. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,
L.L.C. SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
15. NOT FAULT TOLERANT. The software is not fault tolerant. Toshiba Medical Systems
Corporation installed the software on the device and is responsible for how it
operates on the device.
16. RESTRICTED USE. The Microsoft software was designed for systems that do not require
fail-safe performance. You may not use the Microsoft software in any device or system in
which a malfunction of the software would result in foreseeable risk of injury or death to any
person. This includes operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication
systems and air traffic control.
17. THIRD PARTY PROGRAMS. The software contains third party programs. The license
terms with those programs apply to your use of them.
18. NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. The software is provided “as is”. You bear
all risks of using it. Microsoft gives no express warranties, guarantees or conditions.
Any warranties you receive regarding the device or the software do not originate
from, and are not binding on, Microsoft or its affiliates. When allowed by your local
laws, Toshiba Medical Systems Corporation and Microsoft exclude implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement.
19. LIABILITY LIMITATIONS. You can recover from Microsoft and its affiliates only direct
damages up to two hundred fifty U.S. Dollars (U.S. $250.00), or equivalent in local
currency. You cannot recover any other damages, including consequential, lost
profits, special, indirect or incidental damages.
This limitation applies to:
• anything related to the software, services, content (including code) on third
party internet sites, or third party programs, and
• claims for breach of contract, breach of warranty, guarantee or condition, strict
liability, negligence, or other tort to the extent permitted by applicable law.
It also applies even if Microsoft should have been aware of the possibility of the
damages. The above limitation may not apply to you because your country may not
allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental, consequential or other damages.
20. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. The software is subject to United States export laws and
regulations. You must comply with all domestic and international export laws and
regulations that apply to the software. These laws include restrictions on destinations, end
users and end use. For additional information, see www.microsoft.com/exporting.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
9
21. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This agreement, additional terms (including any printed-paper
license terms that accompany the software and may modify or replace some or all of these
terms), and the terms for supplements, updates, Internet-based services and support
services that you use, are the entire agreement for the software and support services.
22. APPLICABLE LAW.
a. United States. If you acquired the software in the United States, Washington state law
governs the interpretation of this agreement and applies to claims for breach of it,
regardless of conflict of laws principles. The laws of the state where you live govern all
other claims, including claims under state consumer protection laws, unfair competition
laws, and in tort.
b. Outside the United States. If you acquired the software in any other country, the laws
of that country apply.
[20110706]

No. 2B308-200EN*E
10
How to Use This Operation Manual

1. Scope of This Operation Manual

This manual describes the operating procedures for the interventional
angiography system INFX-8000C.

For the procedures for advanced image acquisition, image processing of

acquired images, image file storage, image printout, and presetting of
various system functions, refer to the reference manual provided with the
system.

For the operating procedures for optional units and units manufactured by
companies other than Toshiba (such as the TV monitor and the monitor
suspension unit), refer to the operation manual supplied with each applicable
unit.

2. Outline of Each Section of This Operation Manual

Section Contents
1 Intended purpose of the system
2 System components and optional units
3 System operating requirements (environmental/power
requirements)
4 Names and functions of each section of the system
5 Safety mechanisms of the system
6 Mounting accessories/options for the system
7 Pre-operational checks and post-operational checks
8 Turning the power of the system ON/OFF
9 Operating units installed in the examination room (support unit,
catheterization table, etc.)
10 Making an appointment, starting a study, and completing a study
11 Fluoroscopy/radiography
12 Image playback
13 Image processing during a study
14 Archiving the acquired image data
15 Image processing after a study
16 Printing the acquired images
17 Moving/storing the system
18 System maintenance (inspection, cleaning, disinfection, etc.)
19 Specifications of the system and system components
20 Technical data required by the following standards
IEC 60601-2-43
IEC 60601-1-3
IEC 60601-1-2
DHHS 21CFR § 1020
21 Error messages and corrective actions

No. 2B308-200EN*E
11
3. Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in this operation manual.

Abbreviation Meaning
ABC Automatic brightness control
EP Electrophysiological
FOV Field of view
The FOV can be changed by switching the input surface size
of the X-ray detector (FPD).
FPD Flat panel detector
FPS (f/s) Frames per second
Unit of acquisition rate for radiography and unit of pulse rate
for fluoroscopy.
Note that the unit used in this system is f/s.
IVR Interventional radiology
LCI Low Contrast Imaging
This function is used to reconstruct images of low-contrast
regions three-dimensionally and to display 3D images or
tomographic images.
(Low-contrast regions are regions such as soft tissues,
including blood vessels.)
LIH Last image hold
Used to display the last image of a fluoroscopy session as a
still image.
MIH Map Image Hold
Used to display the map image on the fluoroscopic monitor
immediately after fluoroscopy is completed.
PCI Percutaneous coronary intervention
RAID Redundant array of independent disks
An array of hard disks is used to guard against data loss and
to increase the file saving and reading speeds.
Image files are stored in the RAID.
ROI Region of interest
SEC Super Exposure Control
Radiographic condition automatic setting function
SID Source-to-image distance
Distance from the X-ray source to the FPD input surface
SSD Source-to-skin distance
Distance from the X-ray source to the patient surface

No. 2B308-200EN*E
12
4. Documents for Service Engineers

The technical documents provided for use by service engineers are listed in
the table below.

Name of document Description

Installation manual Describes the installation procedures for
the system (units in the system
configuration), including connection,
operational checks, and adjustment.
Installation quality check sheet Used to record the data at the time of
installation.
Preventive maintenance Specifies the items to be checked during
manual the periodic inspection, the inspection
intervals, and the inspection procedures.
Service manual Describes the procedures for repairing the
system when the system malfunctions.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
13
 Table of Contents

Intellectual Property ..................................................................................................... 3

How to Use This Operation Manual ................................................................ 11
Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................... 21
Important Information ............................................................................................... 36
Radiation Protection .................................................................................................. 38

1. Intended Use ...................................................................................... 39

1.1 Indications for Use.................................................................................. 40

1.2 Intended Use ............................................................................................... 40

1.3 Patient Population................................................................................... 41

1.4 User Profile................................................................................................... 41

1.5 Operating Principle ................................................................................ 41

1.6 Features .......................................................................................................... 42

2. Composition ....................................................................................... 43
2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 44

2.2 System Components ............................................................................. 46

2.3 Optional Units ............................................................................................ 49

2.4 Compatible Units ..................................................................................... 52

3. Operating Requirements ................................................... 55

3.1 Power Requirements ............................................................................. 56

3.2 Environmental Requirements ......................................................... 57

3.3 Installation Conditions......................................................................... 58

3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements ...................................... 59

No. 2B308-200EN*E
14
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures .................................................... 60

4. Names and Functions of the Parts of

the System ............................................................................................ 61
4.1 System Console (System Monitor) ............................................. 62

4.2 Main Console .............................................................................................. 75

4.3 Tableside Console .................................................................................. 80

4.4 Satellite Console (Option) ................................................................. 85

4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor ........................................................................... 88

4.6 Reference Monitor................................................................................... 94

4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit ..................................................................... 96

4.8 Catheterization Table .......................................................................... 105

5. Safety Devices ............................................................................... 123

5.1 Emergency Stop ..................................................................................... 124

5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies ........................................... 126

5.3 Interlocks ..................................................................................................... 127

5.4 Interference Warning Function .................................................... 129

5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in

Emergencies ............................................................................................. 130

5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation .................................................. 131

5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy ........................................................................... 133

5.8 System Reset ............................................................................................ 134

5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown

Mode................................................................................................................ 137

5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure ................................................................ 138

No. 2B308-200EN*E
15
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study")
From the Examination Room ........................................................ 140

5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling

Systems ........................................................................................................ 141

5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients ............ 141

6. Installation of Accessories and

Optional Units................................................................................. 143
6.1 Installing the Tableside Console ................................................ 144

6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option) ............................... 148

6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps ............................................................... 150

6.4 Connecting the Cables ...................................................................... 151

6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports ................ 153

6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand ........... 154

6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm) ............................................... 155

6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option) ................... 156

6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option) ............................................ 157

6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option) .............................................. 160

6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option) .......................... 161

6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch

(Option) ......................................................................................................... 163

6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option) ........ 164

6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band

(CAT-880B) ................................................................................................. 165

6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)................................ 167

6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail

(CAT-880B) ................................................................................................. 168

No. 2B308-200EN*E
16
6.17 Other Catheterization Table Options ....................................... 170

6.18 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer ...................... 171

7. Daily Checks..................................................................................... 173

7.1 Checks Before Operation ................................................................ 174

7.2 Checks After Operation..................................................................... 178

8. Turning the System Power ON/OFF ................. 179

8.1 Turning the System Power ON .................................................... 180

8.2 Turning the System Power OFF

(System Shutdown) .............................................................................. 182

9. Operating Procedures for Units in the

Examination Room .................................................................. 185
9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit ....................... 188

9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization

Table................................................................................................................ 202

9.3 Auto-Positioning .................................................................................... 211

9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions ..................................... 219

9.5 Auto Set (Systems with the CAS-930A) ................................. 224

9.6 Route Run

(for systems in which the CAS-930A is used) .................. 225

9.7 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option) .................. 227

9.8 Operating the Monitor Integration System

(Option) ......................................................................................................... 228

10. Study Appointment ................................................................. 231

10.1 Patient Mode Selection ...................................................................... 232

No. 2B308-200EN*E
17
10.2 Appointment for a New Study ...................................................... 233

10.3 Start Study .................................................................................................. 234

10.4 Finish Study............................................................................................... 236

10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance ............................................................. 238

10.6 Repeat Study Appointment ............................................................ 241

10.7 Image Link .................................................................................................. 244

10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment ................................. 245

10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS ................................................. 246

10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS ....................................... 247

10.11 RDS/RDSR Transfer ............................................................................. 248

11. Fluoroscopy/Radiography
(Acquisition Mode)................................................................... 251
11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode ........................................................... 254

11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program ........................................... 255

11.3 Fluoroscopy............................................................................................... 256

11.4 DA/One-Shot Radiography ............................................................. 262

11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA) ................................ 267

11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and

Radiography .............................................................................................. 280

11.7 FPD Calibration ....................................................................................... 295

12. Image Playback ............................................................................ 297

12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image ..................................... 299

12.2 Dynamic Image Playback ................................................................. 303

12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference

Monitor and Selecting Functions ............................................... 306

No. 2B308-200EN*E
18
13. Image Processing During a Study
(Exam Mode)..................................................................................... 307

14. Image File Management

(Directory Mode) ......................................................................... 309

15. Image Processing After Completion of

a Study (Review Mode) ...................................................... 311

16. Printing (Printing Mode) ................................................... 313

17. Moving and Storage ............................................................... 315

17.1 Moving ........................................................................................................... 316

17.2 Storage .......................................................................................................... 316

18. System Maintenance ............................................................. 317

18.1 Daily Checks ............................................................................................. 318

18.2 Periodic Inspection .............................................................................. 318

18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts ........................................................... 332

18.4 Cleaning........................................................................................................ 337

18.5 Disinfection ................................................................................................ 339

18.6 Sterilization ................................................................................................ 340

18.7 Disposal of the System ..................................................................... 341

18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements in

the USA (Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act)........... 342

19. Specifications ................................................................................. 343

19.1 Electrical Safety ...................................................................................... 344

No. 2B308-200EN*E
19
19.2 Support Unit .............................................................................................. 345

19.3 Catheterization Table .......................................................................... 348

19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device........................................................... 349

19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly .......................................................................... 350

19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)................................................... 351

19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit ................................................................. 353

19.8 TV Monitors (for image display) .................................................. 354

19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG) .................... 356

19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000B/B2) ................... 358

19.11 Power Requirements ........................................................................... 374

19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options............................. 376

19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections ....................... 377

19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC) ............................................................ 378

20. Technical Data ............................................................................... 379

20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43 ...................... 380

20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2 ......................... 407

20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3 ......................... 412

20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020 ......... 414

20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging ....... 421

21. System Message Display ................................................ 423

21.1 Message Display Section ................................................................. 424

21.2 Message Types........................................................................................ 425

21.3 Corrective Actions ................................................................................ 426

No. 2B308-200EN*E
20
Safety Precautions

1. Meaning of Signal Words

In this manual, the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and

CAUTION are used to indicate safety and other important instructions.
The signal words and their meanings are defined as follows. Please
understand their meanings clearly before reading this manual.

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

may result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in property damage.

In addition to the above, the signal word NOTE is used to indicate other
important information.

NOTE Indicates reference information that enables more efficient use of the
equipment.

2. Meaning of Safety Symbols

Symbol Name Meaning

Safety alert symbol Indicates the possibility of injury.

Read the related precautions in the operation manual.

Emergency stop Indicates a switch that can be used to immediately stop

operation of the equipment in an emergency.

Ionizing radiation Indicates the presence of hazardous ionizing radiation.

Refer to Indicates that the user should refer to the operation

documentation manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
21
3. Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions to ensure the safety of patients and
operators. In addition to the following precautions, the precautions specific
to each operation are described in the corresponding sections of this manual.
Be sure to observe these specific precautions as well.

DANGER: This system is not explosion-proof. Do not use flammable or explosive

gases near this system. An explosion may occur.

WARNING: 1. Minimize the X-ray exposure of the patient.

 In order to reduce the exposure dose to regions that are not

applicable, limit the X-ray exposure field to the applicable region
using the beam limiting device.

 Place the FPD as close to the patient as possible.

 Long-time fluoroscopy (in particular, for the same region) should be

minimized.

 With typical operating conditions (patient thickness = 20 cm, PID =

10 cm), note that the surface dose rate (including back-scattered
radiation) during fluoroscopy (normal mode, pulsed fluoroscopy,
15 P/S) is approximately 20 mGy/min.
In the following cases, the exposure dose will be larger.

1) When the patient thickness is greater

2) When the arm is being angulated

3) When the FPD is moving away from the patient

In general cases, it is considered that temporary hair loss may occur

at a dose of 3 Gy and erythema may occur at a dose of 6 Gy. (For the
above "20 mGy/min" case, the dose will be 3 Gy for 150 minutes.)

 Carefully observe the cumulative fluoroscopic time displayed on the

fluoroscopic monitor. If fluoroscopy is to be performed for a long
time, select Low-rate fluoroscopy mode and change the X-ray beam
direction, etc. so that the exposure to the same region is reduced.

 In HLC (high-level control) fluoroscopy, the maximum patient

incident dose rate is 175 mGy/min. The exposure dose is larger than
in normal fluoroscopy.
Minimize the total HLC fluoroscopic time.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
22
WARNING: 2. Minimize the X-ray exposure of personnel engaged in clinical treatment
(physicians, radiological technologists, nurses, etc.) by taking
adequate X-ray protective measures such as ensuring that X-ray
protective aprons or X-ray protective plates are used. For the
protective equipment that can be used with this system, contact your
Toshiba service representative.

3. If a serious failure occurs, it may be impossible to restore the system

using the Reset button or by turning the power OFF and then ON again.
In this case, catheterization procedures cannot be continued. It is
recommended that another system with which fluoroscopy can be
performed (such as a surgical C-arm support unit) or another room for
catheterization procedures/IVR be kept available.

4. Take special care to prevent incorrect X-ray exposure. When setting

the system to the standby status with the power ON, use the X-ray
exposure disable button to prevent incorrect X-ray exposure.

5. If 90% or more of the total heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube
anode is used, stop X-ray generation. If the X-ray tube assembly is
used under extreme conditions, the service life of the X-ray tube
assembly will be reduced.
If fluoroscopy is performed continuously in this status, when the heat
storage capacity reaches the maximum level, X-ray generation is
forcibly stopped. The heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube anode
can be checked on the system monitor or fluoroscopic monitor.

6. Do not allow metal objects, such as paper clips or staples, or liquids,

such as coffee, to enter the system. Doing so may result in a short
circuit or smoke generation. If any foreign substance enters the
system, turn the power OFF and contact your Toshiba representative
for inspection.

7. Special care must be taken to prevent interference between persons in

the examination room and the units used in combination.
If interference occurs, the concerned person may be injured. Special
care must also be taken to prevent interference between units used in
combination. If interference occurs, the concerned units may be
damaged and, in addition, persons near the units may be injured.

 Take special care to prevent the support unit from interfering with
the patient and other persons in the examination room.

 Take special care to prevent the support unit and the catheterization
table from interfering with peripheral units or devices such as
contrast medium injectors, monitors, and monitor suspension units.
In particular, the lower section of the tabletop of the catheterization
table is obstructed from view and therefore great care is required.

 Take care to prevent interference between the support unit and the
catheterization table. In particular, pay special attention to the
objects that are mounted to the catheterization table, such as the
tabletop, the armrest, etc.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
23
WARNING: 8. This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.

9. When using map images, confirm that the images created from the
images acquired during the previous study are no longer displayed on
the reference monitor. If the images are identified incorrectly,
misdiagnosis will result.
The related information for the displayed image can be checked in the
Examination Date display field of the Image-Related Information
display area on the reference monitor.

10. When the image-related information is edited, special care is required

to select the correct data for editing and to enter correct data.
Otherwise, misdiagnosis may result.

11. When rearrangement of image data is performed, special care is

required to modify the data correctly. If the data for another patient or
another study is assigned, misdiagnosis may result.

12. If smoke is generated from the system, be careful not to breathe the
smoke or expose your eyes to it.
The gases generated may include components that can irritate the
mucous lining. If you feel irritation to your eyes or throat, immediately
wash them. If you still feel irritation, consult a physician.

13. If a liquid such as coolant leaks from the system, immediately contact
your Toshiba representative without touching the liquid. Touching
such liquids may cause skin irritation.
If such a liquid comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected
area with soap and rinse it with copious amounts of water. If the skin
irritation continues even after washing, consult a physician.

14. If the main unit of an implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable

cardiac defibrillator is continuously exposed to a pulsed X-ray beam, it
may malfunction.

If it is necessary to continuously expose the implantation site to a

pulsed X-ray beam, refer to the operation manual for the implantable
cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardiac defibrillator or consult the
vendor regarding the required countermeasures. Be sure to implement
the countermeasures appropriately.

In fluoroscopic or radiographic examinations involving continuous

exposure to a pulsed X-ray beam (e.g., multiple radiographic exposures
within a few seconds, pulsed fluoroscopy, DA, DSA, or CINE), the
C-MOS circuits in the implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable
cardiac defibrillator may malfunction, causing oversensing. As a
result, pacing pulse output may be suppressed temporarily or a
defibrillation pulse may be triggered inappropriately.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
24
CAUTION: 1. Do not bring devices that generate electromagnetic waves (cellular
phones, transceivers, radio-controlled toys, etc.) into the room in
which this system is installed. Electromagnetic waves may cause the
system to malfunction.

2. Only the standard units and optional units specified in this operation
manual can be used in combination with this system.
If units other than those specified are used in combination, fire, electric
shock, failure, or malfunction may result.

3. Confirm that the GND cable of the system is connected to the

grounding terminal in accordance with all applicable legal
requirements for medically used electrical systems. If grounding is not
performed properly, an electric shock may occur.

4. If this equipment is connected to a network for which any of the

following conditions is true, the system can be infected with malware
(malicious software, such as a computer virus or worm, that harms
computers). The user must establish security measures to prevent the
equipment from being infected.

 Security control is not established for the network.

 There is a risk of malware invasion in the network.

 Equipment for which any of the following conditions is true is

connected to the network.

(a) The security of the equipment is not controlled by the user.

(b) The equipment can be accessed by persons not authorized by

the user.

(c) The equipment is capable of wireless communication.

5. The following instructions must be observed in order to prevent this

equipment from being infected with malware (malicious software, such
as a computer virus or worm, that harms computers).
If the equipment is infected with malware, the data stored in the
equipment may be lost, tampered with, or accessed by unauthorized
persons; the equipment may operate incorrectly; or the equipment may
become a source of malware infection.

 Do not connect this equipment to a network for which security

control is not established.

 Do not connect this equipment to the Internet.

 When an external storage media (such as a DVD or MO) is to be

used, confirm in advance that the media is not infected with malware.

 Do not perform any other actions that may result in infection.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
25
CAUTION: 6. The security software McAfee Embedded Control (MEC) by McAfee,
Inc. has been installed in this equipment. MEC is whitelist-type
security software. MEC prevents execution of malware by only
allowing activation of executable files registered in the whitelist for the
equipment. However, even with MEC installed, it is possible for the
equipment to be infected with malware. The user must establish
security measures to prevent equipment from being infected.

7. Before using the system, be sure to perform the pre-operation checks.

8. If any system abnormality is found or system malfunction occurs, turn

OFF the power of the system, post a sign reading "DO NOT USE" on
the system, and contact your Toshiba service representative for
inspection and repair.

9. Before using the system, be sure that you fully understand the features
of the FPD.

(a) As a basic characteristic of the flat panel detector (FPD), the

brightness in some small sections on images may differ from that
in another sections. Keep this in mind when performing image
interpretation. Failure to keep this characteristic in mind may lead
to incorrect diagnosis.

Since the sections showing differences in brightness vary

depending on the FPD, it is important to be familiar with the
characteristics of the individual FPD used.

(b) As a basic characteristics of the FPD, the last

fluoroscopic/radiographic image displayed may appear on images
as an after-image. Do not use images with an after-image for
diagnosis. If images with an after-image are used, incorrect
diagnosis may result.

If an after-image is seen on images, perform

fluoroscopy/radiography again.

(c) Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming
studies after several hours has elapsed since the system power
was turned OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait for at
least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning
ON the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear before starting the study.

10. To minimize X-ray exposure to the patient, ensure that the SSD
(source-to-skin distance) is as great as possible when performing
fluoroscopy/radiography.

11. If objects (even those that may be required for examination) are placed
within the X-ray beam, adverse effects such as scattered radiation will
result.

12. Do not place any objects on units such as the support unit or monitor
suspension unit, which are near the patient. If such objects fall off,
they may hit the patient.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
26
CAUTION: 13. When the support unit is near the patient, operate the support unit at
the slow speed.

14. The tableside console or control switches of the units used in

combination must be installed at the specified locations. If the
switches are placed at locations other than those specified, such as on
the floor or on the catheterization table, incorrect operation or damage
to the switches may result.
For the mounting procedures, refer to section 6 "Installation of
Accessories and Optional Units".

15. To ensure that objects that are mounted on the catheterization table
(such as the tableside console) do not fall, use both hands when
attaching, removing, or moving them.

16. When transferring the patient from/to the stretcher or catheterization

table, hold the patient securely and transfer him/her extremely
carefully, avoiding contact with peripheral units and units mounted on
the catheterization table (such as the armrests or arm supports). If the
patient comes into contact with these objects, he/she may be injured or
an accident may result.

17. Do not remove the cover of any section of the system.

If a cover is removed, an electric shock may result or image/patient
data may be lost due to system malfunctions.

18. Do not install any application software in this system. If other

applications are installed, system operation may be adversely affected,
possibly resulting in the loss of image/patient data due to system
malfunctions.

19. Do not turn OFF the power of the system inadvertently while a study is
being performed.
Normal images may not be acquired or image/patient data may be lost.

20. When radiography is performed using the injector interlock, confirm

that the injector is operable before performing radiography.

21. Before starting image acquisition, confirm that the free space on the
RAID is sufficient.

22. If study protocols registered for urgent cases are deleted, be sure to
register the substitute study protocols. If the study protocols are
changed, notify the system operators of all changed contents. If a
study for an urgent case is started while the operator is unaware of the
changed contents, the study may be adversely affected.

23. If acquisition programs in study protocols registered for urgent cases

are changed/deleted, notify the system operators of all changed
contents. If study for an urgent case is started while the operator is
unaware of the changed contents, the study may be adversely affected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
27
CAUTION: 24. If a new study protocol with high-level-control fluoroscopy mode (HLC
mode) is created, manage the study protocol as follows.
In systems for the USA, do not select HLC mode when registering a
study protocol.

 Do not register the new study protocol at the top of the list. Be sure
to register it in the second place or lower. If it is registered at the
top, the study protocol with HLC mode may be selected
unintentionally.
 Use the study protocol name so that it is possible to identify that
HLC mode is selected for the study protocol.

Example) "Coronary HLC"

25. If imaging devices other than those included in the standard

configuration or optional units of the system are used, be sure to
supply power for these devices from a medical isolation transformer.
If power is supplied from another source, the system leakage current
may exceed the allowable value, resulting in electric shock.

26. Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform preventive

maintenance.
If preventive maintenance is performed by users or any other persons
who are qualified for preventive maintenance, special care must be
taken to ensure safety. Before performing preventive maintenance of
the system, carefully read the maintenance and inspection manual
provided with the Toshiba Infinix-i system and fully understand the
contents of the work and the precautions to be observed to ensure
safety.

27. Do not place any objects in front of the power distribution board as
doing so may block access to the circuit breaker.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
28
CAUTION: 1. Use the system within the operating environmental conditions specified in
subsection 3.2 "Environmental Requirements". In addition, observe the
storage conditions specified in item (1) "Environmental conditions for
storage" of subsection 17.2 when the system is not going to be used for a
long time. If the system is used or stored in an environment outside the
specified conditions, a system malfunction may occur.

2. Do not place any objects on the water-cooling unit. The cooling capability
may be reduced and overheating may occur, disabling system operation. If
a heavy component is placed on the top of the water-cooling unit, the system
may be damaged.

3. Do not use the system in an environment where abrupt temperature changes

can occur. Abrupt temperature changes can produce condensation within
the system, which may cause corrosion or a malfunction in the system.

4. When the X-ray tube assembly is discharged, X-ray output may be stopped
temporarily. In this case, the images may be affected.

5. Be sure to use the X-ray tube assembly specified in this operation manual. If
an X-ray tube assembly other than that specified is used, the leakage X-rays
may increase or the optimal X-ray field may not be obtained.

6. If a stretcher is moved close to the catheterization table when the patient is

transferred to or from the table, take great care to prevent the stretcher from
interfering with the tableside console or peripheral units such as contrast
medium injectors.

7. Setting/changing of parameters in Acquisition mode must be performed by

an operator who is familiar with the system operation. If the parameters are
set inappropriately, the system may not operate normally.

8. Do not remove a CD-R or DVD±R from the system while image data from
the CD-R or DVD±R is being transferred to another recording media or the
image data from another media is being recorded on the CD-R or DVD±R. If
a CD-R or DVD±R is removed while such processing is in progress, the data
may be damaged.

9. Periodic replacement of the hard disk is required because it may become

defective due to deterioration with age, resulting in loss of image data and
patient data.
For the replacement interval, refer to subsection 18.3 "Periodically Replaced
Parts".

10. To prevent loss of data recorded in the RAID, routinely back up the image
data for each patient on films, CD-Rs, etc. Do not continue accumulating
image data on the hard disk of the image processor.

11. Be extremely careful not to allow the coolant circulator of the FPD to fall.
The coolant circulator has a high center of gravity and may fall easily.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
29
4. Description of Warning Labels

In order to use the system safely, warning labels have been attached to the
system main unit as shown below. Before using the system, check the
mounting positions and contents of the warning labels.

(1) Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-830B/A1

No. 2B308-200EN*E
30
(2) Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-930A

No. 2B308-200EN*E
31
 (3) Catheterization table CAT-850B/CAT-860B

* Hand injury hazard. * Hazard due to possible tabletop damage.

At the sections where this warning Do not perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation
label is attached, special care must be (CPR) with the tabletop slid toward the patient
taken to prevent hands or fingers from head end in the longitudinal direction.
being caught between the tabletop
and the frame.

Tabletop

Frame

No. 2B308-200EN*E
32
(4) Catheterization table CAT-880B

No. 2B308-200EN*E
33
(5) Tableside console

This label indicates that this operation manual must be referred to in order to
perform operation safely and correctly.

(6) Table operating box (for the CAT-880B)

This label indicates that this operation manual must be referred to in order to
perform operation safely and correctly.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
34
(7) Wireless footswitch (option)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
35
Important Information
1. To ensure safe and correct operation of the system, read the operation
manual carefully and obtain a good understanding of the system before
starting operation.
For details, contact your TOSHIBA representative.

2. The responsibility for maintenance and management of the product after

delivery resides with the customer who has purchased the product.

3. The warranty does not cover the following items, even during the warranty
period:

(1) Damage or loss due to misuse or abuse.

(2) Damage or loss caused by Acts of God such as fires, earthquakes,

floods, lightning, etc.

(3) Damage or loss caused by failure to meet the specified conditions for
this equipment, such as inadequate power supply, improper installation,
or unacceptable environmental conditions.

(4) Damage or loss due to mobile use in a vehicle which is not authorized
by TOSHIBA.

(5) Damage or loss due to use outside the territory in which the equipment
was originally sold.

(6) Damage or loss involving equipment purchased from a source other

than TOSHIBA or its authorized distributors or agents.

(7) Damage or loss resulting from infection by malware (malicious

software, such as a computer virus or worm, that harms computers).

(8) As a basic characteristics of the flat panel detector (FPD), the following
phenomena may occur.
However, these phenomena are not system abnormalities and are not
covered by the warranty.

 In FPDs, the output level of some pixels may differ from that of the
surrounding pixels. Therefore, some pixels may show differences in
brightness compared with the surrounding pixels.
 The sensitivity at the margins of the FPD input screen may be low
sometimes. In this case, there is a possibility of images being
adversely affected because the brightness may be low or artifacts
may occur at these margins.
 When radiography or fluoroscopy is performed for target objects with
large differences in X-ray absorption, the acquired image may be
seen on subsequent images as an after-image.

(9) The warranty of the tabletop mat does not cover the following.

 Changes in the characteristics over time due to use (such as

changes in hardness).
 For the tabletop mat (XBTM-001A): Changes in characteristics over
time due to use (such as changes in hardness) as well as
depressions of less than 2 cm caused by repeated use.

4. This equipment shall not be used by persons other than fully qualified and
certified medical personnel.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
36
5. Although operation is performed only by the persons described above,
TOSHIBA will not be held responsible for diagnostic results or any
secondary damage resulting from the data obtained through operation of the
equipment.

6. Do not make changes or modifications to the software or hardware of this

product.

7. In no event shall TOSHIBA be liable for problems, damage, or loss caused

by relocation, modification, or repair performed by personnel other than
those designated by TOSHIBA.

8. The purpose of this equipment is to provide doctors with data for clinical
diagnosis.

The responsibility for diagnostic procedures lies with the physicians involved.
TOSHIBA shall not be liable for the results of diagnostic procedures.

9. Important data must be backed up on external recording media such as

clinical records, notebooks, DVDs, or magnetic tapes.

10. TOSHIBA shall not be liable for loss of data stored in the memory of this
equipment caused by operator error or accidents.

11. TOSHIBA will not be held responsible for any infections of physicians,
engineers, nurses, or patients caused by the equipment.

Proper disinfection of the equipment is the responsibility of the user.

12. This manual contains warnings regarding foreseeable potential dangers. Be

alert at all times to dangers other than those indicated.

13. TOSHIBA shall not be liable for damage or loss that results from negligence
or from ignoring the precautions and operating instructions contained in this
operation manual.

14. On the occasion of change of the administrator or manager for this

equipment, be sure to hand over this operation manual.

15. TOSHIBA shall not be liable for damage resulting from use in combination
with units other than the standard components, optional units, and standard
units used in combination described in this manual.

16. This equipment shall be connected to a network only if security measures

against infection by malware (malicious software, such as a computer virus
or worm, that harms computers) have been established for the network.

17. This equipment shall be connected to a network with an environment

specified by TOSHIBA. Consult your TOSHIBA representative for details.

18. TOSHIBA shall not be liable for the following events resulting from infection
by malware (malicious software, such as a computer virus or worm, that
harms computers).

 Deletion, tampering, or leakage of data (including clinical data) stored in this

product
 Accidents due to malfunction of this product
 Infection of other products via this product or damages resulting from such
infection
 Any other events resulting from infection with malware

No. 2B308-200EN*E
37
Radiation Protection
1. Significant zone of occupancy

The area expected to be entered by physicians, radiological technologists,

and nurses during normal X-ray angiography is referred to as the significant
zone of occupancy. Note that this area excludes that which may be entered
in emergencies or when using special techniques. For this system, the
shaded sections (up to a height of 2000 mm from the floor) in the figure
below indicate the significant zone of occupancy.

(Unit: mm)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
38
1. Intended Use
Contents 1.1 Indications for Use
1.2 Intended Use
1.3 Patient Population
1.4 User Profile
1.5 Operating Principle
1.6 Features

No. 2B308-200EN*E
39
1.1 Indications for Use
INFX-8000C is a digital radiography/fluoroscopy system used in a diagnostic
and interventional angiography configuration. The system is indicated for use
in diagnostic and angiographic procedures for blood vessels in the heart,
brain, abdomen and lower extremities.

1.2 Intended Use

INFX-8000C systems are diagnostic X-ray systems designed for
multidirectional observation of the flow of contrast medium injected into the
blood vessels of a patient.

• CC-i system This system is designed for selective cardiac angiography (with
catheterization).
This system is intended for use in interventional procedures for cardiac
vessels, such as PCI, and also for use in EP (electrophysiological) studies.

• VC-i system This system is designed for selective angiography (with catheterization) of
the head, abdomen, and lower extremities.
This system is intended for use in interventional procedures, such as
embolization, for blood vessels in the head and lower extremities.

CAUTION: Federal law restricts this device to sale, distribution, and use by or on the
order of a physician.
INFX-8000C systems are limited by law to investigational use for indications
not specified in this section.
This caution is only for the U.S.A.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
40
1.3 Patient Population
Intended patients : Not specified

Mass of intended patients : The allowable maximum mass of the patient

differs depending on the catheterization table
used in combination. Refer to subsection 3.4
"Classification & Safety Requirements".

1.4 User Profile

Intended operators : Radiological technologists or physicians who
have undergone the following training.

Operators who enter patient information:

Radiological technologists, physicians, nurses,
or other medical staff who have undergone the
following training.

Persons who have access to the system:

Medical staff specified above, service
engineers, attendants, and cleaning personnel

Training : Before using the system, all operators must

undergo sufficient training as described in this
operation manual. Contact your Toshiba
service representative for training.

1.5 Operating Principle

High-voltage output from an X-ray generator, which is provided for this
system, is supplied to an X-ray tube assembly to generate X-rays, and the
generated X-rays pass through the patient. At this time, the generated
X-rays are collimated to the desired exposure field size using an X-ray beam
limiting device. After scattered radiation is reduced by an X-ray grid, the
X-rays that have passed through the patient are converted into electrical
signals by an X-ray detector using the X-ray scintillation effect, and these
electrical signals are then sent to a digital radiography system as digital
image signals. The digital radiography system performs digital image
processing and records the processed images. At the same time, it displays
the images on the System monitor and the Fluoroscopic or Reference
monitor. The digital radiography system also supports network data transfer.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
41
1.6 Features
(1) A tube support that allows positioning for radiography to be performed by
simple operation is used in combination. The autopositioning and auto angle
functions, which are described in (2) below, are provided for the tube support,
making it possible to automatically reproduce the radiographic position.

(2) The autopositioning function for automatically reproducing the preset

radiographic position, the auto angle function for automatically reproducing
the radiographic position used for image acquisition, and the auto map
function for automatically retrieving images acquired at an angle close to the
current radiographic position are provided.

In addition, the sequential navigation function is provided and the

radiographic techniques and radiographic positions preset for the target
routine study are reproduced sequentially during radiography using this
function.

(3) Various functions such as pulsed fluoroscopy, various dose settings, pulse
rate setting, beam hardening filters, and virtual collimation, virtual filtering,
and virtual ROI using an LIH image are provided. The exposure dose can
be reduced by using such functions in combination.

(4) The acquired images can be analyzed, output to films, and stored on media
(background processing) during examination. These processes can be
performed simultaneously, significantly reducing the time required for
examination.

(5) DICOM Print, Storage, Storage Commitment, Q&R, MWM, and MPPS can
be used.

(6) Various types of image processing, DPRF (dynamic pattern recognition filter),
ADCF (advanced digital compensation filter), and SNRF (super noise
reduction filter) are provided, reducing persistence and noise in images.

(7) Various safety functions, data storage to RAID, reduced operation mode in
the case of system failure, and interlocks and touch sensors for preventing
accidents are provided.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
42
2. Composition
Contents 2.1 Outline
2.2 System Components
2.3 Optional Units
2.4 Compatible Units

No. 2B308-200EN*E
43
2.1 Outline
INFX-8000C systems consist of standard and optional units. The system
configuration differs according to the diagnostic purpose. The figures below
show a configuration example.

(1) Control room

Control room

Fluoroscopic monitor and reference monitor

The fluoroscopic monitor displays fluoroscopic and radiographic images.

The reference monitor displays the reference images required for the studies.
These monitors are also installed in the examination room.

Main console

The main console enables control of operations in the examination room

from the control room.

System console

The system console is used to perform study-related operations such as

registration and retrieval of patient/study information, support of various
studies, file manipulation, and image processing.

The system console consists of a keyboard, system monitor, and mouse.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
44
(2) Examination room
(2.1) Systems with the CAS-830B

(2.2) Systems with the CAS-930A

No. 2B308-200EN*E
45
2.2 System Components
(1) System components
The table below lists the system components for each system model. 
indicates that the unit is provided as the standard, while  indicates that a
choice of units is available.
Note that the units that can be used in combination differ depending on a
variety of conditions. For details, contact your Toshiba service
representative.

Unit Model name (*1) CC-i VC-i

Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-830B/A1  
CAS-930A 
Tableside console XGCP-880BA  
XGCP-930BA  (*2)
Diagnostic X-ray beam limiting device BLA-900C 
BLA-900A 
X-ray tube assembly DSRX-T7444GDS 
DSRX-T7345GFS 
DSRX-T7445GFS (*3) 
Rotating-anode high-speed starter ST-7008  
Cable kit for DSRX-T7444GDS TLA-7008  
Water-cooled heat exchanger HEX-125  
Heat exchanger hose HEH-10040  
High-voltage cable HCM-150LCS/30  
X-ray tube assembly mounting kit XGTM-048C 
XGTM-028A 
XGTM-028N 
XGTM-903A  (*2)
X-ray flat panel detector 8-inch FPD TFP-800A/A1 
TFP-800A/C1 
1216-inch FPD TFP-1216A/A1 
TFP-1216A/C1 
12-inch FPD TFP-1200A 
TFP-1200A/C1 
FPD mounting kit XGFM-083C (*4) 
XGFM-163A (*4) 
XGFM-088B/E1  
XGFM-128B/E1 
XGFM-163B/E1 
XGFM-168B (*3) 
XGFM-163C  (*2)
Catheterization table CAT-850B  
CAT-860B  
CAT-880B  
Footswitch XBFS-850S  
XBFS-880S  
XBFS-880S/A1  
Digital radiography system DFP-8000B/B2  
Keyboard kit XIDF-KBD801/EN  

No. 2B308-200EN*E
46
 Unit Model name (*1) CC-i VC-i
TV monitor ML19193 or  
 for examination room equivalent
 for control room CL19196 or  
 for large-screen monitor backup equivalent
System monitor CDL2013A-1A or  
equivalent
Main console C (*4) XIDF-MCC80S  
Power ON switch box XIDF-PON801  
Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room XIDF-FS801S  
X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG  
Monitor suspension IDI1000F-2WCA  
IDI1000F-3WCA  
IDI1000F-4WCA  
IDI1000F-6WCA  
MSF-04A  
MSF-06A  
MSF-56A  
RGB unit XIDF-RGB801  
DVI unit XIDF-DVI801  

*1) The auxiliary model number (/**) appended to the model name of some units
is omitted in the text of the operation and reference manuals.

*2) For the support unit CAS-930A

*3) Intended for X-ray flat panel detector TFP-1216A/C1.

*4) The X-ray grid attachment unit is not provided.

*5) Referred to as the "main console" in the operation and reference manuals.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
47
(2) Main unit components
The table below shows the components constituting the main unit.

Main unit Component Quantity

C-arm support unit C-arm support unit main body 1
• CAS-830B/A1 Control cabinet 1
• CAS-930A Connection cables 1 set
Catheterization table Catheterization table main body 1
• CAT-850B Tabletop mat 1
• CAT-860B Drip infusion stand 1
Arm support (acrylic) : XBAS-001A 1
Armrest (CFRP) : XBAR-001A 1
Catheterization table Catheterization table main body 1
• CAT-880B Table operation box 1
Drip infusion stand 1
Tabletop mat 1
Patient immobilization band 2
Digital radiography Digital radiography main body 1
system Console control box 1
• DFP-8000B/B2 RAID 1
System transformer 1
Keyboard kit Keyboard 1
• XTDF-KBD801/EN Mouse 1
X-ray high-voltage System transformer 1
generator Power cabinet 1
• XTP-8100XG Connection cables 1 set

No. 2B308-200EN*E
48
2.3 Optional Units
The optional units are listed in the table below.

Optional unit Model name CC-i VC-i

Ceiling height adjustment kit XGHA-001A  
XGHA-002A 
Satellite console XGCP-880AA  
XGCP-930AA 
IVR-CT kit (for systems with Aquilion LB) XGCT-830C 
IVR-CT kit (for systems with Aquilion ONE) XGCT-830D 
IVR-CT kit (for systems with PRIME) XGCT-830E 
Extension rails XGCR-060A  
Tabletop control switch XBFG-001A  
Interface kit XGTT-830A  
XGTT-930A 
Magnetic shield kit XGPA-800A

(for TFP-800A/A1, TFP-800A/C1)
Magnetic shield kit XGPA-1200A

(for TFP-1200A, TFP-1200A/C1)
Magnetic shield kit (for TFP-1216A/A1, TFP- XGPA-1216A

1216A/C1)
Tabletop control console (for the CAT-850B) XBFG-850B  
Footswitch (additional) (*1) XBFS-850S  
XBFS-880S  
XBFS-880S/A1  
Wireless footswitch (*2) (*3) XBFS-880WS  
Wireless footswitch kit (*3) (for CAT-850B, XBFM-850A
 
CAT-860B)
Wireless footswitch kit (*3) (for CAT-880B) XBFM-880A  
Armrest (for one arm) (for the CAT-880B) XBAR-001A  
Armrest (for both arms) XBAR110A  
Handgrip (for the CAT-850B/CAT-860B) XBHG-001A  
Handgrip (for the CAT-880B) XBHG-002A  
Arm cover XBAC-001A  
Accessory tabletop rail (for the CAT-880B) XBAM-001A  
Drape holder (for the CAT-880B) XBDB-001A  
Extension tabletop XBET-860B  
Base plate (for the CAT-850B/CAT-880B) XBBP250B  
Extension rails XBER-001A  
Extension table XBET-001A  
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A  
(for the CAT-850B)
Tabletop mat (low-rebound, thickness = 5 cm) XBTM-001A  
(for the CAT-850B)
System cabinet CAB-100B  
Side cover CABS-100B  
Corner cover CABC-100B  

No. 2B308-200EN*E
49
 Optional unit Model name CC-i VC-i
TV monitor ML19193 or  
 for examination room CL19196
 for control room
 for large-screen monitor backup
Kit for adding the reference monitor XIDF-REF801/B1
 
(for RGB connection)
Kit for adding the reference monitor XIDF-REF801/DV
 
(for DVI connection)
Stepping DSA support kit (for the CAT-850B) XBSD-850B  
Stepping DSA kit XIDF-STP801  
Rotational DSA kit XIDF-ROT801  
3D-Angio kit XIDF-3DI801  
Low-contrast imaging kit XIDF-LCI801 
3D Roadmap kit XIDF-3DP802/A1  
Security kit for DoD XIDF-SEC802  
Scan converter DSC-X001A  
Microphone kit XIDF-MIC802  
Ext. signal display kit XIDF-ESD801  
Color LCD monitor CDL2013A-1A or  
equivalent
Area dose meter ion chamber XJDC-009A 
XJDC-016A 
Area dose meter XJDK-001A/V5  
Review console XIDF-RVC801  
Spot fluoroscopy kit XIDF-SFL801  
SNRF kit XIDF-SNR801  
Large monitor (for analog output) LX560W-SP  
Large monitor (for digital output) XMEZ-LMM021  
Large monitor (common to digital and analog XMEZ-LMM021/A1  
output)
Large-screen monitor (for digital output) XMEZ-LMM021/A2  
Digital encoder 1 XMEZ-LMMENC/D1
 
(for adding a DVI input channel) (*4)
Digital encoder 2 XMEZ-LMMENC/D2
 
(for adding two DVI input channels) (*4)
Analog encoder 1 XMEZ-LMMENC/A1
 
(for adding an RGB input channel) (*4)
Additional panel PC (*3) XMEZ-PNLPC  
Stand for additional panel PC (*4) XMEZ-LMMSTD  
Large monitor accessory kit 2 XIDF-LMA802/BP  
(for digital output) (*5)
Large monitor accessory kit 2 XIDF-LMA802/BS  
(for digital output, with stand) (*5)
Lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-MSF021  
Integrated monitor accessory kit XIDF-INA801  
AD converter kit XMEZ-PDC001  

No. 2B308-200EN*E
50
*1) The additional footswitch should be of the same type as that used in the
standard configuration.

*2) It can be used independently or in combination with the standard footswitch

XBFS-880S or XBFS-880S/A1.

*3) The wireless footswitch and the wireless footswitch kit are for the USA,
Canada, the EU, Turkey, and Australia only.

*4) Dedicated option for XMEZ-LMM021/A2

*5) This kit is used to mount two backup monitors.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
51
2.4 Compatible Units
(1) Injector
(a) MARK-VII ARTERION

(b) MARK-V PROVIS

(c) AVANTA

(d) AVIDIA

(e) ANGIOMAT 6000

(f) ANGIOMAT ILLUMINA

(g) CVi

(h) Rempress

(2) 3D Workstation

 Vitrea

(3) Angio Workstation (XIDF-AWS801)

Use this system in combination with the Toshiba specified software version.
Contact your Toshiba representative for details.

(4) Video products

The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection, contact your Toshiba representative.

(a) Input (any of the following)

 1600  1200 (UXGA), V: 60 Hz/H: 75 kHz, color

R, G, B: 0.7 Vp-p H, V: TTL level (HD D-SUB connection for R, G, B, H, V)

 1280  1024 (SXGA), V: 75 Hz/H: 80 kHz, monochrome

VIDEO: 0.7 Vp-p H, V: TTL level (BNC connection for VIDEO, H, V)

 1280  1024 (SXGA), V: 60 Hz/H: 75 kHz, monochrome (DVI-D connection)

(b) Scan converter DSC-X001A (option) output

 525 lines (NTSC), V: 59.94 Hz/H: 15.734 kHz, interlaced

1 Vp-p (BNC connection for composite video, MINI DIN connection for
component video)

 625 lines (PAL), V: 50 Hz/H: 15.625 kHz, interlaced

1 Vp-p (BNC connection for composite video, MINI DIN connection for
component video)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
52
 (5) Network devices
The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection of the following units, contact your Toshiba representative.

Data format DICOM 3.0

Communication protocol TCP/IP protocol
Hardware interface Ethernet

(6) Patient monitoring equipment

The combined equipment should meet the requirements below.
For connection of the following units, contact your Toshiba representative.

(a) Analog signal output

(b) Output signal ±5 V

(c) Electrically insulated from the human body

(7) X-ray protection systems

MAVIG PRPS series, LBPS series, or equivalent

NOTE: For details of combinable devices, refer to the accompanying documents for
the relevant system.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
53
No. 2B308-200EN*E
54
3. Operating Requirements
Contents 3.1 Power Requirements
3.2 Environmental Requirements
3.3 Installation Conditions
3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures

No. 2B308-200EN*E
55
3.1 Power Requirements
This system requires two power supply systems for the digital radiography
system. The power is supplied for the other units from the digital
radiography system.

The power cables of units are routed at the time of system installation and
the user does not have to connect these cables.

 Digital radiography system  Digital radiography system

 X-ray high-voltage generator  FPD
 Support unit  Monitor
 Catheterization table
Line voltage AC 380/400/415/440/480 V, AC 200/220/230/240 V
200 V (*1)
Line frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Input power 170 kVA + 10% or less 6 kVA or less (long time)
(short time) Recommended power
10 kVA + 10% or less transformer: 6 kVA or more
(long time)
Recommended power
transformer: 100 kVA or more
Allowable line impedance 380 V: 0.08  or less
400 V: 0.09  or less
415 V: 0.09  or less
440 V: 0.10  or less
480 V: 0.12  or less
200 V (*1): 0.043  or less
Rating of the power 100 A (400 V) 40 A
circuit breaker 150 A (200 V) (*1)
Maximum input current Maximum line current 200 V: 36 A
(100 kV, 1000 mA, 0.1 s)
380 V: 284 A
400 V: 270 A
415 V: 259 A
440 V: 244 A
480 V: 224 A
Range of line voltage regulation
at maximum line current:
380 V: 7.1%
400 V: 7.2%
415 V: 6.7%
440 V: 6.6%
480 V: 6.6%
Line voltage fluctuation ±10% or less (*2) ±10% or less (*2)
Number of phases 3-phase Single-phase

(*1) When a step-up transformer (XSDT-100B) is used, the power can also
be supplied from 3-phase AC mains with a rating of 200 V.

(*2) Value obtained by adding the power voltage variation due to system
load to the power voltage variation under no load.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
56
3.2 Environmental Requirements
This system must be used under the following environmental conditions.

Examination room/control room

Ambient temperature 18°C to 33°C
Relative humidity 35% to 70% (*1), (*2)
Atmospheric pressure 800 hPa to 1060 hPa
Atmosphere Do not use the system in the locations specified below.
 Locations containing flammable gases
 Locations containing corrosive gases
 Locations subject to steam
 Locations subject to water droplets or condensation
 Dusty locations
 Locations subject to salty atmosphere
 Locations subject to the direct sunlight
 Locations subject to excessive vibration or shock
 Locations subject to abnormal fluctuations in line voltage
 Locations subject to sudden changes in temperature that may
cause condensation inside the system
Heat generation X-ray high-voltage generator: 2.74 kWh
(standby status: 1.5 kWh, fluoroscopy: 5 kWh)
An air conditioning system that keeps the room temperature and
humidity within the specified operating and storage environmental
conditions is required in the room where the system is installed.
Note that the above values are standard values, and the actual
values may differ, depending on the operating conditions.

*1) There should be no condensation. If the humidity exceeds the specified

value, use a dehumidifier or other means to reduce the humidity.

*2) When the area dose meter (option) is used in combination, in addition to the
above conditions, the volumetric humidity must not exceed
3
20 g/m . Therefore, when the temperature is 30°C, the relative humidity
should be 65% or less.

CAUTION: Do not bring devices that generate electromagnetic waves (cellular

phones, transceivers, radio-controlled toys, etc.) into the room in
which this system is installed. Electromagnetic waves may cause the
system to malfunction.

CAUTION: Do not use the system in an environment where abrupt temperature changes
can occur. Abrupt temperature changes can produce condensation within
the system, which may cause corrosion or a malfunction in the system.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
57
3.3 Installation Conditions
The installation conditions for this system are specified below. For the
installation procedures, refer to the installation manual for the system.

(1) Examination room (*1)

Room Ceiling height  2800 mm;  3000 mm

dimensions
Width 5200 mm or more (*2)
Depth 6200 mm or more (*2)
X-ray protection work The walls, ceiling, and floor of the examination room,
the window glass for observation from the control
room, and entrance doors must be provided with
X-ray shielding in accordance with the local and
national regulations of the area where this system is
installed.
Potential equalization The room in which this system is installed must be
provided with protective and equipotential grounding
in accordance with all applicable local legal
requirements, and the room must be used for
medical purposes only.
Grounding requirements Grounding must be provided in accordance with all
applicable local legal requirements for medically-
used electrical equipment.
The same ground must be shared by the 400-V line
and 200-V line at the power distribution board.

*1) For details of the installation conditions, refer to the installation manual
2C308-087EN for the system.

*2) The dimensions differ when a CT system is used in combination.

Check the dimensions in the operation manual (2B308-089EN) for
systems in which the CT system is used in combination.

(2) Requirements related to the physical layout of major

components

Location Environment
C-arm support unit Examination room Patient environment
Catheterization table Patient environment
X-ray tube assembly Patient environment
X-ray beam limiting device Patient environment
FPD Patient environment
Monitor suspension unit Within or outside the patient
TV monitor environment

X-ray high-voltage generator Machine room Outside the patient environment

Digital radiography system Outside the patient environment

No. 2B308-200EN*E
58
3.4 Classification & Safety Requirements
Item Classification/Safety
Type of protection against Class I (permanently installed equipment)
electric shock (*1)
Degree of protection against Type B applied part (catheterization table)
electric shock (*1)
Degree of protection against Whole system: IP00
harmful ingress of water or Footswitch: IP28
particulate matter (*2)
Mode of operation (*1) Continuous operation
Degree of safety of Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a
application in the presence flammable anaesthetic mixture with air or with
of a flammable anaesthetic oxygen or nitrous oxide
mixture with air or with
oxygen of nitrous oxide (*1)
Mechanical safety Catheterization table
Maximum permissible load/maximum patient
weight/maximum weight of accessories and options
 CAT-850B: 240 kg/220 kg/20 kg
 CAT-860B: 220 kg/200 kg/20 kg
 CAT-880B: 270 kg/250 kg/20 kg
Applied part Tabletop of the catheterization table

*1) Classification based on IEC 60601-1: 2005

*2) Classification based on IEC 60529

No. 2B308-200EN*E
59
3.5 Energy Conservation Measures
The following steps can help conserve energy.

(1) Turn OFF the power of the system when the system is not
going to be used.

(2) Turn OFF the power of the monitor even during brief
periods away from the system.

(3) Acquire fluoroscopic images instead of radiographic

images when appropriate.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
60
4. Names and Functions of the Parts of
the System
Contents 4.1 System Console (System Monitor)
4.2 Main Console
4.3 Tableside Console
4.4 Satellite Console (Option)
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor
4.6 Reference Monitor
4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit
4.8 Catheterization Table

No. 2B308-200EN*E
61
4.1 System Console (System Monitor)
The system console is used to perform study-related operations such as
registration and retrieval of study information, support of various studies, file
manipulation, and image processing.

These operations are implemented by selecting the corresponding menus

and files on the monitor. A mouse is used to select menus and files, and a
keyboard is used to enter characters.

Basic screen layout (Initial screen)

[1] Common information display area

Refer to subsection 4.1.1 "Common information display area".

[2] Status bar

Refer to subsection 4.1.2 "Status bar".

[3] Mode area

Refer to subsection 4.1.3 "Mode area".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
62
4.1.1 Common information display area
The following information items are displayed in the common information
display area.

This icon is displayed during X-ray generation.

This icon is displayed when X-ray generation is prohibited.

This icon blinks until the system is ready for X-ray generation after
starting up the system.
It lights when X-ray generation is ready.
This icon is displayed when the first stage of the handswitch is pressed
and X-ray exposure is ready.

The selected beam hardening filter is displayed.

1: F1 (copper, 0.2 mm) is selected.
2: F2 (copper, 0.3 mm) is selected.
3: F3 (aluminum, 1.8 mm or 2.0 mm) is selected.
4: F4 (copper, 0.5 mm) is selected.
5: F5 (copper, 0.9 mm) is selected.
The X-ray tube anode heat storage capacity is displayed in the range
from 0% to 100%. When the capacity exceeds 90%, this icon blinks and
a warning message is displayed in the warning message display area.
This icon blinks when the temperature of the X-ray tube reaches the
caution temperature. If the temperature of the X-ray tube exceeds the
caution temperature, it lights and a warning sound is generated.
This icon is displayed when injector interlock is selected.

This icon is displayed when radiography is performed under restricted

conditions.

This icon is displayed when the patient incident dose rate reaches the
limit.

This icon is displayed when the system is subject to reduced operation.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
63
FPD field size (FOV) display

Dose meter measurement value display

When a dose meter is used in combination, the cumulative dose (X-ray
generation paused)/dose ratio (X-ray generation in progress) and the area
dose are displayed.

Fluoroscopic condition/radiographic condition information

The fluoroscopic conditions are displayed at the upper part and the
radiographic conditions are displayed at the lower part, respectively.

Operation Manual Auto

mode

Fluoroscopy in progress HLC fluoroscopy in

progress
HLC-L fluoroscopy in Fluoroscopic image
progress recording in progress
HLC-L fluoroscopic image HLC-L fluoroscopic image
recording in progress recording in progress
Prompt for test shot Radiography in progress

One-shot radiography is DA is enabled.

enabled.
DSA is enabled. Rotation DA is enabled.

Rotational DSA is 3D DA radiography is

enabled. enabled or 3D LD
radiography is enabled.
3D DSA radiography is LCI radiography is
enabled. enabled.
Stepping DSA is enabled. Prompt for proceeding to
Status
the next stage in stepping
display
DSA
Prompt for breath-holding Fluoroscopy roadmapping
in stepping DSA Display when "Peak" is
selected
Fluoroscopy Fluoroscopy roadmapping
roadmapping Display when "CO2" is
Display when "Add" is selected
selected
Fluoroscopy Fluoroscopy roadmapping
roadmapping Display when
Display when "Fluoroscopy landmark" is
"fluoroscopic subtraction" selected
is selected
Prompt for start of SEC hold status
injection
LIH image is being LIH image is being
displayed. displayed.
(During fluoroscopy
roadmapping)
Fluoroscopy Low, Middle, Normal, High
mode
EXP/S Fluoroscopy pulse rate f/s Acquisition rate
Radiographic
kV Tube voltage mA Tube current
condition
display ms Pulse width min Cumulative fluoroscopy
time display

No. 2B308-200EN*E
64
NOTE: Select a method from the following cumulative dose/dose rate calculation
methods.
For details, contact your Toshiba representative.

 Calculation procedure based on the isocenter (standard setting)

The X-ray input surface is specified as a location 150 mm from the
isocenter in the direction of the X-ray tube assembly.

 Calculation procedure based on a point a certain distance from the

tabletop
The X-ray input surface is specified as a location 50 mm toward the X-ray
tube assembly from a point in the center of the X-ray beam that is a
specified distance (default: 100 mm) above the tabletop.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
65
4.1.2 Status bar

[1] [Snap shot]

For systems with InnerVision (remote maintenance system) used in

combination, the logs during examination and the images displayed on the
monitor (still images) can be transferred to and stored in InnerVision. If an
error occurs, execute Snap shot. When repairing the system, the stored logs
and images can be used to check the error. To execute Snap shot, click the
camera-shaped icon and then click the [OK] button in the displayed dialog.
To cancel Snap shot, click the [Cancel] button.

NOTE: The error logs can also be stored in InnerVision in the case of system reset
processing. Use this function when Snap shot cannot be executed due to an
error such as system failure. For details, refer to subsection 5.8 "System
Reset".

[2] [Job] (Job controller)

The status icons indicating the status of the following processing are
displayed.

If a processing status icon such as "Stopped" or "Failed" is displayed,

contact your Toshiba representative for inspection and repair.

 Local : Data transfer processing between the media (CD-R, DVDR)

and the system. Refer to the following table.
 Network : Data transfer processing between a network server and the
system. Refer to the following table.
 Printing : Printing processing. Refer to the following table.

 3D : 3D processing. Refer to the following page.

NOTE: When the status icon is clicked, a dialog box is displayed and details of the
processing status can be checked. For details, refer to section 5 "Image File
Management" of the reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
66
 Local Network Printing
Status System local processing Network processing Printing processing

Idle (Normal status)

Running (Processing is in progress.)

Stopped (Processing has stopped

or there is a connection error.)

Failed (Processing has failed.)

3D
Status
3D processing
Memory acquisition error
An unsupported command is received or another internal error has occurred.

Transfer is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.

Reconstruction is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.

FTP is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.
Calibration is in progress when reconstruction/calibration is requested.

The power of the reconstruction PC is OFF.

The power of the 3D workstation is OFF.

An error notification is received from the reconstruction PC.

An error has occurred during image processing (HSIP Wrapper).
An error has occurred during image processing (LUT).
An error has occurred during image processing (CONV).
Images are not 3D reconstruction images.
The acquisition angle is too small.
Even though a transfer cancel request is issued, appropriate items do not exist.

Reconstruction or calibration is performed locally on the reconstruction PC.

An error has occurred when a request is issued to the reconstruction PC. (An
error has occurred during image transfer.)
An error has occurred when a request is issued to the reconstruction PC.
(Response waiting timeout)
The reconstruction PC has issued an error while reconstruction/calibration
termination processing is in progress.

A one-touch transfer request is issued when current images do not exist.

The calibration data does not exist.

An error has occurred at the 3D workstation.

The calibration table corresponding to reconstruction images to be transferred

does not exist.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
67
 [3] [System disk]

The following icon is displayed during verification processing of the system

disk. Verification processing is performed to check whether the data is
backed up normally in the system disk. If any abnormalities are found,
backup processing is automatically performed again. Verification processing
is performed when the system is restarted after the power of the system is
turned OFF in an emergency or the system is not shut down normally.

This is displayed during verification processing.

NOTE: The examination can be resumed during verification processing. Note,

however, that some processing such as image transfer may take a long time.

[4] [RAID]

The free space in the image memory is displayed. The display may differ
depending on whether the study is or is not in progress. Note that this
display does not show an accurate value for the free space. It should be
used only as a rough guide.

(a) Study in progress: The free space is displayed as the number of frames.

(b) Study not in progress: The free space (GB/MB) is displayed.

Overwrite : This is displayed when the RAID is in

overwrite mode.

Remain : This is displayed when the RAID is not in

overwrite mode.

This is displayed when the RAID has sufficient free

space and recording to the RAID is possible.

This is displayed when the RAID does not have sufficient

free space and recording to the RAID is not possible.

NOTE: When the RAID becomes full, delete or move files from the RAID to secure
the required free space. For details, contact your Toshiba representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
68
4.1.3 Mode area
This area is used for setting and selection for each mode. Click the tab
showing the desired mode name to display the setting screen for the mode.

[Patient] mode

Study appointment is made in this mode. Operation concerning start and

termination of the study is also performed.

[Acquisition] mode

The fluoroscopic conditions and the radiographic conditions are set for the
current study in this mode.

[Exam] mode (image processing during a study)

Review or image processing for the acquired images is performed during

study in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.

[Directory] mode (image file management)

Image files recorded in the RAID are transferred to a CD-R or DICOM server
in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.

[Review] mode (image processing after completion of studies)

Image processing for the acquired images is performed after completion of

studies in this mode. For details, refer to the reference manual.

[Printing] mode

The acquired images are printed in this mode. The images to be printed are
generated on the display and transferred to the printer. For details, refer to
the reference manual.

[Utility] mode (system preset)

Various system functions and conditions are preset in this mode. See the
reference manual.

[Shutdown] mode

The system power is turned OFF in this mode.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
69
 4.1.4 Basic operating procedures using the system console (System monitor)
This subsection describes the basic operating procedures using the system
console, such as the procedure for the selection of functions using the
corresponding buttons.

(1) Operating the mouse

Move the cursor to the desired button and select the function by operating
the mouse.
When the cursor is moved beyond the right edge of the screen, it will be
displayed on the reference or fluoroscopic monitor. The operating procedure
for the mouse is common to all monitors.

NOTE: The cursor is moved from the current monitor to the next monitor in a preset
order (refer to the example below). To change the order, contact your
Toshiba service representative.

Example: System monitor  Reference monitor  Fluoroscopic monitor

(1.1) Moving the cursor

The cursor on the screen moves according to the movement of the

mouse.

(1.2) Selecting a function

To select a function, move the cursor to the desired button and press the left
or right mouse button (left-click or right-click the desired function button).

Left button  Left-click : To press the left mouse button once

Right button  Right-click : To press the right mouse button once

Wheel  Single-click : To press a mouse button once

 Double-click : To press a mouse button (the left mouse button unless

otherwise specified) twice in quick succession
Mouse
In this manual, if just "click" is used, it means left-click. If right-clicking or
double-clicking is required, it will be specified.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
70
(2) Procedures for selecting functions and settings
(2.1) Control button

Move the cursor to the desired button and click it.

(2.2) List box

Select an item from among the functions/conditions displayed in the list box
as follows.

<1> Move the cursor to in the list box and click it.

The selectable lists are displayed in the pull-down menu.

<2> Move the cursor to the item to be selected and click it.

(2.3) Radio button

Select a function assigned to a radio button as follows.

Move the cursor to the target radio button and click it. A mark is placed in
the button and the corresponding function is selected.

(2.4) Check box

Select a function assigned to the check box as follows.

Move the cursor to the target check box and click it. A check mark is placed
in the box and the corresponding function is selected. If the selected check
box is clicked again, it is deselected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
71
(2.5) Scroll bar

By scrolling the display area in the vertical or horizontal directions, the

contents outside the current display area can be displayed (the figure below
shows the horizontal scroll bar).

Click the scroll box and slide it vertically or horizontally.

The display area can also be moved by clicking the arrowheads

at the ends of the scroll bars.

(2.6) Slider

Used to increase/decrease the value. Move the cursor to the slider and click
it. While holding down the mouse button, move the slider to the left or right.
When the slider is moved to the right, the value increases. When the slider
is moved to the left, the value decreases.

(2.7) Spin box

Used to increase/decrease the value. To increase the value, move the

cursor to  and click it. When the mouse button is held down, the value
increases continuously. To decrease the value, move the cursor to  and
click it. When the mouse button is held down, the value decreases
continuously.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
72
 (3) Entering the text
The procedure for entering the patient name and other information is
described below.

<1> Move the cursor to the text entry section. The shape of the cursor changes
to .

<2> Click the mouse button.

<3> Enter text using the keyboard.

<4> To set the entered text, press the Enter key on the keyboard.

NOTE: 1. The entered text can be deleted using the Backspace key or Delete key on
the keyboard.

2. It is possible to move to the next text entry section using the Tab key (or in
some cases the Enter key) on the keyboard.

3. Pressing the [Ctrl] key on the keyboard displays the current position of the
mouse pointer.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
73
(4) Adjusting the display area
In the screen for [Directory] mode, the size of display area of the [Patient],
[Study], and [Image] windows can be changed.

<1> Move the cursor to the border and click it. The shape of the cursor is
changes to .

<2> Move the mouse to change the position of the border.

(5) Drag & drop

Data can be moved to the target area by drag & drop operation.

<1> Move the cursor to the target data and click it.

<2> While holding down the mouse button, move the cursor to the movement
destination (drag).

<3> Release the mouse button at the movement destination (drop).

Data list Movement destination

<2> Drag

Data of study A Data of study A

<1> Click and hold down <3> Release the mouse

the mouse button button (Drop)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
74
4.2 Main Console
The main console is used to support operations in the examination room
from the control room. This console is used in combination with the
fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room. It is also possible to use it in
combination with the optional review console.

(1) Main console

(1.1) Image field operating section

[1] Left compensation filter operating lever

[2] Central compensation filter operating lever

This lever is provided with the VC-i system only.

[3] Right compensation filter operating lever

[4] X-ray exposure field adjustment lever

[5] FOV size selection button

No. 2B308-200EN*E
75
 (1.2) Basic image operating section

[6] Frame reverse feed/slow playback button

[7] Dynamic image playback/pause button

[8] Frame feed/fast playback button

[9] Menu operating lever

MAP
[10] Map image file selection button

[11] Dynamic image file selection button

RUN

[12] Image processing target selection button

[13] Fluoroscopy timer reset button

[14] Function buttons

NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu operating
lever. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") From the Examination Room". Only in an emergency, start a
study using the menu operating lever.

CAUTION: Except when an emergency study is required, do not press the top of
the menu operating lever without starting a study ("Start Study"). The
system enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
76
 (2) Power ON switch box
The power ON switch box is used to turn ON/OFF the power of the system.
It is installed next to the monitor in the control room.

[1] Power ON button

[2] Power OFF button

[3] Emergency stop button

[4] Hanger for the X-ray exposure handswitch

The X-ray exposure handswitch is placed on this hanger. Pick up the

handswitch when using it.

[5] X-ray exposure handswitch

WARNING: If the power of the system is turned OFF using the Power OFF button,
the results of any image processing that is in progress are not saved.
Be sure to turn OFF the power from the system console in all cases
other than emergencies.

CAUTION: 1. Do not attempt to disassemble the X-ray exposure handswitch or

remove the guard for preventing unintentional X-ray generation. The
performance of the handswitch may be degraded or X-rays may be
generated unintentionally, resulting in unnecessary X-ray exposure.

2. Do not press the X-ray exposure handswitch while it is still in the

hanger. Doing so may move the monitor, causing X-ray generation at
an incorrect timing. Thus, the required image may not be acquired,
resulting in unnecessary exposure of the patient to X-rays.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
77
 (3) Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room
The fluoroscopy footswitch is used to start/stop fluoroscopy. It is installed in
the control room.

[1] Fluoroscopy start button

CAUTION: The fluoroscopy footswitch is placed on the floor. Be careful not to

step on the switch unintentionally. Doing so may result in
unnecessary exposure to X-rays.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
78
 (4) Review console (option)
This console is used for image playback and image processing.

[1] Spatial filter adjustment dial

[2] Brightness adjustment dial

[3] Contrast adjustment dial

[4] Map save button

[5] Map image thumbnail display button

[6] Map image file selection button

[7] Image playback jog/shuttle

[8] Dynamic image file selection button

[9] Dynamic image thumbnail playback button

[10] Map image  Dynamic image playback button

CAUTION: The brightness adjustment dial and contrast adjustment dial should be
rotated slowly. If the dial is rotated too quickly, halation may occur and
the image may disappear. In this case, rotate the dial in the opposite
direction until the image becomes visible again.
If the fluoroscopic image does not return to normal, reset the
brightness/contrast settings (refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions
Using Function Buttons" of the reference manual).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
79
4.3 Tableside Console
The tableside console is used by the physician to operate the support unit or
catheterization table in the examination room or to perform image viewing
operations such as reference image playback.

NOTE: When the tableside console is removed from the rail of the catheterization
table, the rail switch on the rear of the tableside console is turned OFF.
The tableside console cannot be used to operate the support unit or
catheterization table while the rail switch is OFF.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
80
(1) Positioning operating section
This operating section is used to set the radiographic position.

[1] Anatomical angle control selection button

[2] Operation selection button

[3] Emergency stop button

[4] Function button

[5] FPD near/away movement button

[6] Tabletop vertical movement button

[7] Arm rotation/sliding lever

[8] Override button

[9] Arm/tabletop operation start lever

[10] Tabletop longitudinal/lateral brake release lever

No. 2B308-200EN*E
81
(2) Image field operating section
This is the operating section for changing the X-ray exposure field and the
FOV, adjusting the position of the compensation filter, and rotating the FPD.

[11] Left compensation filter operating lever

[12] Central compensation filter operating lever

This lever is used in VC-i systems.

[13] Right compensation filter operating lever

[14] X-ray exposure field adjustment lever (*1)

[15] FOV size selection button

*1) This lever can be also used for manual rotation operation for the FPD.
The FPD is rotated in the same direction as the lever is rotated, and the
FPD returns to the initial angle when the lever is pressed. The FPD
moves to the set position (portrait or landscape) when the lever is held
down for 1 second or longer.
However, manual rotation operation cannot be performed using the
X-ray exposure field adjustment lever on the field size operating section
of the main console.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
82
 (3) Image operating section
This image operating section is used to play back and switch acquired
images.

[16] Dynamic image file selection button

RUN

[17] Frame reverse feed/slow playback button

[18] Dynamic image playback/pause button

[19] Frame feed/fast playback button

[20] Map image file selection button

MAP

[21] Menu operating lever

NOTE: Starting a study ("Start Study") can be executed using the menu operating
lever. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") From the Examination Room". Only in an emergency, start a
study using the menu operating lever.

CAUTION: Except when an emergency study is required, do not press the top of
the menu operating lever without starting a study ("Start Study"). The
system enters study start status, possibly resulting in incorrect X-ray
generation.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
83
 Auto [22] Auto-positioning selection button
Pos.

START
[23] Auto-positioning start button

[24] Function buttons

The function is switched between the following functions depending on

the status of the auto-positioning selection button [22].

Status of auto-positioning selection button Description of function button

The function assigned to each button can be selected.
Auto
Pos. (The light is not lit.)
The function button is lit.
Functions have been assigned to each function button at
the time of system installation. To change these
assignments, contact your Toshiba representative.
The auto-positioning No. can be entered.
Auto
Pos. (The light is lit.) The function button is not lit.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
84
4.4 Satellite Console (Option)
The satellite console is used to support operation from the tableside console.
It can be installed on a dedicated stand and be placed away from the
catheterization table.

Register the satellite console installation position in the system and perform
operation from the registered position. For the satellite console installation
procedure, refer to subsection 6.2 "Installing the Satellite Console (Option)".

In general, the operating procedures for the buttons etc. on the satellite
console are the same as those for the buttons etc. on the tableside console.
However, the operating procedures of some of the operating sections differ.

This subsection describes the operating procedures for the operating

sections other than those in the above subsection.

NOTE: 1. The functions that can be set for the function buttons on the satellite console
are different from those that can be set for the function buttons on the
tableside console. Contact your Toshiba representative.

2. When the satellite console is removed from the rail of the stand, the rail
switch on the rear of the satellite console is turned OFF. The satellite
console cannot be used to operate the support unit or catheterization table
while the rail switch is OFF.

*1) The buttons of the tableside console for the CAS-930A differ from those
shown in the above figure. For details, refer to [5] in this section.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
85
[1] C-arm operating lever

The C-arm can be rotated/slid. Longitudinal movement/lateral

movement of the C-arm support unit can also be controlled.

[C-arm rotation/sliding]

Tilt the lever in the C-arm rotation or sliding direction while holding
down the top button of the lever. As the lever tilt angle increases, the
movement speed increases.

When the lever is returned to the center, C-arm movement stops.

If the support column rotation angle is not 0°, the lever tilt direction and
the C-arm operating direction may not match. To ensure that these
directions match, select the anatomical angle control function using the
Anatomical angle control selection button [2].

[Longitudinal/lateral movement]

Tilt the lever in the longitudinal direction or in the lateral direction while
holding down the button next to the lever.

When the lever is returned to the center, C-arm movement stops.

[2] Anatomical angle control selection button

[3] Function button

[4] Emergency stop button

No. 2B308-200EN*E
86
 [5] Tabletop up/down movement/support column rotation lever

Used to move the tabletop of the catheterization table in the up/down

direction or to perform support column rotation of the support unit.

[Operation of the system with the CAS-830B]

 Table up/down movement

Holding down the lever and tilting it away from you moves the tabletop
upward.
Holding down the lever and tilting it toward you moves the tabletop
downward.

 Support column rotation

Turning the lever in the clockwise direction performs support column

rotation of the support unit to the right side of the patient.
Turning the lever in the counterclockwise direction performs support
column rotation of the support unit to the left side of the patient.

[Operation of the system with the CAS-930A]

Press the button on the top of the lever and then operate the lever as
described below.

 Table up/down movement

Tilting the lever away from you moves the tabletop upward.
Tilting the lever toward you moves the tabletop downward.

 Support column rotation

Tilting the lever to the right rotates the support column of the support
unit to the right side of the patient.
Tilting the lever to the left rotates the support column of the support unit
to the left side of the patient.

[6] FPD near/away movement lever

[7] Override button

CAUTION: The tabletop up/down movement/support column rotation lever (for the
CAS-830B) ([5]), and the FPD near/away movement lever ([6]) are
single-action levers that permit the system to be controlled by simply
tilting the lever. Therefore, take special care to prevent inadvertent
operation. Unintended system movement may injure the patient.
Note that a lever may be tilted inadvertently by a part of the operator's
body when the operator is positioning the patient, attaching the sterile
cover, etc.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
87
4.5 Fluoroscopic Monitor
This monitor is used to display fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images, LIH images, radiographic images, and dynamic images. The
display information differs depending on the system and the unit used in
combination.

NOTE: It is possible to set the system so that dynamic images are displayed on the
reference monitor.
For details, contact your Toshiba representative.

[2] [1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]
[8]

[9]

[10]

Fluoroscopic monitor

No. 2B308-200EN*E
88
[1] Image display area

Images are displayed in this area together with the following image-
related information (except in the case of LIH images). Note that the
only related information items displayed during fluoroscopy are the
brightness, contrast, and spatial filter. The only related information item
displayed during radiography is the elapsed radiographic time.

*1) This information can be set to so that it is not displayed. To set

nondisplay of the information, move the cursor to the target information
and press the right mouse button. In the displayed menu, deselect
[Info. Disp.]. To display the information again, select [Info. Disp.].

No. 2B308-200EN*E
89
[2] Information display area

The study information is displayed here.

Whether or not the information is displayed can be selected for each
study protocol.
The above figure shows an example where the study information is
displayed.

[3] Patient information

After the study starts, the patient name, date of birth, sex, and age are
displayed. The age is displayed as follows.

 25-year-old patient : 25 Y
 3-month-old patient : 3M
 2-week-old patient : 2W
 5-day-old patient : 5D

[4] Auto-positioning No. display

When the auto-positioning function is used, the auto-positioning No. is

displayed. When Sequential Navigation is used, the status information
(step number/total number of steps) is displayed.

[5] Support unit/catheterization table position information display

The support unit/catheterization table position information is displayed

here.
When auto-positioning is performed, the position registered to the
selected auto-positioning No. is displayed.

Arm angle display in the LAO/RAO direction

Arm angle display in the CRA/CAU direction

SID display

FOV size display

Catheterization table tabletop height display

Catheterization table tabletop longitudinal position display

Catheterization table tabletop lateral position display

Table tilting angle (when the CAT-880B is used in combination)

Displays when harmonic tilting is selected (when the CAT-880B is used

in combination).
Tabletop rotation angle (when the CAT-880B is used in combination,
the table support column rotation angle is displayed.)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
90
 Tabletop lateral tilting angle display (when the CAT-880B is used in
combination)

Ceiling travel longitudinal position

Ceiling travel lateral position

Support column rotation angle

[6] X-ray information display

The information related to X-ray generation is displayed here.

 X-ray tube anode heat accumulation display

 X-ray tube overheating warning indicator
 Fluoroscopy mode (Low, Middle, Normal, High) display
 Cumulative fluoroscopy time display
 Dose rate display (option)
 Cumulative dose display (option)

[7] Stopwatch

When the stopwatch is set to ON, the elapsed time is displayed.

The display position depends on the setting.

NOTE: It is possible to also display the elapsed time for radiography. Contact your
Toshiba representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
91
[8] Status indicators

When status indicator setting has been performed, symbols (graphic

indicators) indicating the status of fluoroscopy and radiography are
displayed here.

The display position depends on the setting.

HLC fluoroscopy is being

Fluoroscopy is being performed.
performed.

HLC-L fluoroscopy is being Test exposure is being

performed. performed.

Radiography is being performed. SEC hold status

The LIH image is being displayed. DA enabled status

Stepping DSA breath hold

DSA enabled status
instruction

Stepping DSA next stage stepping One-shot radiography enabled

instruction status

Injection start instruction (when

Stepping DSA enabled status mask images are created in
fluoroscopic subtraction)

3D-DA enabled status or 3D LD

3D-DSA enabled status
enabled status

Rotational DSA enabled status Rotational DA enabled status

Fluoroscopy roadmapping
LCI enabled status LIH image (mask image) is
being displayed.
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "Peak" is
Display when "CO2" is selected
selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Fluoroscopy roadmapping
Display when "fluoroscopic
Display when "Add" is selected
subtraction" is selected
Fluoroscopy roadmapping Display when fluoroscopic
Display when "fluoroscopic acquisition is performed in
landmark" is selected normal mode
Display when fluoroscopic Display when fluoroscopic
acquisition is performed in HLC acquisition is performed in
mode HLC-L mode

No. 2B308-200EN*E
92
 X-ray exposure disabled status

X-ray exposure disabled status (in LIH display)

FPD calibration display

FPD calibration is being performed (in LIH display).

[9] Warning information display

Error and warning information for the system is displayed here. The
display styles for these information items differ as shown below.

 Error information display

 Warning information display

[10] Fluoroscopic monitor selection status indicator

Lights when the image displayed in the image display area is selected
as the target for image processing.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
93
4.6 Reference Monitor
This monitor is used to display map images. Depending on the system, it
may also be possible to display RUN images (dynamic playback images).

In addition, photo images can also be displayed.

An example is shown in the following figure.

Reference monitor

[1] Image display area

Images and image-related information are displayed here. For the

image-related information, refer to [1] "Image display area" in
subsection 4.5 "Fluoroscopic Monitor"

[2] Information display area

Thumbnails for image selection are displayed. It is also possible to

display the function button selection menu. For details of thumbnail
display and the procedures for switching between thumbnail display and
menu display, refer to subsection 12.1 "Selecting Map Image/Dynamic
Image". The menu display is described here.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
94
 Menu name display
The name of the menu selected in the menu display area is displayed
here.
Up to 10 menus can be set for every study protocol. It is possible to
display one menu at one time and to switch to the next menu to be
displayed.
For the menu switching method and the function switching method in
the menu display area, refer to subsection 12.3 "Switching Between
Menus on the Reference Monitor and Selecting Functions".
Menu display area
The function buttons registered in the menus are displayed here.
Up to 8 function buttons can be registered in each menu.
[Warning display]
The error and warning information items for the system are displayed
here. The display styles for these information items differ as shown
below.

 Error information display

 Warning information display

[Operation guide display]

Displays the operation hints.

[3] Reference monitor selected status indicator

Lights when the image displayed in the image display area is selected
as the target for image processing.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
95
4.7 X-ray Tube Support Unit

CAUTION: To maintain the performance of the FPD touch sensor, observe the
following precautions.

 Do not allow sharp objects to come in contact with the touch

sensors. If the cover or interior of the touch sensor is damaged, the
performance of the touch sensor will deteriorate.

 To maintain the safety of the system, replace the touch sensors

every 3 years. To replace the touch sensors, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
96
4.7.1 Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-830B
This unit is used to set the position and angle of the X-ray exposure field.

For the operating procedures, refer to section 9 "Operating Procedures for

Units in the Examination Room".

(1) Name of each part of the system

Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-830B

[1] FPD

[2] FPD near/away movement switch

[3] FPD touch sensor

[4] C-arm

[5] X-ray beam limiting device

[6] X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor

[7] X-ray tube assembly

[8] X-ray tube assembly selection lamp

[9] Support column operation buttons

[10] Emergency stop button

[11] Support column

No. 2B308-200EN*E
97
 (2) Support column operation buttons
These are the local control buttons for operating the C-arm support unit.
Each operates the C-arm support unit only while it is held down. When it is
released, C-arm support unit movement stops.

CAUTION: When the C-arm support unit is operated using these buttons,
movement cannot be observed properly because the support column
obstructs the view. Take special care to prevent interference between
the C-arm support unit and persons or surrounding units.

[1] [4]

[2] [5]

[3] [6]

[1] Longitudinal movement button

Moves the C-arm support unit in the longitudinal direction (patient-axis

direction).
The movement direction differs depending on the rotation angle of the
support column of the C-arm support unit.

When the support column rotation angle is -1° to -135°:

Toward the patient head end
When the support column rotation angle is 0° to +135°:
Toward the patient foot end

[2] Lateral movement button (for the left direction)

Moves the C-arm support unit toward the left of the patient.

[3] Support column rotation button (for counterclockwise rotation)

Rotates the C-arm support unit in the counterclockwise direction.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
98
[4] Longitudinal movement button

Moves the C-arm support unit in the longitudinal direction (patient-axis

direction).
The movement direction differs depending on the rotation angle of the
support column of the C-arm support unit.

When the support column rotation angle is -1° to -135°:

Toward the patient foot end
When the support column rotation angle is 0° to +135°:
Toward the patient head end

[5] Lateral movement button (for the right direction)

Moves the C-arm support unit toward the right of the patient.

[6] Support column rotation button (for clockwise rotation)

Rotates the C-arm support unit in the clockwise direction.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
99
(3) Movement of the support unit

No. 2B308-200EN*E
100
4.7.2 Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-930A
This unit is used to set the position and angle of the X-ray exposure field.

For the operating procedures, refer to section 9 "Operating Procedures for

Units in the Examination Room".

(1) Name of each part of the system

Ceiling-suspended C-arm support unit CAS-930A

[1] FPD
[2] FPD near/away movement switch, Local function buttons (F1, F2)
[3] FPD touch sensor
[4] C-arm
[5] X-ray beam limiting device
[6] X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor
[7] X-ray tube assembly
[8] X-ray tube assembly selection lamp
[9] Support column operation buttons
[10] Emergency stop button
[11] Support column

No. 2B308-200EN*E
101
 (2) Support column operation buttons
These are the local control buttons for operating the C-arm support unit.
Each operates the C-arm support unit only while it is held down. When it is
released, C-arm support unit movement stops.

CAUTION: When the C-arm support unit is operated using these buttons,
movement cannot be observed properly because the support column
obstructs the view. Take special care to prevent interference between
the C-arm support unit and persons or surrounding units.

[1] Local function buttons

The function for reproducing any specified position or the function for
moving the tabletop of the catheterization table up/down can be
assigned to the [S1] or [S2] button. For details, refer to "(3) Local
function buttons".

[2] Ceiling travel buttons (ceiling longitudinal/lateral movement)

The support unit can be moved to the left/right and to the head/foot end
of the patient. The support unit is moved in the direction indicated by
the arrow on each button relative to the patient displayed between the
buttons.

[3] Support column rotation buttons

The support column of the support unit is rotated in the direction

(To the left (To the right indicated by the arrow on each button.
side of the side of the
patient) patient)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
102
 (3) Local function buttons
Local function buttons are provided on the sides of the support column and
FPD.

Function buttons on the Function buttons on the

sides of the support column sides of the FPD

Any of the following functions can be assigned to the local function buttons.

To assign functions to the local function buttons or to change the function

assignments, contact your Toshiba service representative.

S1/S2 buttons
F1/F2 buttons
on the sides of
Assignable functions on the sides of Refer to
the support
the FPD
column
Reproduction of the C-arm standard   Subsection 9.5 "Auto Set"
status
Reproduction of the C-arm park position  
Reproduction of the standard status of  
the C-arm set at the head end
Reproduction of the standard status of  
the C-arm set at the patient left side
Switching of the FPD between the  
landscape and portrait orientations
*1
Tabletop up movement   Subsection 9.2
*1  Operating procedures for
Tabletop down movement  
the CAT-850B/860B
Movement speed reduction   Subsection 9.1
 Longitudinal/Lateral
travel movement
 Support column rotation
Route Run   Subsection 9.6 "Route Run"

*1) When the C-arm angle is 15 or more, these buttons are disabled.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
103
(4) Movement of the support unit

*1) Support column sliding extends the movement range of C-arm sliding.
When sliding of the C-arm itself reaches the end of its stroke, sliding of the
support column starts.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
104
4.8 Catheterization Table
The patient is set on this table. For the operating procedures, refer to
section 9 "Operating Procedures for Units in the Examination Room".

WARNING: 1. The maximum permissible patient weight is the value obtained by

subtracting the total weight of the accessories and options set on the
table from the maximum permissible load shown in the table below (*1).
Do not place a patient whose weight exceeds this value on the table.
Doing so may result in the tabletop being damaged or the patient
sustaining an injury.

For example, if accessories and options weighing 30 kg in total are set

on catheterization table CAT-850B, a patient weighing more than 210 kg
must not be placed on the table.

The permissible patient weight specified in the table below assumes

that the accessories and options set on the table weigh a total of 20 kg
(*2) or less.

Catheterization table Permissible load Permissible patient weight

CAT-850B 240 kg 220 kg
CAT-860B 220 kg 200 kg (*3)
CAT-880B 270 kg 250 kg (*4)

*1) The permissible load and the permissible patient weight differ
depending on the catheterization table.

*2) Total weight of the accessories and options assumed to be set on the
catheterization table

*3) 98 kg when the extension tabletop XBET-860B (option) is used in

combination

*4) When the accessory tabletop rail (option) with heavy components
installed on it is used in combination, the maximum permissible patient
weight on the catheterization table is 220 kg.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
105
WARNING: 2. Do not mount an object weighing more than 40 kg on the accessory
mounting rails of the catheterization table. In addition, do not mount
the optional accessory tabletop rail for an accessory that can be
attached at the head end of the tabletop (*1). Doing so may damage the
rails and cause an accident.

Note that the above values are the maximum limits when the center of
gravity of the object is immediately above the rails ("A" in the following
figure). The maximum limits become lower if the center of gravity of
the object is further from the rails. For example, if the center of gravity
of the object is a lateral distance of 100 mm away from the rails ("B" in
the following figure), the maximum permissible mass of the mounted
object becomes less than half of the maximum limit. For details, refer
to the table below.

Distance between the rail and the center

of gravity of the object (mm)
0 (A) 50 100 (B) 150 200
Permissible Accessory mounting 40 25 17 10 5
mass (kg) rails of the table
Accessory tabletop rail 20 15 10 5 0

*1) Refer to subsection 6.16 "Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail".

3. Do not subject the head end of the tabletop of the catheterization table
to excessive force. The tabletop may be damaged and the patient may
be injured. Observe the following precautions.

 Before the patient gets on/off the catheterization table, move the
tabletop to the foot-end limit.
Have the patient get on/off the catheterization table from the center
of the table. Have an assistant help if required. Ensure that the
patient does not get on/off at the tabletop-end section. In particular,
ensure that the patient does not sit on the tabletop end-section.
 Before performing cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR), move the
tabletop to the patient foot-end limit (stroke end).
 Do not place objects under the tabletop because they may interfere
with the tabletop when the tabletop is lowered.

4. When the catheterization table is being tilted, always visually confirm

that the tilting direction is correct. If incorrect operation is performed
and the tabletop tilts in the wrong direction, the patient may fall off the
tabletop.

CAUTION: During tabletop rotation, the tabletop and the entire column support
section move. Be careful not to get your foot caught between the
support column cover and the floor.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
106
4.8.1 Catheterization table (CAT-850B/CAT-860B)

(1) Name of each part of the catheterization table

Catheterization table (CAT-850B)

[1] Tabletop mat

[2] Tabletop

[3] Operating panel

 Refer to (2) "Operating panel".

[4] Footswitch

 Refer to (3) "Footswitch".

[5] Accessory mounting rail

Used to mount accessories such as the tableside console and drip

infusion stand.
There are rails on the left, right, and foot end of the catheterization
table.

[6] Tabletop locking shaft

No. 2B308-200EN*E
107
(2) Operating panel
This panel includes the operating buttons for the catheterization table and
displays the operating status.

Operating panel

[1] Tabletop rotation center position display

Lights when the rotation angle of the tabletop is 0° or 180°.

[2] Tabletop rotation brake release button

Releases the tabletop rotation brake and lights when the brake is
released.
When the button is pressed again to reapply the brake, the light goes
out.
Note that the brake is automatically reapplied and the tabletop is
secured 10 seconds after the tabletop rotation brake is released.

[3] Tabletop lateral movement lock button

Locks the tabletop lateral movement brake and lights when the brake is
engaged.
When the button is pressed again, the brake is released and the light
goes out.
Though the tabletop can normally be moved in both the longitudinal and
lateral directions, the tabletop lateral movement lock restricts tabletop
movement to the longitudinal direction.

[4] Step-sliding test button

Used to check the set step-sliding movement and adjust the step-sliding
distance.
When the button indicating the tabletop sliding direction is pressed,
step-sliding is performed (1 step each time the button is pressed).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
108
[5] Power reset button

Used to turn ON the drive power of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table after it has been turned OFF using the Emergency
stop button. Wait for at least 5 seconds after pressing the Emergency
stop button before pressing this button.

[6] Emergency stop button

Immediately stops movement of the catheterization table and C-arm

support unit. Use this button in emergencies.
Note that once this button is pressed, the units cannot be operated until
the emergency stop status is released.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
109
 (3) Footswitch (wired footswitch)
Details of the wired footswitch are described below. For the wireless
footswitch, refer to (4) "Wireless footswitch" in subsection 4.8.1.

Used to start/stop X-ray exposure. Footswitches may include function

buttons. However, unless specified otherwise, this operation manual
assumes that a footswitch without function buttons is used.

CAUTION: To prevent interference between the footswitch and the support unit,
operate the support unit only after confirming that the footswitch is not
positioned within the operating range of the support unit. Also, take
special care to prevent interference between the footswitch and the
support unit while operating the support unit. If the footswitch is
pressed by the support unit, X-rays may be generated unintentionally.

(3.1) Footswitch without function buttons

HLC fluoroscopy start button

Fluoroscopy start button

Radiography start button

No. 2B308-200EN*E
110
 (3.2) Footswitch with function buttons

A function can be assigned to each of the three function buttons.

The settings in parentheses are the default functions assigned at the time of
shipment. For the functions that can be assigned, contact your Toshiba
representative.

Function button 2
(HLC fluoroscopy start button)

Fluoroscopy start button

Radiography start button

Function button 1
(image processing function: blank)

Function button 3 (blank)

NOTE: If the HLC fluoroscopy start button and F-REC start button are assigned to
function buttons, when they are pressed simultaneously, the F-REC start
button is selected and fluoroscopic image recording starts.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
111
 (4) Wireless footswitch
The details of the wireless footswitch are described below. For the wired
footswitch, refer to (3) "Footswitch (wired footswitch)" of subsection 4.8.1.

CAUTION: 1. Before operating the support unit, confirm that the footswitch is not
placed within the movement range of the support unit. In addition, be
extremely careful to prevent the footswitch from being caught during
operation of the support unit. If the footswitch is caught by the
support unit, an exposure switch may be pressed and unintentional
X-ray exposure may result.

2. Depending on the layout of the X-ray protective plate or peripheral

units, the communication range of the footswitch may be reduced.
Before starting the examination, check that footswitch communication
is established properly in the layout that will be used.

3. If the wireless footswitch cannot be used due to communication failure,

use the footswitch in the control room or the wired footswitch as an
emergency measure. To use the wired footswitch, turn OFF the power
of the Infinix-i system and connect the footswitch cable to the
catheterization table. For the connector location, refer to subsection
6.4 "Connecting the Cables".

NOTE: The wireless footswitch conforms to the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC).

(4.1) Wireless communication range

The communication range of the wireless footswitch is 5 m. Use the

wireless footswitch within 5 m of the support column of the catheterization
table in which the receptor is installed.

NOTE: 1. Depending on the layout of the units installed in the examination room and
on the remaining charge in the battery, the actual communication range may
be less than 5 m.

2. Confirm that the green LED lights before using the footswitch. If the LED
blinks, communication with the receptor is not established. In this case,
move the footswitch toward the receptor until the LED lights.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
112
 (4.2) Name and function of each section

The name and function of each section of the wireless footswitch are
described.

NOTE: 1. A function can be assigned to each of three function buttons. The functions
provided in parentheses in the above figure are those assigned to the
function buttons at the time of shipment. To check the functions that can be
assigned and to change the assigned functions, contact your Toshiba
service representative.

2. If the HLC fluoroscopy start button and F-REC start button are assigned to
the function buttons of the footswitch and both buttons are pressed at the
same time, the F-REC start button is selected and fluoroscopic image
recording starts.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
113
 (4.3) LED display

The status of the wireless footswitch can be checked by the lighting status of
the LEDs.

LED Lighting status Footswitch status

Green LED Lit Communication is established.
Fast blinking The fluoroscopy start button or
radiography start button is pressed.
Slow blinking Communication is not established.
Not lit Communication is not possible
(the battery has run out).
Orange LED Lit The remaining battery charge is low
(recharging is required).
Blinking Recharging of the battery is in progress.
Not lit The battery is fully charged.
(If the green LED also goes OFF, the
battery has run out.)
Red LED Lit A communication error has occurred.
(Refer to 3. in the note below.)
Blinking Shorting mode error
(Refer to 4. in the note below.)
Not lit No errors.
All LEDs Not lit The battery is completely discharged.

NOTE: 1. If the battery is completely discharged (all the LEDs go OFF or both the
green and orange LEDs go OFF), fully charge the battery before using the
wireless footswitch.

2. If the battery cannot be charged, or if, even after a full charge, the battery
runs out immediately or the wireless footswitch cannot be used, failure of the
wireless footswitch or abnormality in the battery is likely. Contact your
Toshiba service representative for inspection.

3. If the red LED lights, restart the system. If the LED does not go OFF after
restarting the system, failure of the wireless footswitch is likely. Contact your
Toshiba service representative for inspection.

4. If the red LED blinks, restart the system, or connect the footswitch to the AC
adaptor and plug it into an outlet. If the LED continues to blink, failure of the
wireless footswitch is likely. Contact your Toshiba service representative for
inspection.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
114
 (4.4) Operating procedure

<1> Confirm that with the system turned ON, the orange LED goes OFF and the
green LED lights.

<2> The wireless footswitch is ready for operation.

The procedure for operating the buttons on the wireless footswitch is the
same as that for the wired footswitch. For details, refer to (3) "Footswitch
(wired footswitch)" in subsection 4.8.1.

CAUTION: After the power of the system is turned ON, wait until the green LED of the
wireless footswitch lights. If the button or pedal of the wireless footswitch is
pressed before the green LED lights, the system detects an error (the red
LED blinks) and operation from the wireless footswitch is disabled. For the
procedure for clearing the error, refer to (4.3) "LED display".

NOTE: 1. When the orange LED lights, battery charging is required. For the charging
procedure, refer to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the battery" and (4.6)
"Emergency battery charging".

2. If communication is interrupted and the green LED blinks when the pedal is
being pressed, release the pedal and then press it again. If communication
is not recovered, it is likely that the communication environment is
insufficient. Change the footswitch position and press the pedal again. The
green LED lights if communication is recovered.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
115
 (4.5) Procedure for charging the battery

When the remaining charge in the battery is low, charge the battery using
the AC adaptor supplied with the footswitch.

For the procedure for charging the battery during use of the footswitch, refer
to (4.6) "Emergency battery charging".

<1> Connect the connector of the AC adaptor to the connector of the wireless
footswitch for charging.

AC adaptor Connecting to the connector

<2> Connect the AC adaptor to the power outlet of the facility. Charging starts
and the orange LED blinks. The battery will reach a full charge in about 4.5
hours (if it was fully discharged). The orange LED goes OFF when charging
is completed.

<3> Disconnect the connector of the AC adaptor from the connector of the
wireless footswitch and securely tighten the connector cap.

CAUTION: 1. During charging of the battery (when the AC adaptor is connected), do not
use the wireless footswitch for examinations. An accident may occur.

2. After the battery is fully charged, securely tighten the connector cap in the
footswitch. Failure to do so may permit entry of water, etc., resulting in
malfunction of the footswitch.

3. Do not expose the connector of the AC adaptor to water. An electrical short

may occur, resulting in malfunction of the AC adaptor.

NOTE: The battery can be recharged approximately 500 times. Replace it once a
year or when a decrease in usable time between charges becomes
noticeable. Contact your Toshiba service representative when battery
replacement is required.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
116
 (4.6) Emergency battery charging

If the remaining charge in the battery becomes low during the examination
(the orange LED lights), use the supplied emergency power supply cable to
supply power from the catheterization table. Power is supplied to the
wireless footswitch, and charging of the battery starts at the same time.
Operation from the wireless footswitch can be continued. If the battery is not
recharged and the battery runs out, operation from the wireless footswitch
becomes impossible.

<1> Connect the emergency power supply cable connector to the connector of
the wireless footswitch for charging.

Emergency power supply cable Connecting the connector

<2> Connect the connector on the other end of the emergency power supply
cable to the footswitch connector of the catheterization table. For the
location of the footswitch connector, refer to subsection 6.4 "Connecting the
Cables". Charging starts and the orange LED blinks.

Connecting the connector

<3> After the examination is terminated, charge the battery of the wireless
footswitch using the AC adaptor. Refer to (4.5) "Procedure for charging the
battery".

CAUTION: 1. Keep the emergency power supply cable in an easily accessible location. It
is recommended that the location of the emergency power supply cable be
confirmed when daily checks are performed.

2. After charging of the footswitch is completed, be sure to securely mount

connector caps to the charging connectors of the footswitch and the table.
Failure to do so may allow the entry of liquids such as water into the
footswitch or table, leading to malfunction.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
117
NOTE: 1. In systems with the wired footswitch used in combination, the connectors for
the wired footswitch and wireless footswitch are provided in the
catheterization table and their shapes are different. Be sure to use the
correct connector when connecting the footswitch.

2. When the power of the system is turned OFF, the battery of the wireless
footswitch is not charged, even if the emergency power supply cable is
connected.

(5) Movements of the catheterization table

Tabletop longitudinal movement

Tabletop vertical movement

Tabletop lateral movement

Tabletop rotation

No. 2B308-200EN*E
118
4.8.2 Catheterization table (CAT-880B)

(1) Name of each part of the catheterization table

[1]

[3]

[2]
[4] [3]

Catheterization table (CAT-880B)

[1] Tabletop

[2] Power reset button

Used to turn ON the drive power of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table after it has been turned OFF using the Emergency
stop button. Wait for at least 5 seconds after pressing the Emergency
stop button before pressing this button.

[3] Accessory mounting rail

[4] Footswitch

Refer to 4.8.1 (3) "Footswitch".

For details of the wireless footswitch (option), refer to (4) "Wireless

footswitch" of this subsection.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
119
(2) Name of each part of the tabletop operating box

No. 2B308-200EN*E
120
 (3) Movements of the catheterization table

Tabletop vertical movement

Tabletop lateral movement

Tabletop longitudinal movement

Tabletop rotation

No. 2B308-200EN*E
121
 Tabletop longitudinal tilting

Tabletop lateral tilting

(4) Footswitch
The details of the wired footswitch, refer to (3) "Footswitch (wired
footswitch)" of subsection 4.8.1. For the wireless footswitch, refer to (4)
"Wireless footswitch" of subsection 4.8.1.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
122
5. Safety Devices
Contents 5.1 Emergency Stop
5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies
5.3 Interlocks
5.4 Interference Warning Function
5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in Emergencies
5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation
5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy
5.8 System Reset
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown Mode
5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study") From the
Examination Room
5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling Systems
5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients

No. 2B308-200EN*E
123
5.1 Emergency Stop
(1) Stopping movement of the C-arm support unit and
catheterization table
When the Emergency stop button is pressed, movement of the C-arm
support unit and catheterization table is stopped and the emergency stop
status is set. The C-arm support unit and the catheterization table become
operable only after the emergency stop status is released.

Emergency stop activation

Press the Emergency stop button .

This button is provided at the following locations. Familiarize yourself with

the locations.

Locations of the Emergency stop buttons

 Power ON switch box Refer to the figure below.
 Tableside console Refer to the figure below.
 Catheterization table Refer to (2) "Operating panel" in subsection
operating panel 4.8.1.
 Support column CAS-830B: Refer to (1) "Name of each part of
the system" in subsection 4.7.1.
CAS-930A: Refer to (1) "Name of each part of
the system" in subsection 4.7.2.

Power ON switch box Tableside console

WARNING: Except when the support unit or the catheterization table is to be

stopped immediately, do not press the Emergency stop button to stop
system movement. If the Emergency stop button is repeatedly used for
such purposes, the system may malfunction, resulting in an accident.

NOTE: 1. X-rays can be generated even in the emergency stop status.

2. If the emergency stop button is pressed during X-ray exposure, the system
enters emergency stop status and X-ray exposure is stopped.
Note that X-rays can be generated without releasing emergency stop status.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
124
 Emergency stop release

Remove the causes of the emergency stop. After ensuring safety, press the
power reset button on the operating panel of the catheterization table.

Power reset button

Operating panel of the catheterization table

CAUTION: When the power reset button is pressed to release the emergency stop
status, wait until the emergency stop status is released (this takes
approximately 15 seconds) before performing fluoroscopy or
radiography. Otherwise, images may be affected by the movement of
the beam limiting device during the release operation, and
unnecessary X-ray exposure may result.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
125
5.2 System Shutdown in Emergencies
If an emergency such as smoke or fire occurs or if the system cannot be
shutdown normally for some reason, the power supply of the system can be
turned OFF forcibly.

[System shutdown method in emergencies]

Press the Power OFF button .

A cover for preventing inadvertent operation is provided for the Power OFF
button. Open this cover to use the Power OFF button.

Power ON switch box

WARNING: Do not use the Power OFF button to turn the system power supply OFF
in normal cases. When this button is used, the image data being
processed may not be saved.

CAUTION: Use the Power OFF button only to stop the system in an emergency. If the
power is repeatedly turned OFF using the power OFF button, the system
may malfunction.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
126
5.3 Interlocks
Interlocks limit the movements of the C-arm support unit and catheterization
table to prevent interference accidents. Interlocks are actuated in the
following cases.

Depending on the cause of the interlock, restricted operation and the

interlock release procedure may differ.

(1) If a touch sensor detects contact

[Restricted operation]

Electrically powered operation of the support unit and catheterization table is

disabled.

Note, however, that tabletop vertical movement in the direction away from
the FPD touch sensor or X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor can be
performed.

[Releasing the interlock]

<1> Check which touch sensor has detected contact.

<2> Hold down the Override button. Operate the support unit or catheterization
table so that the touch sensor is moved away from the contacted object.

WARNING: 1. Safety devices are not activated while the Override button is held
down. When using the Override button, be sure to prevent interference
between the support unit and persons or surrounding units.

2. Touch sensors must be used only for preventing contact.

Touch sensors should not be used as Stop switches for system
positioning. If a touch sensor is brought into contact with a person or
with a unit used in combination, the contacted person or unit may be
compressed forcibly. In particular, if a touch sensor comes into
contact with the patient's face, the patient may be injured.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
127
(2) If the support unit is too close to the floor, wall, or table
base of the catheterization table
[Restricted operation]

The support unit stops automatically. The support unit cannot be moved
further in the direction of contact.

[Releasing the interlock]

Move the support unit away from the object causing contact.

(3) If the tabletop is too close to the floor or floor base of the
C-arm during tabletop tilting
When the catheterization table CAT-880B is used in combination, if the
tabletop is too close to the floor or floor base of the C-arm during tabletop
tilting, an interlock is activated.

[Restricted operation]

The catheterization table stops automatically. Until the interlock is released,

further electrically powered movement of the catheterization table toward the
floor is disabled.

[Releasing the interlock]

Move the tabletop away from the floor by tabletop tilting, tabletop vertical
movement, or tabletop longitudinal movement (electrically powered
operation).

Note, however, that it may be impossible to tilt the tabletop, depending on

the tabletop longitudinal position.

In this case, move the tabletop away from the floor by tabletop vertical
movement or tabletop longitudinal movement (electrically powered
operation) and then move the tabletop to the foot end.

(4) Tabletop lateral tilting

When the catheterization table CAT-880B is used in combination, an
interlock is activated during tabletop lateral tilting to prevent fingers from
being caught underneath the tabletop.

[Restricted operation]

Catheterization table movement is stopped at +10 or -10 during tabletop

lateral tilting. Tabletop lateral tilting can be resumed by releasing the
interlock.

[Releasing the interlock]

The interlock can be released by releasing the operation switch. Resume

tilting only after confirming that no one (patient or medical staff) has placed
their hands under the tabletop and that no objects are in the way.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
128
5.4 Interference Warning Function
This function issues a warning when the C-arm support unit is within the
interference range.

The interference range is the range within which the C-arm support unit is
likely to come into contact with the patient or the rear of the catheterization
tabletop. The range within which the combined two support units are likely
to come into contact with each other is also considered to be part of the
interference range.

Note that the interference warning function is not actuated while the support
unit or catheterization table in the interference range is moving in the
direction away from the interference range.

CAUTION: If the interference warning function is activated, the operating speed is

reduced. Take special care to prevent contact when operating the
support unit and catheterization table in this status. Even when the
interference warning function actuates, the system is not stopped
automatically before contact.

(1) Warning for interference with the rear of the tabletop

If the C-arm support unit approaches the rear of the tabletop of the
catheterization table, the operation speed of the C-arm support unit is
reduced. If the C-arm support unit continues to move toward the rear of the
tabletop of the catheterization table, a warning sound is generated.

(2) Warning for interference with the patient

If the C-arm support unit moves into the patient barrier*, the operation speed
of the C-arm support unit is reduced. A warning sound is not generated.

* Patient barrier

This refers to the volume in which the patient is assumed to be placed

(indicated by the dotted lines).
35 cm

70 cm

Patient barrier

No. 2B308-200EN*E
129
5.5 Catheterization Table Manual Operation in Emergencies
(1) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement, and rotation
If the power of the catheterization table is turned OFF for some reason, the
tabletop brake cannot be released. In this case, push the tabletop of the
catheterization table strongly in the desired movement direction (lateral,
longitudinal, or rotational direction). The tabletop can be moved. If the
patient's condition changes suddenly while the power is OFF, move the
tabletop manually and secure sufficient space around the catheterization
table.

<1> Push the tabletop in the desired direction.

Tabletop longitudinal movement Tabletop rotation

(Possible for CAT-850B only)

Tabletop lateral
movement

Tabletop manual operation

CAUTION: Except in an emergency, do not press the tabletop of the catheterization

table after the brake has been applied. Doing so repeatedly will result in
wearing of the brake and a consequent decrease in braking force.

NOTE: 1. If the tabletop is locked and its movement is disabled even when the brake is
released in power ON status, tabletop locking can be released by pressing
the Override button.
In this case, select the acquisition program for the current study again.

2. If the tabletop cannot be moved manually, pull the tabletop mat in the foot-
end direction to shift the patient position.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
130
5.6 Error Reset/Reduced Operation
5.6.1 Error reset/reduced operation during fluoroscopy, radiography, or image
operations
Even if a system error related to fluoroscopy, radiography, or image
operation occurs, it is often possible to reset the error. In such cases, the
system returns to its normal operation status after the error is reset. Even
when the error cannot be reset, if the error correction function can be
activated, operation can be switched to reduced operation.

Reduced operation permits the minimum required procedures, such as

removal of the catheter, to be performed.

During reduced-operation fluoroscopy, the load on the system may increase

and some functions may be restricted.

(1) Error reset or switching to reduced operation

If a system error in which error resetting or switching to reduced operation is
possible occurs, the following dialog box is displayed on the system console
monitor.

<1> Click the Reset button to reset the error.

<2> If the error occurs repeatedly, click the Reduce button to switch to reduced
operation.

(2) Requesting repair

Reduced operation is a function that enables temporary use of the system in
emergencies. If an error that requires reduced operation occurs, contact
your Toshiba representative for inspection and repair.

NOTE: If a system error for which error reset can be executed or system operation
can be switched to reduced operation occurs, the icon on the left is
displayed in the information display area on the fluoroscopic monitor.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
131
5.6.2 Resetting of beam limiting device errors
Even if an error such as the beam limiting device not operating correctly
during fluoroscopy/radiography occurs, the error can be reset according to
the procedures below.

If the system cannot be reset, contact your Toshiba representative for

inspection and repair.

(1) Error resetting

Press the emergency stop button. Then, press the power reset button. For
details of the procedures and the locations of the emergency stop button and
the power reset button, refer to subsection 5.1 "Emergency Stop".

<1> Press the emergency stop button.

<2> Press the power reset button.

Error resetting is completed within about 15 seconds.

CAUTION: When the power reset button is pressed to release the emergency stop
status, wait until the emergency stop status is released (this takes
approximately 15 seconds) before performing fluoroscopy or
radiography. Otherwise, images may be affected by the movement of
the beam limiting device during the release operation, and
unnecessary X-ray exposure may result.

NOTE: Even if an error such as an operation error of the support unit or

catheterization table occurs, it is often possible to reset the error.
If the system cannot be reset, contact your Toshiba representative for
inspection and repair.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
132
5.7 Backup Fluoroscopy
Backup fluoroscopy can be performed with the minimum functions required
for fluoroscopy maintained.

(1) Backup Fluoroscopy mode

The system enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode in the following cases.

 Approximately 2 minutes after the system power is turned ON, the system
enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode. When system startup is completed, the
system exits Backup Fluoroscopy mode.

 If a system error in which backup fluoroscopy can be performed occurs, the

system automatically enters Backup Fluoroscopy mode.

(2) Confirmation of the ready state

When the system is ready for backup fluoroscopy, all of the function buttons
on the upper row of the main console blink.

(3) Fluoroscopy
Perform fluoroscopy in the same manner as in normal fluoroscopy.
Note that pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed in Backup Fluoroscopy
mode.

(4) Request for repair

Backup fluoroscopy is a function that permits temporary use of the system in
emergencies. If an error that requires backup fluoroscopy occurs, contact
your Toshiba representative for inspection and repair.

NOTE: 1. Depending on the type of system error, the backup fluoroscopy image may
be displayed only on the examination room monitor.

2. When the 12  16-inch FPD is used in combination, the FOV size can only
be switched from the current size to the immediately larger or smaller size
during backup fluoroscopy.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
133
5.8 System Reset
This function is used to reset the system in the event of system failure.
There are two resetting methods: software resetting and hardware resetting.
The resetting method differs depending on the error status. Referring to the
table below, confirm the error status and the location of the descriptions of
the appropriate countermeasures to be taken, and then reset the system.
In addition, in some cases, the system can be restored using this function
when the system automatically enters backup mode due to a system error.

Countermeasures
Error status
(section to be referred to)
An error related to image playback on the system monitor occurred. (1) Software reset
An error related to operations of the system monitor occurred.
The system cannot be shut down. (2) Hardware reset
The following error message appeared.
"Internalerror. Press reset SW on CCB front."

CAUTION: Before resetting the system, ensure safety and terminate the
examination. If the system is reset during examination, the
examination is interrupted and cannot be resumed until the reset
process is completed.

(1) Software reset

The system is recovered by resetting the software when a system error has
occurred. Software reset is effective when an error related to image
playback on the system monitor, reference monitor, or fluoroscopy monitor
or an error related to operations at the system monitors has occurred.

<1> Press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys on the keyboard together.
The System Reset screen appears. The functions of the displayed buttons
are shown in the figure below.

[Shutdown] button Shuts down the system when pressed.

[Restart] button Restarts the system when pressed.
[Software Reset] button Initializes the whole software when pressed.
[Partial Reset] button Initializes part of the software when pressed.
[Log Collect] button Transfers the error log to InnerVision (remote maintenance
system) when InnerVision is installed in the system.
For the procedure for transferring the error log and the operating
procedure for InnerVision, contact your Toshiba service
representative.
In addition, do not select [All log] in [Log Collect] during the
study. Error log transfer may take several tens of minutes to
complete, interfering with the study.
[Cancel] button Closes the System Reset screen when pressed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
134
 NOTE: 1. If the System Reset screen does not appear though the above operation is
performed, it indicates that System Reset is not possible. In this case,
forcibly turn OFF the system power, wait for about 20 seconds, and then turn
ON the system power again to restart the system.
In emergencies, remove the catheter and guide wires in backup mode and
then forcibly turn OFF the system power.

2. If a system error has not occurred, do not reset the system. The
examination will be interrupted.

<2> Proceed with resetting according to the system status.

Error status Countermeasures

An error related to basic functions <1> Click the Partial Reset button.
supporting studies, such as image
Only the application software programs related to studies
playback or menu operation on the
are restarted or initialized.
fluoroscopy or reference monitor,
occurred. If the error cannot be corrected, perform Software Reset
(To recover the system as soon as operation.
possible)
An error related to operation at the <1> Click the Software Reset button.
system monitor occurred.
If the error cannot be corrected, perform Shut Down or
Reset operation.
The cause of the error is unclear. <1> Click the Shut Down button or Reset button.
The error cannot be corrected by <2> When the Shut Down button is clicked, shut down the
Software Reset operation. system and then turn ON the system power again to restart
the system.
The error cannot be corrected even by When the Reset button is clicked, the system is
Partial Reset operation. automatically restarted.
If the error cannot be corrected by the above operations,
contact your Toshiba service representative.

CAUTION: When all or part of the software is initialized by a "Software Reset" or "Partial
Reset", be sure to shut down the system. If the system continues to be used
without performing shutdown, an error may occur. The shutdown timing
should be determined according to the examination status because the
shutdown processing will take about 8 minutes.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
135
 (2) Hardware reset
The system can be recovered by restarting only the DFF-8000B in the
following cases.

 When the system cannot be shut down by normal system power OFF
operation

 When the following message is displayed

"Internalerror. Press reset SW on CCB front."

<1> Press the Reset button on the DFP-8000B system main unit using a pointed
object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. The DFF-8000B is shut down and
the system is restarted immediately.

DFP-8000B main unit

CAUTION: 1. Data that is currently being processed may be lost when system reset is
performed.

2. Do not press the Reset button in cases other than those described above.
System malfunction may result if the system is restarted repeatedly by
pressing the Reset button.

3. In the case of smoke or fire when the system power must be turned OFF
immediately, press the power OFF button. Refer to subsection 5.2 "System
Shutdown in Emergencies" for details.

4. If the system is not returned to normal status even after executing hardware
reset, restart the system by performing the following procedure.

<1> Press the power OFF button on the power ON switch box to execute forcible
system power OFF (refer to subsection 5.2 "System Shutdown in
Emergencies").

<2> Wait for 20 seconds after the system power is turned OFF and then turn the
system power ON.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
136
5.9 Quick Switching to Patient Mode and Shutdown Mode
It is possible to switch the current mode to Patient mode or Shutdown mode
simply by pressing the corresponding function key on the keyboard.
It is also possible to select and execute functions in the modes by using the
keyboard. Use this function when your mouse is disabled.

(1) Mode switching

It is possible to switch modes by using the corresponding function key "F**"
on the keyboard.

 Press the F5 key to switch the current mode to Patient mode.

 Press the F12 key to switch the current mode to Shutdown mode.

(2) Selecting and executing a function

It is possible to the use function keys on the keyboard to select and execute
a function in the selected mode as shown below.

(2.1) Executable functions

Mode Function Function button used

Registration of an emergency patient [Emergency ID]
Patient mode Starting a study (*1) [Start]
Completing a study [Finish]
Shutdown Turning OFF the system power [Shut Down]
mode

*1) It is not possible to select a patient from an appointment list and start a
study.

(2.2) Method of selecting and executing a function

Use the keys below on the keyboard to select and execute functions.

Key Function
Used for navigating between items on the GUI, such as
buttons that can be executed and list boxes in which
Tab key
selections can be made. Each time this key is pressed, the
focus switches to the next item in the GUI.
Space key Executes the function selected in the GUI.
Sets a selection made in the GUI.
Enter key In Patient mode, this key can be used to switch between GUI
setting and entry box setting.

NOTE: The Tab, Enter, and Space keys on the keyboard also function as explained
above in modes other than Patient mode and Shutdown mode.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
137
5.10 Disabling X-ray Exposure
X-ray exposure can be disabled forcibly. Use this function to prevent
inadvertent X-ray exposure.

(1) Disabling X-ray exposure and enabling X-ray exposure

again
When the X-ray exposure disable button is clicked, X-ray exposure is
disabled. Clicking the button again cancels the X-ray exposure disable
setting and enables X-ray exposure again. This button lights when X-ray
exposure is disabled.

NOTE: 1. X-ray exposure can be disabled using the corresponding function button (if
the X-ray exposure disable function has been assigned to a function button).
Refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of the
reference manual.

2. When the support unit is set to the retracted position (park position), X-ray
exposure is automatically disabled.
Note that the retraction positions may differ depending on the system.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
138
 (2) Confirm that X-ray exposure is disabled.
Confirm that the following displays and buttons are lit when X-ray exposure
is disabled. Note that if X-ray exposure is disabled due to movement of the
support unit to the park position, the following displays and buttons do not
light.

The X-ray exposure

disable icon is displayed
on the system monitor.

The X-ray exposure

disable display is lit
on the in-room monitor.

The X-ray exposure

disable button is
highlighted on the
Acquisition mode screen
of the system monitor.

NOTE: If the X-ray exposure disable function is assigned to one of the function
buttons on the main console, the assigned function button also lights when
X-ray exposure is disabled.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
139
5.11 Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study") From the
Examination Room
"Start Study" can be executed from the examination room. Start a study
using this method in emergencies, such as when the patient status changes
suddenly after "Finish Study" was executed and the study must be resumed
immediately.

In normal cases, do not start a study using this method.

<1> Start a study. Press the top button of the Menu operating lever on the
tableside console. After the screen for study is displayed on the
fluoroscopic/reference monitor, a study can be started.

<2> Complete a study. Perform the normal study completion method. Refer to
section 10.4 "Finish Study".

NOTE: 1. For the emergency study starting procedures when an urgent patient is
accepted, refer to subsection 10.5 "Urgent Patient Acceptance".

2. The number is automatically assigned to the patient information. Correct the

information after the study is completed.

3. The Emergency-Study Protocol used for the study started by this operation
can be edited. For details, refer to subsection 8.2.3 "Registering a new
study protocol and editing an existing protocol" in the reference manual.

CAUTION: 1. Any mismatch in the patient information may result in incorrect

diagnosis.
Be sure to correct the urgent patient information after completing the
study.
To correct the data after the study, use the editing functions for image-
related information in Review mode.

2. Except in an emergency study, do not press the Menu operating lever

on the tableside console while "Start Study" is not executed. If the
button is pressed unintentionally, the system enters the study start
status, resulting in incorrect X-ray exposure.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
140
5.12 Detecting Abnormalities in the FPD Cooling Systems
If any abnormality occurs in the FPD cooling systems and the FPD is not
cooled properly, the FPD power is automatically turned OFF to avoid
damaging the FPD.

<1> If a message indicating an FPD temperature error is displayed on the system

monitor, immediately stop the study and store all of the data items that are
being processed.

Within approximately 5 minutes after the message is displayed, the power of

the FPD is automatically turned OFF.

<2> Contact your Toshiba representative for inspection and repair of the system.

Do not use the system until inspection and repair have been completed.

CAUTION: When an error occurs in the FPD cooling system, the error message
"Abnormality in the FPD cooling unit." is displayed. In this case, stop using
the system and contact your Toshiba representative for inspection and
repair. Do not use the system until inspection and repair have been
completed.
Since the FPD cooling system may be defective in this case, if the FPD
cooling system is used as is, the FPD also may be defective.

5.13 Protecting the Personal Information of Patients

This system is provided with a function for protecting the personal
information handled in this system.

To make this function available, setting by a Toshiba service engineer is

required. For further information, contact your Toshiba representative.

For details of this function and the operating procedures, refer to the
reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
141
No. 2B308-200EN*E
142
6. Installation of Accessories and
Optional Units
Contents 6.1 Installing the Tableside Console
6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)
6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps
6.4 Connecting the Cables
6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm)
6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option)
6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option)
6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option)
6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option)
6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch (Option)
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option)
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band (CAT-880B)
6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)
6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail (CAT-880B)
6.17 Other Catheterization Table Options
6.18 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer

No. 2B308-200EN*E
143
6.1 Installing the Tableside Console
6.1.1 Installing the tableside console

(1) Installing the tableside console on the catheterization table

To install the tableside console on the accessory mounting rail of the
catheterization table, hang the mounting hooks of the tableside console over
the accessory mounting rail while pulling the lever at the rear of the tableside
console.

After installing the tableside console, confirm that it is secured firmly.

To remove the tableside console, lift it while pulling the lever toward you.

Mounting hook

Lever

Accessory mounting rail

CAUTION: When installing the tableside console on the accessory mounting rail
of the catheterization table, engage the tableside console mounting
hook with the accessory mounting rail. If the hook is not properly
engaged with the rail, the tableside console may fall and be damaged.
If the tableside console falls, it may malfunction even if it does not
appear to be damaged. It should be inspected by Toshiba service
personnel before it is used.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
144
 (2) Setting the installation position of the tableside console
The installation position of the tableside console should be set in the system.
Otherwise, the lever tilt directions and the support unit operating directions
may not match.

CAUTION: If the mounting orientation of the tableside console is changed, be sure

to set the new position information.
Otherwise, the operating directions of the levers may not match the
actual movement directions of the support unit(s).

<1> Press the Auto-positioning selection button on the tableside console.

Confirm that the Auto-positioning selection button lights.

<2> Press the Override button and the 0 key simultaneously.

The mounting position that is currently saved is displayed in the warning

display section of the reference monitor.

Registered position Display

Head end of the catheterization table Head
Left side of the catheterization table Left
Right side of the catheterization table Right
Foot end of the catheterization table Foot

<Left side>

<Head end> <Foot end>

<Right side>

No. 2B308-200EN*E
145
<3> While holding down the Override button, press and release the 0 key
successively until the mounting position to be set is displayed in the warning
display section.

Each time the Override button and 0 key are pressed, the position changes
to the next one in the following order.

<Head end>  <Left side>  <Foot end>  <Right side>



<4> After the mounting position is displayed on the warning display section, do
not press the Override button and 0 key for 5 seconds.

The selected position is saved and the position display in the warning display
section on the reference monitor goes out.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
146
6.1.2 Installing the tabletop operating box (CAT-880B)

(1) Installing the tabletop operating box on the catheterization

table
Install the tabletop operating box on the accessory mounting rail of the
catheterization table. For the installation procedure, refer to 6.1.1 (1)
"Installing the tableside console on the catheterization table". For part
names, refer to 4.8.2 (2) "Name of each part of the tabletop operating box".

(2) Setting required after installing the tabletop operating box

After the tabletop operating box is installed, it may be necessary to switch
the movement directions assigned to the tabletop forward and backward
movement buttons. Confirm that the movement directions are assigned
correctly. If the movement direction assignment is incorrect, tabletop
longitudinal movement will be performed in the direction opposite to that
intended.

<1> Move the peripheral units outside the movement range of the catheterization
table.

<2> Press the tabletop forward movement button or backward movement button
on the tabletop operating box.

<3> If the tabletop moves as intended, setting is not necessary. If it moves in the
direction opposite to that intended, switch the movement directions assigned
to these buttons using the tabletop longitudinal movement direction reversal
switch at the bottom of the tabletop operating box.

<4> Press the tabletop forward movement button or backward movement button
on the tabletop operating box to confirm that the tabletop moves as intended.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
147
6.2 Installing the Satellite Console (Option)
(1) Installing the satellite console on the dedicated stand
Install the satellite console on the accessory mounting rail of the dedicated
stand. For the installation procedure, refer to subsection 6.1.1 "Installing the
tableside console".

CAUTION: 1. The satellite console must be installed on the accessory mounting rail
of the dedicated stand. If the satellite console is placed at a location
other than that specified (such as on the floor), an accident may result.

2. Do not place the dedicated stand for the satellite console under the
tabletop of the catheterization table.
If the stand and the tabletop come into contact, damage or a system
malfunction may result.

CAUTION: If the satellite console stand is used, observe the following precautions to
avoid the console falling and becoming damaged.

 Do not place the stand on a sloping floor or within the movement range of
each unit.
 Do not entangle your feet in the satellite console cable.
 Mount the satellite console at the center of the accessory mounting rail.
 Mount/hang only the satellite console on the stand.
 When operating the system, lock the brake of the stand.

Accessory mounting rail

The brake is
released.

The brake is
applied.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
148
(2) Saving the installation position
In the same manner as for the tableside console, save the satellite console
installation position.

For the saving procedure, refer to subsection 6.1 "Installing the tableside
console".

Save the position using the Override button and the 0 key on the satellite
console. Note that the orientation of the satellite console relative to the
catheterization table should be as shown in the figure below.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
149
6.3 Mounting the Sterile Caps
Cover the FPD and the tableside console with sterile caps. Contact your
Toshiba representative for sterile caps.

CAUTION: 1. Cover the FPD of the support units with sterile caps. Sterile caps are
used for preventing blood or contrast medium from coming into
contact with the FPD.

 Make sure that the FPD near/away movement switches are

completely covered by a sterile cap.

 Do not pull down the sterile cap more than necessary. If the ends of
the sterile cap are pulled too far in, they may come into contact with
the FPD near/away movement mechanism section during near/away
movement, and the cap may be damaged or come off as a result.

For sterile caps, contact your Toshiba representative.

2. If contrast medium is spilled on the tableside console, contact your

Toshiba representative for cleaning of the tableside console. If the
tableside console is left as is, the spilled contrast medium may solidify
inside the tableside console, and a malfunction may result.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
150
6.4 Connecting the Cables
When the following units are used, connect the connectors of the cables
from each unit to the corresponding connectors of the catheterization table.
Confirm the positions of the connectors of the catheterization table.

 Injector (contrast medium injector)

 Tabletop control switch
 Tabletop operating box (CAT-880B)
 Satellite console
 Footswitch
 Additional footswitch

CAUTION: 1. Before connecting the cables of the units used in combination to the
catheterization table, be sure to turn OFF the power of the system and
units used in combination. If the cables are connected with the power
ON, an electric shock or malfunction may occur.

2. To prevent electric shock to the patient, connect the potential

equalization conductors of peripheral units (such as the
electrocardiograph) used in combination with the system to the
equipotential terminal ( ) of the catheterization table.

(1) Connecting with the CAT-850B

Connectors for control switches

Equipotential terminal

Satellite console connector

Connectors for footswitches

(Also provided on front.)

Connector for injection

Cable connector connection positions (CAT-850B)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
151
(2) Connecting with the CAT-880B

Cable connector connection positions (CAT-880B)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
152
6.5 Installing the Tabletop Mat and Arm Supports
When performing diagnosis, be sure to use the tabletop mat and the arm
supports.

WARNING: To prevent the patient's arm or hand from getting caught, mount the
arm supports to the catheterization table.

(1) Installing the tabletop mat

Place the tabletop mat on the tabletop of the catheterization table.

CAUTION: Make sure that the tabletop mat does not protrude from the tabletop.
If the tabletop mat is not aligned properly with the tabletop, shadows caused
by the mat may appear on images.

(2) Installing the arm supports

Install the arm supports after placing the patient on the catheterization table.
Insert the arm supports under the tabletop mat from both sides of the patient.

Tabletop Tabletop mat Arm supports

Installing the arm supports

No. 2B308-200EN*E
153
6.6 Installing and Adjusting the Drip Infusion Stand

CAUTION: 1. Do not hang an object weighing 2 kg or more on one side of the drip infusion
stand or objects weighing 4 kg or more on both sides of the drip infusion
stand. Doing so may cause the stand to fall over.

2. When operating the tabletop, be careful not to allow the drip infusion stand to
interfere with other units such as the support unit and the monitor
suspension unit.

<1> Insert the drip infusion stand fixing fitting into the accessory mounting rail.

<2> Insert the drip infusion stand into the pipe of the fixing fitting.

<3> Turn the knob of the fixing fitting clockwise to fix the drip infusion stand.

<4> Confirm that the drip infusion stand is securely fixed.

Drip infusion stand

<2>

<1> <3>
Accessory mounting rail
Knob of the fixing fitting
Drip infusion stand fixing fitting

Installing the drip infusion stand

No. 2B308-200EN*E
154
6.7 Installing the Armrest (One Arm)
After placing the patient on the catheterization table, insert the armrest under
the tabletop mat.

Tabletop Tabletop mat

Armrest

Installing the armrest

WARNING: 1. Do not place anything other than the patient's arm on the armrest.
Also, do not allow the armrest to be subjected to a force of more than
100 N (approximately 10 kgf). If these instructions are not followed, the
armrest may be damaged and the patient may be injured.

2. Take special care to prevent interference between the armrest and the
support unit. If the armrest contacts the support unit, the armrest may
be damaged and the patient may be injured.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
155
6.8 Installing the Armrests (Both Arms: Option)
Armrests for both arms of the patient are provided as an option.
The armrests are required for the Sones method.

<1> Remove the tabletop mat and place the armrest mounting plate on the
tabletop.

<2> Attach the armrest mounting plate securely to the tabletop using the fixing
bands.

Armrest mounting plate

Fixing bands

Attaching the armrest mounting plate

<3> Insert the armrests into the armrest mounting brackets attached to the
mounting plate.

<4> There are three settings for the mounting angle. The angle changes
according to the groove into which the angle adjustment shaft is inserted.

 To set the armrest to the horizontal position, slide the shaft out from the
groove.

 To tilt the armrest upward, insert the shaft into the inner groove.

Armrest mounting bracket

Angle adjustment shaft Armrest

Installing the armrests and adjusting the mounting angles

WARNING: Before using the armrests, confirm that armrest shafts are fully
inserted into the mounting section holes. If the armrest shafts are not
inserted properly, the armrests may come off during use and the
patient may be injured.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
156
6.9 Installing the Arm Holder (Option)
The arm holder consists of the mounting section, the arm holder section, and
the handgrip section.

6.9.1 Arm holder for the CAT-850B and CAT-860B

(1) Securing the mounting section

<1> Insert the mounting section into the tabletop. Turn the lever toward direction
(B). The mounting section is then secured on the tabletop. To release the
mounting section, turn the lever toward direction (A).

<2> Confirm that the mounting section is firmly secured.

(A)
(B) Lever

Securing the mounting section

(2) Mounting the holder section and adjusting the handgrips

<1> Insert the arm holder into the grooves of the mounting section.

<2> Insert the handgrips into the grooves of the mounting section.

<3> Instruct the patient to place his/her arms on the arm holder. Then instruct
the patient to hold the handgrips as shown in the figure below.

<4> Adjust the positions of the handgrips according to the patient physique. After
adjustment, turn the adjustment knobs to lock the handgrips.

Arm holder

Handgrip

Adjustment knob

Mounting the holder section

No. 2B308-200EN*E
157
6.9.2 Arm holder for the CAT-880B

(1) Securing the mounting section

<1> Insert the mounting section into the tabletop within the area specified by the
double-headed arrow in the figure below.

Mark

Head end of the tabletop

Mounting location (between the marks)

<2> To secure the mounting section to the tabletop, turn the lever to set it to the
(B) position. To remove the mounting section from the tabletop, turn the
lever to set it to the (A) position.

<3> Confirm that the mounting section is firmly secured.

(A)
(B)

Lever

Securing the mounting section

No. 2B308-200EN*E
158
 (2) Mounting the holder sections and adjusting the handgrips
<1> Insert the ends of the arm holders securely into the grooves of the mounting
sections.

<2> Insert the handgrips into the holes of the mounting sections.

<3> Instruct the patient to place his/her arms on the arm holders. Then instruct
the patient to hold the handgrips as shown in the figure in subsection 6.9.1
(2).

<4> Adjust the positions of the handgrips according to the patient physique. After
adjustment, turn the adjustment knobs to lock the handgrips.

Arm holder

Handgrip

Adjustment knob

Mounting the holder section

No. 2B308-200EN*E
159
6.10 Installing the Arm Cover (Option)
Install the arm cover on the catheterization table if required.

<1> Place the arm cover on the tabletop and secure it using the two securing
bands on the tabletop.

<2> Place the tabletop mat on the arm cover.

Tabletop mat

Arm cover

Securing band

No. 2B308-200EN*E
160
6.11 Installing the Leg Securing Band (Option)
Use the leg securing band to prevent leg movement during stepping DSA.

(1) Operating procedure

(1.1) Pulling out the securing band

<1> Move the lock lever to engage the lever with the notch.

<2> Pull out the securing band.

(1.2) Winding the securing band

<1> Disengage the lock lever from the notch and return it to the previous position.

<2> Move the knob clockwise to wind the securing band.

Lock lever
Lock lever Securing band
<1>
<1> <2> <2>

Knob

Pulling out the securing band Winding the securing band

No. 2B308-200EN*E
161
(2) Securing the patient's legs
<1> Insert the leg securing band into the accessory mounting rail at the tabletop
side.

<2> Pull out the securing band and engage the band-end hook with the
accessory mounting rail on the other side. At this time, maintain the
securing band tension so that the hook is not disengaged.

<3> While maintaining the securing band tension, wind the securing band without
causing the patient pain.

<4> Confirm that the patient's legs are properly secured.

Accessory
mounting rail

Hook

Securing the patient's legs

No. 2B308-200EN*E
162
6.12 Installing/Removing the Tabletop Control Switch (Option)
The tabletop control switch can be installed on the accessory mounting rails
on the left/right sides of the catheterization table. Install the tabletop control
switch at a position where operation can be performed easily. It is not
possible to place the tabletop control switch at a position away from the
catheterization table main unit.

(1) Installation
<1> Install the tabletop control switch. Pull the tabletop control switch lever
toward you and install the switch to the rail as is. When the lever is released,
the switch is secured.

<2> Install the two cable hooks to the rail. A hook must be installed near the foot
end of the table.

<3> Hang the tabletop control switch cable using the two hooks.

<4> Confirm that the tabletop control switch cable does not interfere with
operation of the catheterization table. Slowly move the tabletop of the
catheterization table in the lateral and longitudinal directions and confirm that
the tabletop moves to the stroke end with sufficient slack of the cable. Also
confirm that the cable does not get caught by the catheterization table.

(2) Removal
<1> Remove the tabletop control switch. Pull the tabletop control switch lever
toward you and lift it as is.

To change the position of the tabletop control switch on the rail, slide the
switch while pulling the lever.

Mounting the hook

Cable
Mounting/removing the
tabletop control switch

No. 2B308-200EN*E
163
6.13 Installing the Tabletop Mat (XBTM-001A: Option)
<1> Remove the standard tabletop mat from the tabletop of the catheterization
table.

<2> Place the tabletop mat (XBTM-001A) on the tabletop.

The folded end of the tabletop mat fastener should be facing down.

Head end

Tabletop mat (XBTM-001A)

Foot end
Fastener

<3> Place a sheet over the tabletop mat if required. This may make it easier to
move the patient on the tabletop mat.

<4> If accessories or options for the system (such as the arm support or armrest)
are used, there may be some unevenness between the tabletop and the
tabletop mat. In this case, place a piece of cloth or a cushion over the
uneven area.

Tabletop mat Arm support

Tabletop
Place a piece of cloth or a cushion
to correct the unevenness.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
164
6.14 Mounting the Patient Immobilization Band (CAT-880B)
Two patient immobilization bands are used to secure the patient on the
catheterization table. They are wound around the patient's chest and
abdomen. Be sure to use both bands.

CAUTION: 1. Do not allow the patient immobilization band to bear the entire weight
of the patient.

2. Before operation, confirm that the patient immobilization band

immobilizes the patient firmly. If the patient immobilization band is not
secured firmly, it may come loose during examination and cause an
accident.

3. The service life of the patient immobilization band is one year. It must
be replaced with a new band within one year from first use. The
expiration date for use must be written on the label of the patient
immobilization band (refer to the figure below) using permanent ink.
This expiration date must be checked against the current date before
each use. If the patient immobilization band is used for more than one
year, it may deteriorate and break, or the Velcro tape may come off.
Fluffing on the Velcro tape, abrasion or damage on the patient
immobilization band, etc. are signs that a new patient immobilization
band should be used, even if it has been in use for less than one year.
To obtain a new patient immobilization band, contact your Toshiba
representative.

Write down the expiration

date for use here.

(MONTH/YEAR)
19803001

No. 2B308-200EN*E
165
<1> Wind one of the patient immobilization bands around the patient and tabletop
and tighten it using Velcro A.

<2> Pull the patient immobilization band and additionally tighten it using Velcro B.

<3> Further tighten the patient immobilization band using Velcro C.

<4> Confirm that the patient is fully immobilized by the patient immobilization
band.

<5> Place the second patient immobilization band around the patient and tighten
it in the same way.

Patient immobilization band

Velcro B Velcro A

Velcro C

No. 2B308-200EN*E
166
6.15 Mounting the Drape Holder (CAT-880B)
Mount the drape holder on the tabletop as required.

CAUTION: Observe the following precautions when using the drape holder.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in injury to the patient
or operator or damage to the system.

a. Before starting an examination, confirm that the tabletop locking knob

and the angle locking knob are securely engaged.

b. Be careful to avoid contact between the drape holder and the support
unit.

c. Do not hang anything other than the drape on the drape holder.

<1> Insert the clamp for the drape holder into the tabletop at a location between
the end of the tabletop and the marks.

<2> Tighten the clamp locking knob.

<3> Confirm that the drape holder is securely mounted to the tabletop.

<4> Adjust the bar angle by loosening the bar angle locking knob.

<5> Adjust the bar length by loosening the bar length locking knob.

<6> Tighten the bar angle locking knob and the bar length locking knob.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
167
6.16 Mounting the Accessory Tabletop Rail (CAT-880B)
Mount the accessory tabletop rail on the tabletop as required.

WARNING: 1. When the accessory tabletop rail (option) with heavy components (*1)
installed on it is used in combination, the maximum allowable load on
the catheterization table is 220 kg. Do not place a patient whose mass
exceeds 220 kg on the table because the tabletop may be damaged and
the patient may be injured.

* 1) The term "heavy components" refers to components that are not

assumed to be mounted on the catheterization table. Standard
components mounted on the catheterization table such as the
tableside console and optional units are not included.

2. Do not mount an object weighing more than 20 kg on the accessory

tabletop rail. Doing so may damage the rail and cause an accident.

Note that 20 kg is the maximum limit when the center of gravity of the
mounted object is immediately above the rail ("A" in the following
figure). Depending on its center of gravity, even an object that weighs
less than 20 kg may not be mountable. For example, if the center of
gravity of the object to be mounted is 100 mm away from the rail ("B" in
the following figure), the maximum permissible mass of the object is
10 kg. Refer to the following figure for details.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
168
CAUTION: Observe the following precautions when using the accessory tabletop
rail.
Failure to observe these precautions may result in injury to the patient
or operator or damage to the system.

1. Before starting an examination, confirm that the tabletop locking

knob is securely fastened.

2. Be careful to avoid contact between the accessory tabletop rail and

the support unit.

3. Do not mount an operating console on the accessory tabletop rail.

<1> Insert the clamp for the accessory tabletop rail into the tabletop at a location
between the end of the tabletop and the marks.

<2> Tighten the two clamp locking knobs.

<3> Confirm that the accessory tabletop rail is securely mounted to the tabletop.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
169
6.17 Other Catheterization Table Options
For the operating procedures for the optional units listed in the table below,
refer to the operation manual for each optional unit.

Optional unit Model name

Extension rails XBER-001A
Extension table XBET-001A
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A
Tabletop control console XBFG-850B
Extension tabletop XBET-860B

No. 2B308-200EN*E
170
6.18 Installing/Removing the Detachable Spacer
If this system is used in the USA, add the detachable spacer at the X-ray
beam limiting device touch sensor. The SSD (Source-To-Skin-Distance) is
restricted to the minimum SSD, or 38 cm.

Note, however, if this system is used for specific surgical applications,

removing the detachable spacer is permitted.

After the detachable spacer is removed, the minimum SSD is 30 cm.

(1) Installing the detachable spacer (to increase the SSD to

38 cm)
<1> Place the detachable spacer on the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor.
Align the mounting screws of the detachable spacer with the screw holes.

<2> Tighten the four mounting screws of the detachable spacer.

<3> Confirm that the detachable spacer is firmly secured.

(2) Removing the detachable spacer

<1> Loosen the four mounting screws of the detachable spacer to remove the
spacer.

<2> Mount caps over the four screw holes.

CC-i system VC-i system

No. 2B308-200EN*E
171
No. 2B308-200EN*E
172
7. Daily Checks
Contents 7.1 Checks Before Operation
7.2 Checks After Operation

No. 2B308-200EN*E
173
7.1 Checks Before Operation
Be sure to perform the required checks before starting operation. Make a
copy of the check sheet provided at the end of this operation manual and
use it when performing inspection.

CAUTION: If any system abnormality is found during the checks before operation,
stop using the system and post a sign reading "DO NOT USE" on the
system. Then contact your Toshiba service representative for
inspection and repair.

NOTE: The system status (items related to fluoroscopy/radiography) can be

recorded in imaging condition check mode. This permits changes in the
system status to be checked by comparing previous records with the current
status. It is recommended that the checks in imaging condition check mode
be performed periodically during the preoperation checks. For details, refer
to section 10 "Check of Fluoroscopy/Radiography Functions" of the
reference manual.

(1) Checks before turning ON the power

(a) Checks in the control room

 Confirm that the ambient temperature, atmospheric pressure, relative

humidity, and atmosphere meet the operating requirements.
 Confirm that there is no dirt on the main console, system console, and
monitors.
 Confirm that the emergency power supply cable is prepared. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

(b) Checks in the examination room

 Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
 Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the
operation ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor
suspension unit.
 Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
 Confirm that each unit is cleaned and sterilized.
 Confirm that there are no objects that may come into contact with the
footswitch in the surrounding area.
 Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
174
(2) Checks after turning ON the power
(a) Checks in the control room

 Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature

increase.
 Confirm that no error message is displayed on the system console
monitor.
 Confirm that communication with the patient in the examination room is
possible using the intercom microphone.

(b) Checks in the examination room

 Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature

increase.
 Confirm that the tableside console is located at the registered position.
 Confirm that the current day and time display area of the system monitor
match the actual current day and time.
 Confirm that the green LED of the wireless footswitch lights. (*1)
 Confirm that the orange LED of the wireless footswitch does not light. (*1)
 Confirm that the red LED of the wireless footswitch does not light. (*1)

*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

(c) Checks for the Emergency stop function

This check must be performed with the system stopped.

 Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table
is turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
 In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned
ON using the Power reset button on the operating panel of the
catheterization table.

(d) Checks for touch sensor operation

Check the following statuses while the touch sensor is being pressed.
Perform the check for each touch sensor. Also, check at least four positions
on each touch sensor. For the touch sensor locations, refer to subsection
4.7 "X-ray Tube Support Unit".

 Confirm that a warning sound is generated.

 Confirm that the FPD automatically moves to the far limit.
 Confirm that all electrically powered operations for the support unit are
disabled.
 Confirm that vertical movement of the tabletop of the catheterization table
is possible in the direction away from contact.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
175
(e) Operational checks

Confirm that there are no abnormal operations of the support unit,

catheterization table, and monitor suspension unit. Also, check the following
statuses.

 Confirm that operations are performed normally.

 Confirm that there are no abnormal sounds and unusual smells.
 Confirm that there is no play.
 Confirm that operations are smooth.

(f) Check of X-ray exposure

Confirm that there are no abnormalities related to X-ray exposure. Also,

check the following statuses.

 Confirm that fluoroscopy can be performed (with an absorbing object

positioned on the catheterization table).
Start fluoroscopy using the fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room or
the examination room.
 Confirm that radiography can be performed (with an absorbing object
positioned on the catheterization table).
Start radiography using the X-ray exposure handswitch or footswitch.
 Confirm that the functions assigned to the function buttons of the
footswitch can be performed.
 Confirm that the X-ray tube ready icon is displayed on the system console
(system monitor) immediately after the radiography start operation is
performed until preparation for X-ray exposure is completed.
 Confirm that the X-ray ON icon is displayed on the reference monitor and
system console (system monitor) during X-ray generation.
 Confirm that an appropriate brightness is set by the ABC (automatic
brightness control) function.
 Confirm that the FOV size can be switched. (This should be checked
during fluoroscopy.)
 Confirm that no abnormal sound is generated during X-ray exposure
(such as a rotation sound from the X-ray tube assembly).
 Confirm that fluoroscopy can be stopped.
Stop fluoroscopy using the fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room or
the examination room.
 Confirm that radiography can be stopped.
Stop radiography using the X-ray exposure handswitch or footswitch.

(g) Checks before operation for the units to be used in combination

Perform checks before operation for the units to be used in combination with
this system, such as the injector (contrast medium injector), and confirm that
there are no abnormalities.
For the procedures for the checks before operation, refer to the operation
manual provided with each unit used in combination.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
176
(h) Confirmation of image display on the monitors

Confirm that fluoroscopic images, radiographic images, and playback

images are displayed normally on the following monitors in the examination
room and control room.

 Fluoroscopic monitor
 Reference monitor
 Backup monitor (when a large-screen monitor is used)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
177
7.2 Checks After Operation
Perform the following checks after operation to prepare for the next
examination.

(1) Checks before turning OFF the power

(a) Checks in the control room

 Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or system

damage.
 For systems in which an X-ray tube assembly with a liquid metal bearing
is used in combination, confirm that the support unit is set to the standard
position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU 0°).

(b) Checks in the examination room

 Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
 Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.

(2) Checks after turning OFF the power

(a) Checks in the control room

 Confirm that ambient temperature, atmospheric pressure, relative

humidity, and atmosphere meet the storage requirements.
 Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or system
damage.

(b) Checks in the examination room

 Confirm that the support unit, catheterization table, footswitch, and

monitor suspension unit are not damaged.

(3) After performing checks

When the checks after operation have been completed, confirm that the
power supplies of the system and units used in combination are turned OFF.

Also, turn OFF the power switch of the power distribution board.

When the wireless footswitch (option) is used, use the supplied AC adaptor
to charge the footswitch battery.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
178
8. Turning the System Power ON/OFF
Contents 8.1 Turning the System Power ON
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF (System Shutdown)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
179
8.1 Turning the System Power ON
<1> Turn ON the power switches of the power distribution boards of the
examination room and the control room.

<2> Perform the required checks before operation (before turning the power
supply ON).

<3> Turn ON the power of the monitor.

<4> Press the Power ON button .

<5> After approximately 6 minutes, startup of the system is completed. The

Patient Mode screen is displayed on the system console monitor.

Power ON switch box System console

Patient mode screen (example of display)

CAUTION: 1. Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming studies
after several hours has elapsed since the system power was turned
OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait for at least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning ON
the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear and then start a study.

2. After the power is turned ON, wait at least two minutes before
operating the switches. Failure to do so may generate an error. In
such a case, wait until startup processing is completed and then
restart the system (turning the power OFF and then ON).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
180
CAUTION: Except in emergencies, wait for approximately 20 seconds after the power
has been turned OFF before turning the power ON again. Failure to do so
may cause a system malfunction.

NOTE: 1. Approximately 2 minutes after the power is turned ON, backup fluoroscopy is
enabled.
For details of backup fluoroscopy, refer to subsection 5.7 "Backup
Fluoroscopy".

2. For systems whose patient personal information protection function has

been made available, the following screen is displayed on the system
console monitor when system startup is completed. In this case, log on to
the system with an authorized user ID and password. When logon is
successful, the Patient mode screen is displayed. For details, refer to
section 9 "Safety Management Measures Related to Personal Information"
of the reference manual.

If the system is shut down without performing the standard examination

completion operation and then started up again, or if the system power is
turned OFF during an examination and then the system is started up again,
the logon screen is not displayed but the discontinued examination is
resumed automatically.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
181
8.2 Turning the System Power OFF (System Shutdown)
This subsection describes the normal shutdown procedures.

For the procedure for turning the system power OFF immediately in an
emergency, refer to subsection 5.2 "System Shutdown in Emergencies".

(1) Completing a study (Finish study)

Before turning OFF the system power, be sure to select Finish Study.
Otherwise, acquired data sets are not saved. For the Finish Study
procedures, refer to section 10.4 "Finish Study".

(2) System power OFF

<1> Click the Shutdown tab on the system console.

<2> Click the Shutdown button.

<3> The shutdown confirmation dialog box is displayed. To perform shutdown,

click the OK button. To cancel shutdown, click the Cancel button.

 When the OK button is clicked, the system power is turned OFF after
approximately 1 minute and 30 seconds.

(3) Turning OFF the breaker on the power distribution board

After the system is shut down, turn OFF the breaker for the system on the
power distribution board.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
182
WARNING: 1. If the power is turned OFF using the Power OFF button for emergency
stop, the image data that is being processed may not be saved.

2. Do not turn OFF the main power switch on the power distribution board
while system shutdown processing is being performed. If the button is
turned OFF during shutdown processing, data may be lost.

CAUTION: 1. Do not turn OFF the system power until the used heat storage capacity of
the X-ray tube anode decreases to 30%. If the system power is turned OFF
while the used heat storage capacity of the X-ray tube anode is still high, the
X-ray tube assembly may malfunction.

2. If the power is turned OFF repeatedly using the Power OFF button for
emergency stop, the system may malfunction.

3. If the following operation(s) are performed, the X-ray tube may malfunction
or its service life may be shortened.

 System shutdown operation and system power ON operation are

performed repeatedly in a short time.

 The Power OFF button for emergency stop is used frequently.

 The Power OFF button for emergency stop is pressed during the period
from when the system power is turned ON to when system startup is
completed.

 The main power switch on the power distribution board is turned OFF
while system shutdown processing is being performed.

 The support unit is not at the standard position (LAO/RAO 0°, CRA/CAU
0°) when the system power is turned OFF. Before shutting down the
system, set the support unit to the standard position.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
183
NOTE: 1. If shutdown processing is performed while a study is in progress, the
following message is displayed. When the OK button is clicked, the study is
aborted and the power of the system is turned OFF.
To terminate the study normally, click the CANCEL button, terminate the
study in Patient mode (Finish Study), and then shut down the system.

2. If the system power is turned OFF due to a power failure, reboot the system
by performing the standard system power ON procedures after the power is
recovered.
To reboot the system, perform the normal power ON operation.
If a power failure occurs while image acquisition or data transfer is in
progress, image acquisition or data transfer may not be completed normally.
Therefore, check the acquired images or transferred data. If the check
reveals that a process is not completed normally, acquire images or transfer
data again.
Note that the power requirements of the system are extremely high;
therefore, the system cannot be used with a standalone power generator.

3. If the system is shut down or the power supply to the system is interrupted
due to a power failure during an examination and the system is then started
up again, the discontinued examination is resumed automatically.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
184
9. Operating Procedures for Units in
the Examination Room
This section describes the operating procedures for the units included in the
system configuration in the examination room.

For the operating procedures for optional units and units manufactured by
companies other than Toshiba, refer to the operation manual supplied with
each applicable unit.

Contents 9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit

9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization Table
9.3 Auto-Positioning
9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions
9.5 Auto Set (Systems with the CAS-930A)
9.6 Route Run (for systems in which the CAS-930A is used)
9.7 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option)
9.8 Operating the Monitor Integration System (Option)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
185
WARNING: 1. Before starting operation, move objects present in the "operating
range when the system is used normally" outside the range. This
range is specified in the figure below. If any object required for
examination must be located within the range, special care is required
so that it does not interfere with the system.

2. Do not enter the area where the clearance between the C-arm and the
floor becomes small (shaded section in the figure below). Your feet
may be caught between the C-arm and the floor.
Do not place any objects (such as the footswitch) on the floor in this
area.

<Operating range when the C-arm support unit and the catheterization
table are in the normal use status>
2765

Operating range when the system

is in the normal use status
1600
4180

1160

3155 920 1055

Unit: mm

3. Physicians, radiological technologists, and nurses should be careful

not to catch their hands in moving sections of the support unit or
catheterization table.
In particular, special care must be taken to ensure that their hands are
not caught between the FPD and the FPD support section cover or
between the C-arm and C-arm support section.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
186
NOTE: The display angle of the image displayed on the monitor is automatically
adjusted so that the direction toward the end of the catheterization table is
always at the top. The display angle does not change even when the
support arm rotation angle of the C-arm support unit or the FPD rotation
angle is changed.

[Canceling the automatic adjustment function]

The automatic adjustment function for the display angle is canceled in the
following cases.

 When the FPD touch sensor has detected contact

 When manual rotation operation is performed for the FPD (the X-ray
exposure field adjustment lever on the tableside console is rotated)

[Restoring the automatic adjustment function]

The automatic adjustment function is restored by performing either of the

following operations.

 When the X-ray exposure field adjustment lever on the table side console
is pressed

 When the system is restarted

No. 2B308-200EN*E
187
9.1 Operating Procedures for the Support Unit

WARNING: 1. X-ray generation is possible whenever the support unit is not at the
park position. Be extremely careful not to perform X-ray exposure
inadvertently.

2. Releasing the X-ray exposure disable mode makes it possible to

generate X-rays even when the support unit is located at the park
position. Therefore, take special care to prevent inadvertent X-ray
exposure.

NOTE: If the tableside console is not mounted on the accessory mounting rail of the
catheterization table, the support unit cannot be operated. Mount the
tableside console on the rail.

 Names of the support unit set positions

 Longitudinal/Lateral travel movement
 Support column rotation
 C-arm rotation/C-arm sliding
 FPD near/away movement
 Manual operation for FPD rotation
 Rotation and opening/closing of the compensation filters
 Opening/Closing the blades of the X-ray beam limiting device
(X-ray exposure field adjustment)
 Changing the FOV size
 Mounting/removing the X-ray grid

No. 2B308-200EN*E
188
■ Names of the support unit setting positions

The typical setting positions of the support unit are listed below.

<1> Typical C-arm support unit setting positions

Name Position
C-arm set position Support column rotation angle : 0°
C-arm park position C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
(setting at the time of C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
shipment)
Support column rotation angle : +90° or -90°
C-arm standard status C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
Standard status of the C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm set at the C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
head-end
Support column rotation angle : 0° (C-arm set position)
Standard status of the C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm set on the C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
patient's right side
Support column rotation angle : -90°
Standard status of the C-arm sliding angle : CRA/CAU = 0°
C-arm set on the C-arm rotation angle : LAO/RAO = 0°
patient's left side
Support column rotation angle : +90°

No. 2B308-200EN*E
189
■ Longitudinal/Lateral travel movement

CAS-830B CAS-930A

No. 2B308-200EN*E
190
NOTE: 1. For the CAS-930A, the longitudinal and lateral travel movements can also be
controlled using the ceiling travel buttons on the sides of the support column.
The tube support unit moves in the direction indicated by the arrow shown
on the pressed button, with respect to the "person" icon at the center of the
buttons. The ceiling travel buttons are deadman buttons. The tube support
unit moves while a ceiling travel button is held down and stops moving when
the button is released. When the tube support unit is operated using a
ceiling travel button, the movement speed is reduced to 75% of the speed for
operation from the tableside console.

Ceiling travel buttons

2. For the CAS-930A, the longitudinal and lateral movement speed for
operation using the ceiling travel buttons can be reduced to 30% of the
speed for operation from the tableside console. Assign the movement speed
reduction function to local function button [S1] or [S2] on the sides of the
support column, and press the button and the ceiling travel button
simultaneously for operation at reduced speed. To assign functions to the
local function buttons or to change assigned functions, contact your Toshiba
service representative.

Local function buttons

CAUTION: When operating the CAS-930A using the ceiling travel buttons on the
sides of the support column, be extremely careful not to allow the tube
support unit to come into contact with persons or peripheral
equipment. Note that the tube support unit may sometimes be hidden
by the support column, making it difficult to observe movement of the
tube support unit; therefore, extra caution is required when performing
movement by holding down a ceiling travel button.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
191
■ Support column rotation

CAS-830B CAS-930A

No. 2B308-200EN*E
192
NOTE: 1. For the CAS-930A, the support column rotation can also be controlled using
the column rotation buttons on the sides of the support column. The column
rotation buttons are deadman buttons. The tube support unit rotates while
the button is held down and stops rotating when the button is released.
When the tube support unit is operated using a column rotation button, the
rotation speed is reduced to 60% of the level operated from the tableside
console.

(To the left side of the patient) (To the right side of the patient)

Column rotation buttons

2. For the CAS-930A, the column rotation speed for operation using the column
rotation buttons can be reduced to 30% of the speed for operation from the
tableside console. Assign the movement speed reduction function to local
function button [S1] or [S2] on the sides of the support column, and press the
button and the column rotation button simultaneously for operation at
reduced speed. To assign functions to the local function buttons or to
change assigned functions, contact your Toshiba service representative.

Local function buttons

CAUTION: When operating the CAS-930A using the column rotation buttons on
the sides of the support column, be extremely careful not to allow the
tube support unit to come into contact with persons or peripheral
equipment. Note that the tube support unit may sometimes be hidden
by the support column, making it difficult to observe movement of the
tube support unit; therefore, extra caution is required when performing
movement by holding down a column rotation button.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
193
■ C-arm rotation/C-arm sliding

CAS-830B CAS-930A

NOTE: 1. When anatomical angle control is selected, it is always possible to angulate

the C-arm with respect to the patient. It is not necessary to change the
operating procedures depending on the C-arm position.
To perform operations under the anatomical angle control, press the
Anatomical angle control selection button and confirm that this button lights
in step <1> of the above operating procedures.

2. C-arm sliding of the CAS-930A is performed by a combination of sliding of

the C-arm itself and sliding of the support column. When C-arm sliding is
performed, sliding of the C-arm itself is performed to the end of its stroke and
then stopped, after which sliding of the support column starts immediately.
Support column sliding extends the range of C-arm sliding. It is not
necessary for the user to be concerned whether C-arm sliding is performed
by sliding of the C-arm itself or by sliding of the support column.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
194
■ FPD near/away movement

There are two methods for performing FPD near/away movement: remote
control and local control.

CAS-830B CAS-930A

(1) Remote control

(2) Local control

Up : Press the switch marked .
Down : Press the switch marked .

CAS-830B

Up : Press the switch marked .

Down : Press the switch marked .

CAS-930A

No. 2B308-200EN*E
195
■ Manual operation for FPD rotation

The FPD can be rotated in the desired direction. The X-ray beam limiting
device is automatically rotated to match FPD rotation.

Note, however, that in normal operation the FPD is rotated automatically to

ensure the FPD set angle related to the patient. Therefore, the image
displayed on the monitor is not rotated, regardless of the C-arm angle setting
relative to the patient.

If the FPD used in combination is the 12  16-inch FPD, the FPD set position
can also be changed.

(1) Manual operation for FPD rotation

<1> Turn the lever to the left or right.

<2> To return to the initial angle, press down on the lever.

(2) Switching the set position of the 12  16-inch FPD

The set position of the FPD can be switched between portrait or landscape.

Portrait Position where the longer sides of the FPD are parallel
to the patient axis
Landscape Position where the shorter sides of the FPD are parallel
to the patient axis

<1> Press the lever for 1 second or more.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
196
■ Rotation and opening closing of compensation filters

In order to compensate for significant differences in X-ray density, apply

compensation filters over areas where the X-ray absorption factor is low.
The type of compensation filter differs according to the system, as shown in
the table below.

 CC-i Child/adult dual-purpose filters (two)

 VC-i Circular/straight dual-purpose filters (two)
Central compensation filter (one)

<1> The left, right, and central compensation filters can be opened/closed or
rotated independently.

(a) Opening/Closing : Tilt the lever laterally.

(b) Rotation : Tilt the lever vertically.

NOTE: 1. The left and right compensation filters can be used for two different purposes
by interchanging their positions. For the interchanging the positions of the
left and right compensation filters, refer to subsection 11.6.9 "Function
setting".

2. The compensation filters can also be opened/closed or rotated using the

compensation filter operating levers on the main console. Note that the
central compensation filter operating lever is at a different position.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
197
■ Opening/closing the blades of the X-ray beam limiting device (setting the
X-ray exposure field)
Normally, the X-ray beam limiting device blades are opened/closed
automatically by the auto collimation function, resulting in the X-ray exposure
field being set automatically. This subsection describes the manual
operation method.

<1> Use the X-ray exposure field adjustment lever to open/close the blades of
the X-ray beam limiting device.

(a) Adjustment in the lateral direction : Tilt the lever left/right.

(b) Adjustment in the vertical direction : Tilt the lever toward you/away from
you.

NOTE: 1. The X-ray exposure field can also be adjusted using the X-ray exposure field
adjustment lever on the main console.

2. If the X-ray beam limiting device blades are operated manually, the auto
collimation function is automatically set to OFF. When the X-ray exposure
field size is adjusted to the FPD size by manual operation, manual operation
mode is automatically switched to auto-collimation mode.

3. If the beam limiting device blades cannot be operated, press the emergency
stop button followed by the power reset button to release the error. For
details of the procedures and the locations of the emergency stop button and
the power reset button, refer to subsection 5.1 "Emergency Stop".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
198
■ Changing the FOV size

The fluoroscopic (radiographic) image size can be magnified or reduced by

changing the FOV size.

<1> To change the size, use the FOV size selection button.

(a) To magnify the image (to reduce the FOV size)

Press the "+" mark on the button.

(b) To reduce the image (to increase the FOV size)

Press the "-" mark on the button.

NOTE: 1. The FOV size selection button on the main console can also be used to
adjust the FOV size.

2. When the live zoom magnification ratio is set to 1.0, if operation is attempted
to further reduce the minimum FOV size, the live zoom magnification ratio is
switched by two steps and the image is magnified by two steps. Note that
the FOV value is calculated using the FOV size and the magnification ratio
for live zoom at that time and displayed on the monitor (*1).

Example: 8-inch FPD

FOV switch 20 cm  17 cm  15 cm  12 cm  12 cm  12 cm 
(8 inches) (7 inches) (6 inches) (5 inches) (5 inches) (5 inches)
Magnification 1.0  1.0  1.0  1.0  1.2 (*2) 1.4 (*2)
ratio for live (automatically (automatically
zoom switched) switched)
FOV display 20 cm 17 cm 15 cm 12 cm 10 cm (*3) 9 cm (*3)
(8 inches) (7 inches) (6 inches) (5 inches) (4.2 inches) (3.6 inches)

Return

*1) On the Acquisition tab on the system monitor, the FOV size and the
magnification ratio for live zoom are displayed separately.
*2) For systems with the 12-inch FPD or 12  16-inch FPD, the magnification
ratio is switched to 1.4 and 1.8, in that order.
*3) The information transferred to DICOM is the actual FOV size.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
199
■ Mounting/removing the X-ray grid

The X-ray grid can be mounted or removed as required.

CAUTION: 1. Do not allow liquid such as water or an object such as a pin or clip to
enter the X-ray grid insertion port. Doing so may result in a fire,
electric shock, or malfunction of the unit. In addition, the liquid or
object may appear on acquired images. If liquid or an object enters the
grid insertion port, contact your Toshiba service representative
immediately.

2. Confirm that the X-ray grid is securely mounted before starting the
examination. If the X-ray grid is not securely mounted, it may fall out,
causing personal injury.

3. Be sure to insert the X-ray grid horizontally. If the grid is inserted at an

angle, the touch sensor may be actuated or the FPD may be moved.

4. For 3D-DSA, 3D-DA, 3D-LD, or LCI, the X-ray grid must be used if it was
used during image acquisition for calibration and must not be used if it
was not used. Otherwise, errors or artifacts may occur in the 3D
reconstruction results (3D image).

5. Handle the X-ray grid with extreme care. If the X-ray grid is scratched
or deformed, both fluoroscopic and radiographic images may be
affected. Pay particular attention to the following points.

 Do not subject the X-ray grid to physical shock. Be extremely careful

not to allow the X-ray grid to fall when mounting it or removing it.
 Do not place any objects on the X-ray grid.
 Do not allow liquid or contrast medium to come in contact with the
X-ray grid. If there is any liquid or contrast medium on the grid,
immediately wipe it off with a clean soft cloth.

(1) Checking whether the X-ray grid is mounted

Whether the X-ray grid is mounted can be checked in the grid mounting
confirmation window.

 When the window is white () : The X-ray grid is mounted properly.
 When the window is black () : The X-ray grid is not mounted properly or is
not used.

(2) Mounting the X-ray grid

<1> Insert the X-ray grid into the grid insertion port. The grid must be inserted in
the direction indicated by the arrow labels on it (refer to the figure below).

<2> Push the X-ray grid horizontally.

<3> Confirm that the grid mounting confirmation window is white (). If it is
black (), the X-ray grid is not mounted properly. Push the X-ray grid all the
way into the grid insertion port.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
200
(3) Removing the X-ray grid
<1> Press the grid eject button.

<2> Pull out the X-ray grid horizontally from the grid insertion port, taking care not
to drop it.

Mounting/removal of the grid for the CAS-830B

Mounting/removal of the grid for the CAS-930A

No. 2B308-200EN*E
201
9.2 Operating Procedures for the Catheterization Table

CAUTION: Confirm that there are no objects that may interfere with the tabletop
within the movement range of the tabletop. Note that the lower section
of the tabletop is obstructed from view.

 Operating procedures for the CAT-850B/860B

 Operating procedures for the CAT-880B

No. 2B308-200EN*E
202
■ Operating procedures for the CAT-850B/860B

(1) Tabletop vertical movement

CAUTION: 1. If the sound of braking is heard frequently when stopping vertical movement
of the tabletop of the catheterization table, contact your Toshiba
representative for adjustment. The stop position may have shifted (for
example, due to the abrasion of parts), actuating automatic braking.
Note, however, that it is not abnormal to hear the sound of braking when the
power is turned OFF.

2. For systems used in combination with the CAS-930A, the tabletop vertical
movement control function can be assigned to local function buttons [S1]
and [S2] on the sides of the support column of the CAS-930A or to local
function buttons [F1] and [F2] on the sides of the FPD. The local function
buttons are deadman buttons. The tabletop moves while the button is held
down and stops moving when the button is released.

Note that when the C-arm angle is 15 or larger, tabletop vertical movement
cannot be performed using local function buttons [F1] and [F2] on the sides
of the FPD.

To assign functions to the local function buttons or to change assigned

functions, contact your Toshiba service representative.

Local function buttons on the Local function buttons on the

sides of the support column sides of the FPD

No. 2B308-200EN*E
203
 (2) Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement
<1> Select the sliding direction of the tabletop.

The tabletop can be slid in both the longitudinal and lateral directions. To
restrict sliding to the lateral direction, set the tabletop lateral movement lock
button to ON (lit).

<2> Slide the tabletop.

Push the tabletop while holding down the tabletop longitudinal/lateral brake
release lever.
To lock the tabletop, stop the tabletop and then release the tabletop
longitudinal/lateral brake release lever.

Tabletop longitudinal/lateral
brake release lever

NOTE: Tabletop longitudinal/lateral movement can be performed using the tabletop

control switch (option).
Press and hold down the tabletop control switch and push the tabletop in the
desired movement direction. The tabletop brake is released while the
tabletop control switch is held down, enabling the tabletop to move freely.
To engage the tabletop brake, release the tabletop control switch after the
tabletop is stopped.

Tabletop control switch

No. 2B308-200EN*E
204
 (3) Tabletop rotation

CAUTION: Do not touch the tabletop control switch (option) when the tabletop is
being rotated. If the tabletop control switch is pressed unintentionally,
the tabletop will slide in the longitudinal and lateral directions when the
tabletop is rotated, possibly causing an accident.

Tabletop control switch

<1> If tabletop rotation is locked, release tabletop rotation (CAT-850B). Pull out
the tabletop locking shaft on the side of the table until the rotation release
indicator (red) is visible.

<2> Release the tabletop rotation brake.

Press the tabletop rotation brake release button . The button lights and
the tabletop rotation brake is released.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
205
 <3> Rotate the tabletop.

Push the tabletop slowly. The tabletop rotation center position display
lights when the tabletop is rotated to the 0° or 180° position. Stop the
tabletop at the desired position.

After the tabletop has come to a complete stop, press the tabletop rotation
brake release button (the button is lit). The brake operates to secure
the tabletop (the button goes out).
Note that when a period of 10 seconds elapses after the brake is released,
the brake is automatically actuated and the tabletop is immobilized.

<4> Secure the tabletop.

To secure the tabletop, stop the tabletop and then press the tabletop rotation
brake release button . The button goes out.

Note that when a period of 10 seconds elapses after the brake is released,
the brake is automatically actuated and the tabletop is immobilized.

<5> Tabletop rotation can be securely locked at the 0 position using the tabletop
locking shaft (CAT-850B). When it is necessary to prevent unexpected
tabletop rotation, such as during patient transfer, push the tabletop locking
shaft into the table until the rotation release indicator (red) is not visible.

NOTE: The tabletop locking shaft cannot be pushed when the tabletop is not at the
0 position. Be sure to set the tabletop at the 0 position.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
206
 Operating procedures for the CAT-880B

WARNING: When the catheterization table is being tilted, always visually confirm
that the tilting direction is correct. If incorrect operation is performed
and the tabletop tilts in the wrong direction, the patient may fall off the
tabletop.

CAUTION: 1. Confirm that there are no objects that may interfere with the tabletop
within the movement range of the tabletop. Pay particular attention to
the area under the tabletop because it is a blind spot.

2. If tabletop lateral movement cannot be performed manually, check

whether the tabletop tilt angle is set to a value other than 0. Set the
tabletop tilt angle to 0 and then retry.
Even if the tabletop tilt angle is set to 0 when the system power is
turned OFF, the tilt angle of the tabletop may shift under its own weight
and therefore not be set to 0 when the system power is turned ON the
next time.

NOTE: For the tabletop movement directions and locations of the switches on the
tabletop operating box, refer to subsection 4.8.2 "Catheterization table
(CAT-880B)".

(1) Tabletop up/down movement

While the tabletop up movement touch switch is pressed, the tabletop moves
upward until it reaches the upper limit. While the tabletop down movement
touch switch is pressed, the tabletop moves downward until it reaches the
lower limit.

(2) Tabletop longitudinal movement

The operating procedure for tabletop longitudinal movement differs
depending on the tabletop tilt angle.

(2.1) When the tabletop is in the horizontal position (manual operation)

Move the tabletop manually. If tabletop longitudinal movement is locked and

manual operation is not possible, release the lock referring to step (2.3)
"Locking tabletop longitudinal movement".

<1> Press the tabletop lateral movement lock button of the tabletop operating
box and confirm that the button lights.

<2> Hold down the tabletop operating knob of the tabletop operating box and
manually move the tabletop in the desired direction.

NOTE: When the tabletop is in the horizontal position, it is also possible to move the
tabletop in the longitudinal and lateral directions at the same time. For the
operating procedure, refer to step (3) "Tabletop lateral movement".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
207
 (2.2) When the tabletop is not in the horizontal position (motor-driven
movement)

While the tabletop forward movement button is held down, the tabletop
moves forward until it reaches the forward limit. While the tabletop backward
movement button is held down, the tabletop moves backward until it reaches
the backward limit.

(2.3) Locking tabletop longitudinal movement (locking manual operation)

When the tabletop is in the horizontal position, it is possible to lock tabletop

longitudinal movement (manual operation). Press the tabletop forward and
backward movement buttons simultaneously to lock tabletop longitudinal
movement. Pressing these buttons simultaneously again releases the
tabletop longitudinal movement lock. These buttons blink while tabletop
longitudinal movement is locked.

(3) Tabletop lateral movement

Tabletop lateral movement can be performed manually. If the tabletop is in
the horizontal position, tabletop longitudinal movement can also be
performed. To fix the tabletop longitudinal movement position, refer to step
(2.3) "Locking tabletop longitudinal movement".

<1> Press the tabletop lateral movement lock button of the tabletop operating
box and confirm that the button goes out.

<2> Hold down the tabletop operating knob of the tabletop operating box and
manually move the tabletop in the desired direction.

(4) Tabletop rotation

CAUTION: When rotating the tabletop of the catheterization table CAT-880B, pay
attention to the following points.

(a) Be sure not to touch the tabletop operating knob while the tabletop is
rotating. If the operating knob is pressed during tabletop rotation,
there is a risk of the tabletop moving in the longitudinal and/or lateral
directions while it is rotating.

(b) When the tabletop is rotated, the column base section is rotated
together with it. Be careful not to let your feet be caught between the
column base cover and the floor.

<1> Press the tabletop rotation brake release button of the tabletop operating box
and confirm that the button lights, indicating that the tabletop rotation brake
is released.

<2> Slowly rotate the tabletop. When the tabletop is at the 0 position, the
tabletop rotation center position display lights. To lock the tabletop at the
desired angle, rotate the tabletop to the desired angle and press the tabletop
rotation brake release button. Confirm that the button goes out, indicating
that the tabletop rotation brake is engaged.

Note that if tabletop rotation is not performed within 10 seconds after the
tabletop rotation brake release button is pressed, the tabletop rotation brake
is engaged automatically.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
208
 (5) Tabletop longitudinal tilting
There are two tabletop longitudinal tilting modes: independent longitudinal
tilting mode and harmonic tilting mode.

NOTE: When the tabletop rotation brake is released, tabletop longitudinal tilting
cannot be performed. Before performing tilting, confirm that tabletop rotation
is locked.

(5.1) Independent longitudinal tilting

Independent longitudinal tilting is the standard tabletop tilting mode in which

the tabletop is moved in the longitudinal tilting direction only.
<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<2> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:

 Tabletop end up : Press the tabletop end up button.

 Tabletop end down : Press the tabletop end down button.

(5.2) Harmonic tilting

In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop is tilted while maintaining the position
of the ROI.

<1> Switch to harmonic tilting mode by pressing both the tabletop end up and
down buttons at the same time and holding them down for more than one
second.
<2> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.
<3> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:

 Tabletop end up : Press the tabletop end up button.

 Tabletop end down : Press the tabletop end down button.

CAUTION: In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop is moved longitudinally and vertically
when longitudinal tilting is performed. Be careful to avoid contact between
the tabletop and peripheral equipment.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
209
NOTE: 1. To exit harmonic tilting mode, press both the tabletop end up and down
buttons at the same time and hold them down for more than one second.

2. In harmonic tilting mode, the tabletop tilt reset button on the operating box
blinks.

3. When the arm of the support unit is not positioned near the tabletop (i.e.,
only the catheterization table is in use), the axis of rotation for harmonic
tilting mode is set to a position 30 cm from the end of the tabletop. To
change the position of the axis of rotation, contact your Toshiba service
representative.

4. To modify the system so that harmonic tilting mode is automatically selected

when the system is turned ON, contact your Toshiba service representative.

5. Harmonic tilting cannot be performed in the following cases:

 The tabletop is at the stroke limit of longitudinal, vertical, or longitudinal

tilting movement.

 An error has occurred.

(6) Tabletop lateral tilting

NOTE: When the tabletop rotation brake is released, tabletop tilting cannot be
performed. Before performing tilting, confirm that tabletop rotation is locked.

<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.

<2> While holding down the release button, do one of the following:

 Tabletop left up : Press the tabletop left up button.

 Tabletop right up : Press the tabletop right up button.

(7) Resetting tabletop tilting

The following procedure can be used to easily return the tilted tabletop to the
horizontal position (longitudinal angle 0, lateral angle 0).

NOTE: When either the longitudinal or lateral angle is not 0, the tabletop tilt reset
button on the table operating box lights. When both angles are 0, the reset
button goes out.

<1> Hold down the tabletop tilt release button on the table operating box.

<2> While holding down the release button, hold down the reset button until the
tabletop returns to the horizontal position. When the tabletop is in the
horizontal position, the reset button goes out.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
210
9.3 Auto-Positioning
Multiple radiographic and fluoroscopic positions can be stored and recalled
for each study protocol.

(1) Positions that can be stored

The system position (support unit position (*1) and catheterization table
position (*2)) can be stored and reproduced. In addition, the compensation
filter position, SID, FOV, and magnification ratio for live zoom can also be
stored.

*1) The manually set rotation angle of the FPD cannot be stored.

*2) For systems with the CAT-880B used in combination, the tabletop lateral tilt
angle can also be stored.

(2) Types of auto-positioning reproduction methods

The following two types of auto-positioning reproduction methods are
available: all-axes reproduction and anatomical-angle reproduction.

(a) All-axes reproduction method

This method, which is the default setting, reproduces the stored system
positions.

(b) Anatomical-angle reproduction method

This method reproduces the stored anatomical angles (LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU).

The stored anatomical angles are reproduced regardless of the C-arm
insertion direction relative to the patient. Thus, if radiography is to be
performed at the same anatomical angle, it is not necessary to store the
corresponding system positions for each C-arm insertion position (floor-base
rotation angle, support column rotation angle).

This method is useful when it is necessary to vary the C-arm insertion

position according to the procedure but the anatomical angle must be
maintained.

 To switch from the all-axes reproduction method to the anatomical-angle

reproduction method, contact your Toshiba representative.
 Anatomical angles can be reproduced by using auto-positioning numbers
that can be set/changed.
 Anatomical angles cannot be reproduced if the support column rotation
angle is outside the range of +60° to -60°.
 For certain C-arm insertion directions relative to the patient, the stored angle
may not be reproduced.

CAUTION: When the anatomical-angle reproduction method is selected, start the

reproduction operation only after setting the C-arm to a position at
which radiography for the patient can be performed. If the C-arm is
located away from the patient, it may interfere with the patient,
operator, or peripheral units during movement to reproduce the set
position.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
211
 (3) Conditions and restrictions for auto-positioning
Auto-positioning operation is restricted depending on the system status and
the support unit position.

(3.1) A position cannot be reproduced in the following cases.

(a) The system is in Backup fluoroscopy mode.

(3.2) A position cannot be stored in the following cases.

(a) The system is in Backup fluoroscopy mode.

(b) The system is in the interlocked status.

(c) The C-arm support column rotation angle is not within the range of 60°.
However, it is possible to store the position when the C-arm support column
rotation angle is +90° or -90°.

(4) Auto-positioning No.

The positions can be stored by setting positioning Nos. and can be
reproduced by specifying desired auto-positioning Nos. The positions
corresponding to some positioning Nos. are fixed and cannot be changed.

NOTE: 1. Stored positions can be registered for each study protocol. Create the study
protocol in Utility mode, start the dummy study, and store the positions.

2. Reproduced position settings can be added or deleted for each positioning

No. For example, SID setting can be deleted or a new movement can be
added for a specific positioning No. To change a setting, contact your
Toshiba representative.
Note that changes may be restricted for some auto-positioning Nos.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
212
 No. Stored position Remarks
0  Support unit: LAO/RAO 0°  Reproduces the support unit
CRA/CAU 0° standard position.
SID 110 cm (*1)
 The position cannot be changed.
 The position can be reproduced
before starting a study.
*1) The SID shown on the left is
reproduced when both the
following conditions are
satisfied.
 The SID before reproduction is
shorter than that shown on the
left.
 Only C-arm rotation and C-arm
sliding are required for
reproduction.
1 to 37  Support unit: LAO/RAO 0°  Position stored at the time of
CRA/CAU 0° shipment from the factory.
SID 110 cm
 This position can be changed (*1).
 Catheterization table: Tabletop height 95 cm
 When the changed position is
stored, the corresponding
compensation filter position is also
stored.
 The position cannot be reproduced
before starting a study.
*1) It is not possible to store the
ceiling travel position
(longitudinal/lateral position) and
the support column rotation
angle position.
40 to 72  Support unit: LAO/RAO 0°  Position stored at the time of
(*1) CRA/CAU 0° shipment from the factory.
Ceiling longitudinal/lateral position 0 cm
Support column rotation angle 0°  This position can be changed.
SID 110 cm  When the changed position is
 Catheterization table: Tabletop height 95 cm stored, the corresponding
compensation filter position is also
stored.
 The position cannot be reproduced
before starting a study.
*1) When a 12  16-inch FPD is
used in combination, the
following positions are
reproduced when Nos. 50 and
51 are selected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
213
No. Stored position Remarks
50  Support unit: FPD rotation angle 0° (portrait) When a 12  16-inch FPD is used in
combination, the position indicated
on the left is reproduced when No.
50 is selected.
This setting cannot be changed.
51  Support unit: FPD rotation angle 90° (landscape) When a 12  16-inch FPD is used in
combination, the position indicated
on the left is reproduced when No.
51 is selected.
This setting cannot be changed.
73  Support unit: LAO/RAO 0°  Reproduces the C-arm position on
CRA/CAU 0° the patient left side (position when
Ceiling longitudinal/lateral position 0 cm the C-arm is set at the patient left
Support column rotation angle 90° side).
SID 110 cm (*1)
 The position cannot be changed.
 Catheterization table: Tabletop height 95 cm
*1) The SID shown on the left is
reproduced when both the
following conditions are
satisfied.
 The SID before reproduction is
shorter than that shown on the
left.
 Only C-arm rotation, C-arm
sliding, support column
rotation, and ceiling travel
operation are required for
reproducing the status.
74  Support unit: LAO/RAO 0°  Reproduces the C-arm position on
CRA/CAU 0° the patient right side (position
Ceiling longitudinal/lateral position 0 cm when the C-arm is set at the
Support column rotation angle -90° patient right side).
SID 110 cm (*1)  The position cannot be changed.
 Catheterization table: Tabletop height 95 cm *1) The SID shown on the left is
reproduced when both the
following conditions are
satisfied.
 The SID before reproduction is
shorter than that shown on the
left.
 Only C-arm rotation, C-arm
sliding, support column
rotation, and ceiling travel
operation are required for
reproducing the status.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
214
No. Stored position Remarks
75  Support unit: LAO/RAO 180°  Reproduces the C-arm longitudinal
CRA/CAU 0° head-end position (position when
Ceiling longitudinal/lateral position 0 cm the C-arm is set at the patient
Support column rotation angle 0° head end) with the AP status.
SID 90 cm
 The position cannot be changed.
 Catheterization table: Tabletop height 105 cm
76  Support unit: LAO/RAO 0°  Reproduces the C-arm longitudinal
CRA/CAU 0° head-end position (position when
Ceiling longitudinal/lateral position 0 cm the C-arm is set at the patient
Support column rotation angle 0° head end).
SID 110 cm (*1)  The position cannot be changed.
 Catheterization table: Tabletop height 95 cm *1) The SID shown on the left is
reproduced when both the
following conditions are
satisfied.
 The SID before reproduction is
shorter than that shown on the
left.
 Only C-arm rotation, C-arm
sliding, support column
rotation, and ceiling travel
operation are required for
reproducing the status.
77 Reproduces the retraction position of the support unit set at
the time of installation.
To change the retraction position, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
215
 (5) Storing a position

CAUTION: When registering auto-positioning positions, register the positions by

maintaining at least a 5 cm space between the system and the patient,
and between the units. If the positions are registered without at least a
5 cm space, interference may occur between the system and the
patient or between the units when auto-positioning is performed.

<1> Set the support unit and catheterization table to the position to be stored.

For the positions that can be stored, refer to (1) "Positions that can be
stored".

<2> Press the Auto-positioning selection button of the tableside console.

Confirm that the button lights.

<3> Enter a positioning No. using the function button.

For position Nos. 0 to 7, enter "0" first. For example, enter "0" and "3" to
enter position 3.

Positioning No. <4> The entered positioning No. and the position corresponding to the No. are
displayed in the image display area of the fluoroscopic monitor for 5 s.
Check whether the settings can be overwritten.
<5> To set the position data. Press the last digit of the entered auto-positioning
No. for 2 seconds or more. A confirmation sound is generated and the
position data is stored.

Positioning data display

No. 2B308-200EN*E
216
 (6) Reproducing the desired position
<1> Move all the peripheral units out of the operating range of the support unit
and the catheterization table.

Positioning No. <2> Enter the positioning No. with which the position to be reproduced is
managed. For the procedure for entering the positioning No., refer to steps
<2> and <3> of in (5) "Storing a position".

<3> The entered positioning No. and the position managed by the No. are
displayed in the Image display area of the fluoroscopic monitor. Confirm that
the displayed information is correct. To cancel reproduction, leave the
buttons untouched for at least 5 seconds or press the Override button.

<4> Start movement to the position to be reproduced.

Pull and hold the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-
positioning start button until the system moves to the position to be
reproduced. A confirmation sound is generated when the system is at the
Positioning data display correct position.

CAUTION: In systems that use the catheterization table CAT-880B, if the

catheterization table is tilted while a position is being reproduced,
interference may occur between the catheterization table and the
support unit. Operate the system extremely carefully.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
217
NOTE: 1. When auto-positioning involving reproduction of the catheterization tabletop
position is to be performed, inform the patient that the catheterization table
will move during reproduction of the tabletop position before starting auto-
positioning.

2. To interrupt auto-positioning, release the Arm/tabletop operation start lever.

To restart auto-positioning, pull and hold the Arm/tabletop operation start
lever within 5 s after the interruption.
Auto-positioning is resumed from the position where it was interrupted.

3. The magnification ratio for live zoom at the time the position was registered
is reproduced.

4. If a specific position cannot be reproduced by the position reproduction

operation, the position may be a position that cannot be registered to and
reproduced by the auto-positioning number. A position (arm movement) is
specified for the individual auto-positioning numbers. Other positions (arm
movements) cannot be registered to or reproduced by the auto-positioning
number. If it is desired to change the position setting, contact your Toshiba
service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
218
 9.4 Auto-Angle/Auto-Mapping Functions
The radiographic angle (RAO/LAO/CRA/CAU angle) and SID of the acquired
images are reproduced by the support unit (auto-angle). In addition,
acquired images at the closest angle to the current radiographic angle can
be replayed on the monitor (auto-mapping).

Note that to use the auto-mapping function, it must be assigned to one of the
Function buttons. For details, refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions
Using Function Buttons" of the reference manual.

(1) Reproducing the desired radiographic angle (auto-angle

function)
<1> Move all peripheral units out of the operating range of the support unit.

<2> Play back images. (Refer to section 12 "Image Playback".)

For dynamic images, stop playing back the images.

<3> Press the Auto angle button of the Function buttons.

Radiographic angle <4> The radiographic angle to be reproduced is displayed on the monitor. Check
display the angle.

<5> Pull the Arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning
start button until the radiographic angle to be reproduced is set. A
confirmation sound is generated when the system is at the correct position.

CAUTION: Before attempting to reproduce the auto-angle, make sure that the
support unit arm is set to a position where radiography can be
performed.
Movement for reproducing the angle is started at the current position,
even if the arm is away from the patient, and contact with persons or
peripheral units may result.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
219
NOTE: 1. To interrupt auto-mapping, release the Arm/tabletop operation start lever or
the auto-positioning start button. To restart auto-mapping, pull and hold the
Arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning start
button within 5 s after the interruption.
Auto-mapping is resumed from the position where it was interrupted.

2. The auto-angle function is disabled for images without radiographic angle

information. Even when the Auto angle button is pressed after selecting
such an image, the radiographic angle information is not displayed on the
monitor.

3. The support unit radiographic angle reproduced using the auto-angle

function may include an error of ±1° relative to the original data.

4. If the image includes position information that cannot be reproduced by the

support unit to be auto-angled, the position is not reproduced.
If a non-reproducible FOV is included in the image, however, the
reproducible FOV closest to that FOV is reproduced automatically.

5. Auto-angle can be performed using images acquired by systems other than

Infinix-i systems.
At this time, only the C-arm rotation angle and slide angle
(CRA/CAU/LAO/RAO) can be reproduced.

6. If the C-arm support unit is not at the set position (support column rotation
angle 0), the radiographic position cannot be reproduced.

7. The positions that can be reproduced using the auto-angle function can be
changed.
To change the settings, contact your Toshiba representative.
At the time of shipment from the factory, the LAO/RAO, CRA/CAU, SID, and
FOV have been registered as positions that can be reproduced.

Positions that can be reproduced

Changeable positions SID/FOV (image field size *1)/tabletop height of the
catheterization table/compensation filter position
Unchangeable positions LAO/RAO/ceiling longitudinal position/ceiling lateral
movement position

*1) Live zoom is not included.

8. If images that have undergone top/bottom inversion or left/right inversion at

the 3D workstation are transferred to the Infinix-i system, the viewing
directions for the fluoroscopic/radiographic images and the transferred 3D
images may differ from each other.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
220
NOTE: 9. In systems supporting 3D reconstruction (*1), auto-angling using 3D
reconstruction images is possible (the viewing angle of the 3D reconstruction
image is reproduced by the support unit).

(1) Display a 3D reconstruction image on the monitor of the Angio workstation

monitor and set the viewing angle of the 3D reconstruction image. For the
operating procedure, refer to the operation manual for the combined option
(*1).

(2) Click the [3D Auto Angle] button in the menu on the reference monitor.

(3) The display angle of the 3D reconstruction image is displayed on the monitor
as the radiographic angle to be reproduced. Confirm the displayed value.

(4) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever or hold down the auto-positioning
start button until reproduction of the radiographic angle is completed. A
confirmation sound is generated when position reproduction is completed.

*1) System combined with the Angio workstation

10. In auto-angling using a 3D reconstruction image, the position may not be

reproduced correctly if a 3D reconstruction image that was created using the
following types of images is used.

 Past image

 Image acquired using a system other than Infinix-i

11. In auto-angling using a 3D reconstruction image, support unit movement

may be limited by various conditions and may not reach the position to be
reproduced.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
221
NOTE: 12. In Infinix-i systems combined with the 3D roadmap kit (XIDF-3DP802 or
XIDF-3DP802/A1), the Path Direction function and Path Navigation function
of the 3D roadmap application can be selected and executed on the system
using the procedure below. Refer to the operation manual for the 3D
roadmap kit for details of the Path Direction function and Path Navigation
function.

(1) Draw a path line on the MPR image and click the [3DRM On/Off] button.
Refer to the operation manual for the 3D roadmap kit for details of the
operating procedure.

(2) Click the [Path Direction] button in the menu on the reference monitor. The
3D reconstruction image corresponding to the path line as viewed directly
from the top is displayed on the monitor.

(3) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console. It is not
necessary to select [3D Auto Angle].
The arm of the support unit moves to the position where the path line is
viewed from the input (puncture) direction.

(4) Start fluoroscopy and confirm the path line input (puncture) position.

(5) Click the [Path Navigation] button in the menu on the reference monitor. The
3D reconstruction image corresponding to the path line as viewed directly
from the side is displayed on the monitor.

(6) Pull the arm/tabletop operation start lever on the tableside console. It is not
necessary to select [3D Auto Angle].
The arm of the support unit moves to the position where the path line is
viewed from the input (puncture) direction.

(7) Repeat steps (2) to (6) as many times as required to confirm the position,
angle, and depth of the device.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
222
 (2) Replaying the image closest to the current radiographic
angle (auto-mapping function)
Among the acquired images, the image with the closest radiographic angle
to the current radiographic angle (RAO/LAO/CRA/CAU angle) is retrieved
and displayed on the reference monitor.

The image is retrieved in the following order.

Map image (Map)  Dynamic image (Run (including one-shot) 

Fluoroscopic image acquisition (F-Rec)

<1> Press the Auto-mapping image button of the Function buttons or the

Auto Map button (the Tool tab) in Exam mode on the system monitor.
The retrieved image is displayed on the reference monitor.

NOTE: 1. If the Auto-mapping image button is pressed again before changing the
radiographic angle, the image with the second closest radiographic angle to
the current radiographic angle is displayed.

2. If there are several images acquired with the same angle, the latest image is
displayed. Each time the Auto-mapping image button is pressed, the image
will be switched to the next most-recent image.

3. The permissible range for radiographic angle retrieval can be set. The
default setting is 5°.
If this setting needs to be changed, contact your Toshiba representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
223
9.5 Auto Set (Systems with the CAS-930A)
If functions that reproduce specified positions of the tube support unit (refer
to the table below) are assigned to the local function buttons on the sides of
the support column of the CAS-930A or the sides of the FPD, the positions
that were assigned can be reproduced (Auto Set) using the corresponding
local function buttons.

Local function buttons on the Local function buttons on

sides of the support column the sides of the FPD

(1) Assigning the Auto Set function

Any of the following functions can be assigned to the local function buttons.
For details of the support unit set positions, refer to "Names of the support
unit set positions" in subsection 9.1.

To assign functions to the local function buttons or to change the function

assignments, contact your Toshiba service representative.

S1/S2 buttons
F1/F2 buttons on
on the sides of
Assignable functions the sides of the
the support
FPD
column
Reproduction of the C-arm standard status  
Reproduction of the C-arm park position  
Reproduction of the standard status of the  
C-arm set at the head end
Reproduction of the standard status of the  
C-arm set at the patient left side
Switching of the FPD between the  
landscape and portrait orientations

(2) Position reproduction (Auto Set)

<1> Move peripheral devices outside the movement range of the support unit.

<2> Hold down the set button to which the function to be performed is assigned.
To stop operation, release the button. Holding down the button again
resumes operation.

<3> When position reproduction is completed and system operation stops,

release the button.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
224
9.6 Route Run (for systems in which the CAS-930A is used)
The tube support unit (CAS-930A) can be moved to the target position along
a preset route. If there are columns or other obstacles such as permanently
installed equipment in the room, the tube support unit can be moved safely
to the set position by presetting a route that avoids such obstacles. To
perform Route Run, it is necessary to assign the Route Run function to local
function button [S1] or [S2] on the sides of the support column.

(1) Route setting

A route is created by connecting up to 10 points (positions) using straight
lines. The tube support unit positions such as the column rotation angle and
C-arm slide angle can be stored for each point. By angling the tube support
unit appropriately, permanently installed equipment can be avoided. Up to
two routes can be set.

Route setting is performed by service personnel at the time of installation.

If it becomes necessary to change a route, contact your Toshiba service

representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
225
 (2) Execution of Route Run
<1> Confirm that there are no objects that can come into contact with the tube
support unit along the route.

<2> Start Route Run.

Operate local function button [S1] or [S2], whichever is appropriate, on the

sides of the support column. Be sure to press the button to which the
desired route is assigned.

Local function buttons on the sides of the support column

The tube support unit moves along the registered route while the button is
held down. To stop the tube support unit, release the local function button.
When the button is pressed again, the tube support unit resumes Route Run.

Each time the tube support unit reaches a set point, a sound indicating that
the point has been reached is output.

<3> When the tube support unit reaches the final point, it stops automatically and
a sound indicating that the final point has been reached is output. Release
the local function button.

CAUTION: When starting Route Run, be extremely careful not to allow the tube
support unit to come into contact with persons or peripheral
equipment. Note that the tube support unit may sometimes be hidden
by the support column, making it difficult to observe movement of the
tube support unit; therefore, extra caution is required when performing
movement by holding down a local function button.

CAUTION: If permanently installed equipment has been relocated to a position along

the route registered in Route Run, do not use Route Run. The tube support
unit may hit the equipment, and the tube support unit and the equipment
may be damaged.

If permanently installed equipment is relocated, request your Toshiba service

representative to change the route.

NOTE: At the start of Route Run, the tube support unit first moves straight to the
point nearest the current position. Therefore, depending on the position of
the tube support unit when Route Run is started, the tube support unit may
move outside the preset route. As a safety measure in such cases, the tube
support unit movement speed is reduced to 50% of the standard Route Run
speed.

If there is an obstacle in the preset route, release the local function button to
stop the tube support unit before it reaches the obstacle. Then, move the
tube support unit around the obstacle by manual operation. After the tube
support unit is moved to a safe position, press the local function button again
to resume Route Run. Note that in this case also, the tube support unit first
moves from the current position to the nearest point in the route.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
226
9.7 Operating the Large Screen Monitor (Option)
The large screen monitor allows multiple images to be displayed at the same
time. The display layout can be changed according to the type of
examination (diagnosis, interventional procedure, etc.).

(1) Turning the power ON/OFF

(1.1) Turning ON the power

Turn ON the power of the Infinix system. The power of the large screen
monitor is turned ON.

(1.2) Turning OFF the power

Turn OFF the power of the Infinix system. The power of the large screen
monitor is turned OFF.

(2) Selecting the display layout

Select the desired display layout of the large-screen monitor on the touch
panel of the console.

(3) Operating procedure for the backup monitor

If the large-screen monitor malfunctions during an examination, use the
backup monitor installed behind the large-screen monitor. Operate the
monitor suspension to set the backup monitor so that it faces the front.

Note that the information to be displayed on the reference monitor is not

displayed on the backup monitor. Restrictions may apply for some
examinations. After the examination is completed, immediately contact your
Toshiba service representative for inspection.

NOTE: 1. It is recommended that an image resolution of 1280  1024 pixels be used

for diagnosis.

2. It is possible to select the display layout using the system console, tableside
console, main console, or satellite console. For details, refer to the
reference manual.

3. The backup monitor is used as a backup in case of failure of the large-

screen monitor. It is installed behind the large-screen monitor and is not
normally used.

4. The data to be displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor is displayed on the

backup monitor (for biplane systems, the data for the fluoroscopic monitor for
the frontal system or the lateral system is displayed).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
227
9.8 Operating the Monitor Integration System (Option)
The monitor integration system allows the displays of multiple monitors in the
control room to be shown simultaneously on a single integrated monitor.
The system monitor display of the Infinix-i system (system console) and
multiple computer displays installed in the control room can be displayed on
the monitor integration system.

Operations which are available on the system monitor and other monitors
can be performed on the monitor integration system using the keyboard and
the mouse for the Infinix-i system.

CAUTION: The keyboard language of the monitor integration system has been set. If a
different language is set in the PC, characters cannot be input correctly to
the PC by standard key operation. Be careful when inputting characters.
After inputting characters, confirm them and correct them if necessary.

NOTE: 1. When the monitor integration system is used in combination, the system
monitor is not included in the configuration of the Infinix-i system. If the
system monitor is required, contact your Toshiba service representative.
If the system monitor is used, the display of the system monitor cannot be
displayed on the integrated monitor.

2. When the system monitor is not used, the power ON switch box of the
Infinix-i system is mounted to the side of the integrated monitor.

3. The power of the monitor integration system is automatically turned OFF

when the power of the Infinix-i system is turned OFF. As a result, operation
of the integrated computers may be disabled. In this case, turn ON the
power of the Infinix-i system.

4. If the monitor integration system malfunctions, operation of the integrated

computers may be disabled. In this case, disconnect the computers from the
monitor integration system and connect a computer monitor, keyboard, and
mouse to each computer.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
228
(1) Turning the Power ON/OFF
The procedure for turning ON/OFF the power of the monitor integration
system is described.

(1.1) Turning the power ON

Turn ON the power of the Infinix-i system. The power of the monitor
integration system is turned ON.

(1.2) Turning the power OFF

Turn OFF the power of the Infinix-i system. The power of the monitor
integration system is turned OFF.

(2) Selecting the display layout

The procedure for changing the display layout of the screen is described.

(a) Move the mouse cursor to the left of the integrated monitor. The layout
selection list is displayed.

(b) Select the desired display layout in the list. The screen display changes to
the selected layout.

(c) The display position of the image can be changed. Drag and drop the image
to be changed.

(3) Selecting the target display for operation

Of the multiple displays, the target display for operation is selected and
operation is performed on the selected display using the keyboard and
mouse of the Infinix-i system. Before the target display is selected, the
mouse cursor can be moved freely on the monitor. Once the target display
for operation is selected, the mouse cursor is moved within the selected
display. To change the target display, cancel the display selection and then
select the target display.

(a) Place the mouse cursor on the target display for operation and double-click
the mouse. Operation on the selected display becomes possible using the
keyboard and the mouse of the Infinix-i system.

(b) To clear display selection, press the [Alt] key and the space key
simultaneously on the keyboard (*1).

*1) If the selection cancellation function is assigned to other keys, use the
corresponding keys for clearing selection. To change key assignment for
clearing selection, contact your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
229
No. 2B308-200EN*E
230
10. Study Appointment
Study appointment is made in Patient mode before starting the study.
Operation concerning start and finish of the study is also performed in this
mode.

Contents 10.1 Patient Mode Selection

10.2 Appointment for a New Study
10.3 Start Study
10.4 Finish Study
10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance
10.6 Repeat Study Appointment
10.7 Image Link
10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment
10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS
10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS
10.11 RDS/RDSR Transfer

No. 2B308-200EN*E
231
10.1 Patient Mode Selection
<1> Click the Patient tab and select Patient mode.

[Study list display area]

The study list is displayed here. Select the corresponding study in this list. It
is possible to specify the search conditions and search the corresponding
patients.

A mark displayed next to the list indicates the status of the study.

Study is completed.

Study is in progress.

(None) Study has not been performed.

[Study information/patient information input area]

Patient information and study information are entered at the time of study
appointment.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
232
10.2 Appointment for a New Study
A study appointment is made for a new patient.

Refer to subsection 10.6 "Repeat Study Appointment" if the patient has a

study history.

<1> Enter the patient information and the study information in the Patient Info
tab. Enter the information in the Other Info tab, as required.

To clear all the entries, click the Clear button.

<2> Register the study appointment.

Reconfirm the entries and click the Register button.

If a dialog indicating that some input items have been skipped is displayed,
enter the data to those items and click the Register button again.

NOTE: 1. This system identifies the patient based on 4 items: Patient Name, Sex, Date
of Birth, and Patient ID.

The Patient ID can be used to identify the desired patient even if several
patients have the same Patient Name, Sex, and Date of Birth.
If the entered patient ID is the same as an existing patient ID, the
appointment is handled as appointment information for the existing patient,
and the 4 items become identical to those of the existing patient.

2. For the following ID/Nos., perform entry in single-byte English characters or

numbers according to the rules used at the hospital.

 Patient ID : The patient ID assigned to an individual patient.

 Accession No. : Enter the accession No.

3. It is possible to change the input items for the patient information. For
details, see the reference manual.

4. Study Date can be selected using the calendar displayed by clicking the
button next to the Study Date input area.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
233
10.3 Start Study
(1) Selecting the scheduled study
<1> Select "Scheduled Studies" in the Study Status list box.

<2> Click the target study in the study list display area.

(2) Starting the study

<1> Confirm that the study information and the patient information displayed in
the study/patient information input area corresponds to the patient to be
examined.

<2> Click the Start button.

Switch to the Acquisition tab and start the study.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
234
CAUTION: Before starting the first study of the day or before resuming a study
when several hours has elapsed after the system power was turned
OFF, turn the system power ON and then wait at least 30 minutes.
If a study is started before sufficient time has elapsed after turning ON
the power, artifacts may occur on images, possibly resulting in
incorrect diagnosis. If any artifacts occur, wait until the artifacts
disappear before starting the study.

NOTE: 1. It is also possible to start a study without registering an appointment (without

pressing the Registration button).
Enter the required information items for New Study Appointment or Repeat
Study Appointment, and then click the Start button.

2. Depending on the conditions, FPD calibration may be started automatically

when the Start Study operation is performed.
Once FPD calibration is started, neither fluoroscopy nor radiography can be
performed until the calibration is completed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
235
10.4 Finish Study
When a study is completed, be sure to perform the study completion process
(Finish Study). If this process is not performed, the next study cannot be
started.

<1> Confirm that the patient has left the examination room.

<2> Click the Finish button.

CAUTION: 1. Once Finish Study is executed, examination (fluoroscopy or

radiography) can no longer be performed for the study. For a patient
whose condition might undergo a sudden change, do not select Finish
Study until the patient leaves the examination room.
Refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study ("Start Study")
From the Examination Room" for the procedure for starting an
examination for a patient whose condition has changed suddenly,
making immediate reexamination necessary after Finish Study is
executed.

2. Be sure to perform Finish Study operation before starting the next

study. If the next study is started without performing Finish Study
operation, the acquired data is recognized as a part of the previous
study, leading to incorrect diagnosis.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
236
NOTE: 1. The acquired data sets are transferred to Review mode automatically when
Finish Study is executed (*1).

*1) It is possible to change the setting for not transferring the acquired datasets
automatically. If it is desired to change the setting, contact your Toshiba
service representative.

2. The study protocols can be configured so that the following functions are
executed automatically when Finish Study operation is performed. Refer to
the reference manual for the detailed procedure.

 Data transfer and archiving to CD-R or DVD±R

 Data transfer to the network server
 Photo image printing

These functions are not executed if the system power is turned OFF without
performing Finish Study operation or if a study is started using the urgent
case function. In such cases, perform archiving and transfer manually.

3. The map deletion confirmation message is displayed even when the map
image has already been saved.

4. When the system is set to transfer the data manually to the HIS/RIS server,
it is possible to display the MPPS dialog box automatically when Finish
Study operation is performed. For the setting procedure, see the reference
manual.

5. If the system is set to archive data automatically when Finish Study

operation is performed, Finish Study can be executed even if the archive
destination is not ready. In this case, a dialog box checking what action
should be taken is displayed. Note that, depending on the size of the data to
be archived, there may be a delay before this dialog box is displayed.

6. When the RDS transfer function is selected, the dose data can be
transferred to the specified server on termination of the examination. For
details, refer to subsection 10.11 "RDS/RDSR Transfer".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
237
10.5 Urgent Patient Acceptance
If there is no time to enter the patient information during in emergencies or
other situations, an information ID is automatically issued by the system to
permit the study to be performed.

There are two acceptance methods: normal acceptance and simplified

acceptance.

In situations of great urgency, it is recommended that simplified acceptance

be used.

CAUTION: Any mismatch in the patient information may result in incorrect

diagnosis.
Be sure to correct the urgent patient information after completing the
study.
To correct the data after the study, use the editing functions for image-
related information in Directory mode.

10.5.1 Normal registration

<1> Click the Emergency ID button.

An urgent patient ID is automatically issued and displayed in the area for

urgent patient information entry.

<2> Select the study protocol from the Study Protocol list box.

<3> Click the Start button to start the study.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
238
NOTE: 1. The automatically issued ID for the urgent patient includes the following
items.

 Patient Name (Last Name)  Patient ID

 Sex  Date of Birth
 Study Date

2. An urgent patient study can be registered after the urgent patient ID is

issued. To register the patient, enter the required information items and click
the Register button.

3. The study protocol to be selected automatically can be preset. Refer to

section 4 "System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual for the
procedure.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
239
10.5.2 Simplified registration
When registering an urgent patient, select the preset study protocol. This
completes patient acceptance and starts the study automatically.

This registration method is appropriate in situations of great urgency.

<1> Issue the urgent patient ID. Click the Entrance button.

The Entrance dialog box opens.

<2> Select the study protocol. Click the appropriate Emergency button to which
the target study protocol is registered. The urgent patient ID is automatically
issued and the study is started with the selected study protocol. The Start
Study operation is not required.

NOTE: 1. To close the Entrance dialog box and return to the normal appointment
screen, click the Routine button.

2. For the registration procedure for the Emergency buttons, refer to section 8
"System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual.

3. It is also possible to display the Entrance dialog box automatically when the
system is started. For the setting procedure, refer to section 8 "System
Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the reference manual.

4. If the patient status changes suddenly after "Finish Study" was executed,
"Start Study" can be executed from the tableside console in the examination
room. For details, refer to subsection 5.11 "Starting an Emergency Study
("Start Study") From the Examination Room".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
240
10.6 Repeat Study Appointment
When a repeat study is to be performed for a patient who has a study history,
a repeat study appointment can be made using the patient's study history.

10.6.1 Simplified search

The studies performed in the specified period can be searched for. The
target study (patient) can be selected from the search results.

<1> Select "Completed Studies" in the Study Status list box.

<2> Select the period for search in the Display Range list box. The studies
performed in the specified period are displayed in the study list display area.

Today Current day

Last 6 Months Past 6 months (it is possible to specify the number of
days or weeks)
Last All All past studies (including the studies on the current day)
All All studies

<3> Select the desired study in the study list. The selected study information is
displayed in the study/patient information input area.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
241
10.6.2 Keyword search
The search conditions, such as the patient name and the study date, are
specified and then the studies are searched.

<1> Click the Search button.

<2> In the displayed Search dialog box, enter the search conditions.

(a) Select the study status in the Study Status list box.

All Studies
Completed Studies
Scheduled Studies (Not yet performed)

(b) Specify the search conditions in the search condition input area.

Check the desired search item checkbox and select or enter the search
conditions. To delete the entered search conditions, click the Clear button.

<3> Start searching. Click the Search button. The search results are displayed
in the search result display area.

<4> Click the desired study in the search results. The patient information or the
study information for the selected study is displayed in the Patient tab.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
242
 NOTE: When the system is connected to an HIS/RIS, the data in the HIS/RIS server
is also searched. Note that search cannot be cancelled while data in the
HIS/RIS server is being searched.

10.6.3 Auto search

If the search conditions are entered in the search items with the Auto search
mark, search is automatically started. For the procedure for enabling the
auto search function, see the reference manual.

10.6.4 Repeat study appointment

Repeat study appointment is made using the patient information or the study
information for the searched study.

<1> Change the patient information or the study information displayed in the
study/patient information input area as required.

To restore the changed data, click the Cancel button.

To cancel the input information, click the Clear button.

<2> Register the study appointment.

Reconfirm the input data and click the Register button.

NOTE: When making an appointment for a new study using Completed Study
information, the study information is not displayed in the following items.
These items should be entered.

 Accession No.
 Study Time

No. 2B308-200EN*E
243
10.7 Image Link
If a past image is linked to the scheduled study, it can be reviewed during
study.

<1> Select the scheduled study to which the past image is linked in the study list
display area.

<2> Click the Prev. Study button. The Prev. Study dialog box is displayed.

<3> Select the storage location in which the image to be linked is saved by
switching the tab in the Prev. Study dialog box.

<4> In the study list display area of the dialog box, select the study in which the
image to be linked is contained. The image information is displayed in the
image list display area.

<5> To display the image information as a list, click the List button. To display
the image information as a thumbnail, click the Thumbnail button.

<6> In the image list display area, select the image to be linked. Multiple images
can be selected. To select all the images, click the Select All button.

<7> To set linkage, click the OK button.

To cancel linkage, click the Link Off button.

<8> Click the OK button to make the settings effective.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
244
10.8 Correcting/Canceling the Appointment
The information for the scheduled study can be changed before starting the
study. It is also possible to cancel the study appointment. For the procedure
for correcting or canceling the patient information after study is completed,
refer to section 5 "Image File Management" of the reference manual.

(1) Selecting the study

Select the target study in the study list display area. If the target study
cannot be found, search the study in the database. When searching the
target study, select "Scheduled Studies" in the Study Status list box.

(2) Correcting the contents of the scheduled study

<1> In the study list display area, click the target study.

<2> Correct the patient information or study information displayed in the

study/patient information input area.

<3> Click the Update button.

The data is overwritten and updated.

NOTE: 1. Clicking the Register button without overwriting causes the study to be
registered as a different study.

2. The contents of Completed Studies (information of completed studies)

cannot be modified.

(3) Canceling the appointment

<1> In the study list display area, click the target study.

<2> Click the Delete button to cancel it.

<3> A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click the OK button. The

appointment is canceled.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
245
10.9 Data Retrieval From the HIS/RIS
When an HIS/RIS is used, the study information or patient information
registered as an angiography study in the HIS/RIS server can be used.

10.9.1 Updating the received data

The information registered in the HIS/RIS server can be automatically
received at the time of startup of the system. After the power of the system
is turned ON, update the data with the received data, following the steps
described below.

<1> Click the Get Worklist setting button.

<2> Select the appropriate option in the Modality and System selection field in
the Get Worklist dialog box and click the OK button.

<3> Click the Get Worklist button.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
246
10.10 Transferring the Data to the HIS/RIS
When an HIS/RIS is used, various types of information concerning the study
can be transferred to the HIS/RIS server.

<1> Click the MPPS button. The MPPS dialog box is displayed.

<2> Enter the information in the information display area as required.

<3> Of the buttons described below, click the appropriate button.

Transfers the input information to the HIS/RIS server Completed button

Transfers the discontinued study information to the Discontinued button
HIS/RIS server
Saves the input information temporarily in the Save button
system
Cancels input of the information Cancel button

NOTE: It is possible to automatically open the MPPS dialog box when the study is
finished. For the setting procedure, see the reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
247
10.11 RDS/RDSR Transfer
10.11.1 Automatic data transfer at the end of the examination
The dose data can be transferred to the specified server termination of the
examination (Finish Study).

<1> Perform Finish Study. The following dialog box opens.

<2> Confirm the settings in the dialog box.

<3> RDS transfer : Select the server for the transfer destination.
RDSR transfer : Confirm the server for the transfer destination.

<4> Click .

RDS transfer

RDSR transfer

No. 2B308-200EN*E
248
10.11.2 Data transfer during the examination
The dose data can be transferred to the specified server at the desired
timing during the examination.

<1> Open the [Acquisition] tab.

<2> Click . A dialog box opens.

<3> Click the [Transfer] button displayed in the dialog box.

NOTE: When data transfer during the examination is performed, fluoroscopy or

radiography is disabled for several seconds until data transfer is completed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
249
NOTE: 1. The data in Region Examined selected at the time of study appointment is
also transferred.

2. The dose data can be transferred after the examination is completed.

<1> Select the Patient tab.

<2> Select "Completed Studies".

<3> Select the study to be transferred.

<4> Click or .

<5> The RDS dialog box opens. Transfer the data in the same manner as
above.

3. Before performing RDS transfer/RDSR transfer, confirm that no error

message concerning dosimeter failure is displayed. If the dosimeter has
failed, the correct dose data is not output.

4. To perform RDS transfer/RDSR transfer, presetting must be performed in

Utility mode. For the setting procedure, refer to the reference manual.

5. A summary of the dose information can be recorded as an image. This

image contains a summary of the dose information only and is handled as a
part of a RUN image (*1). If it is desired to use this dose information
recording method, ask your Toshiba service representative to change the
system setting.

*1) The image of the dose information summary is created at the end of the
RUN image.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
250
11. Fluoroscopy/Radiography
(Acquisition Mode)
After the operation for starting the study (Start study) is performed, execute
study (fluoroscopy/radiography) in Acquisition mode. For the Start study
procedure, refer to section 10 "Study Appointment".

[Fluoroscopy]

This section describes the procedure for basic fluoroscopy. For the
fluoroscopic image recording and fluoroscopy roadmapping procedures, see
the reference manual.

[Radiography]

This section describes the procedure for digital angiography (DA), one-shot
radiography, and digital subtraction angiography (DSA). For the procedure
for other radiographic techniques, see the reference manual.

Contents 11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode

11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program
11.3 Fluoroscopy
11.4 DA/One-Shot Radiography
11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA)
11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and Radiography
11.7 FPD Calibration

No. 2B308-200EN*E
251
WARNING: 1. Before performing a study, tell the patient not to move unless
otherwise instructed. Also, pay attention to patient movement during
the study to ensure that the patient does not move.
If the patient moves during the study and the patient's hand or leg
protrudes from the tabletop of the catheterization table or comes into
contact with a moving section of the system, the patient's hand or leg
may get caught in the system.

2. Before performing image acquisition, call the patient by the patient

name displayed on the in-room monitor and receive confirmation from
the patient. This ensures that the patient name displayed on the in-
room monitor corresponds to the actual patient.
If the acquired images (image data) and patient information (patient
data) do not match, the images are for a different patient and
misdiagnosis will result.
When images are to be acquired for a new patient, confirm the identity
of the new patient as described above.

3. Before performing a study, confirm that the images acquired during the
previous study are no longer displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor. If
the images are identified incorrectly, misdiagnosis will result.
The related information for the displayed image can be checked in the
Radiographic Sequence No. and Examination Date display fields of the
Image Related Information display area on the fluoroscopic monitor.

4. During fluoroscopy or radiography, if any abnormality that interferes

with diagnosis is found on the TV monitor (excessive halation occurs,
no images are displayed, etc.), immediately stop
radiography/fluoroscopy. Then contact your Toshiba representative
for inspection and repair.

CAUTION: 1. Instruct the patient not to touch the operating switches or other
objects on the tabletop. In addition, confirm that the patient observes
these instructions during the examination.

2. Confirm that the patient is immobilized securely by checking the

following points before the catheterization table is tilted for
examination. Attention also must be paid to the following check
points during examination.

 The patient immobilization band is not loose and holds the patient
firmly.
 The patient's shoulders are in contact with the shoulder rests.
 The patient's feet are in contact with the footrest.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
252
CAUTION: In the following cases, the radiography start timing may be delayed for
several seconds after the radiography switch is pressed.

(1) When radiography is performed during image display in thumbnail

format, during current patient serial image playback, or during image file
switching

(2) When the radiography switch is pressed twice in rapid succession

(3) When an acquisition program is changed immediately before the

radiography switch is pressed

NOTE: 1. If the fluoroscopy/radiography settings are changed, FPD calibration may

start. Fluoroscopy or radiography cannot be performed during FPD
calibration.

2. If radiography is performed with the image magnified by the live zoom,

images with the magnification ratio set by the live zoom are acquired.
In addition, for the setting in which normal fluoroscopic images and
fluoroscopic images magnified by live zoom are displayed simultaneously,
images magnified by live zoom are acquired.

3. When all the conditions below apply, it may not be possible to display the
edges of the field on the image due to X-ray tube assembly target angle
limitations. Please be aware of this.
The conditions differ depending on the FPD used.
It is possible to eliminate missing sections on images by setting the SID as
specified in the table below.

FPD used FOV SID (*1) C-arm position

8-inch FPD 8"  8" 101 cm or more The C-arm is located in a diagonal
orientation relative to the patient.
12-inch FPD 12"  12" 110 cm or more
12  16-inch 12"  12" 96 cm or more
FPD
12"  16" 109 cm or more

*1) Differs slightly depending on the conditions.

4. It is necessary to perform fluoroscopy before radiography in order to

calculate the radiographic conditions. If the settings for the anatomical
region and radiographic angle have not been changed from those used in
the previous radiography, however, fluoroscopy can be skipped.
Even if the acquisition program (*2) has been changed, fluoroscopy can be
skipped as long as the settings of the anatomical region and radiographic
angle have not been changed from those used in the previous radiography.

*2) Excluding rotational DSA, stepping DSA, and other programs that change
the radiographic angle or anatomical region during acquisition.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
253
11.1 Selecting Acquisition Mode
<1> Click the Acquisition tab to select Acquisition mode.

[Acquisition program setting area]

The acquisition program is selected in this area. The radiographic history

(Run Log) in the corresponding study can be checked by switching the tab.

[Fluoroscopy/radiography setting area]

Various settings for fluoroscopy and radiography are performed in this area.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
254
11.2 Selecting the Acquisition Program
Before starting radiography, the acquisition program to be used for
radiography is selected from those registered in the study protocol selected
at the time of study appointment.

(1) Selection from the Program tab

<1> Click the region for which the target acquisition program is registered in the
human body model shown in the Program tab.

<2> Click the Gr. tab to which the target acquisition program is registered.

<3> In the displayed acquisition program list, click the target acquisition program.

(2) Acquisition Program list box

It is also possible to select the acquisition program from the Acquisition
Program list box.

NOTE: 1. If another acquisition program is selected during fluoroscopy, the selected

acquisition program is set after fluoroscopy is completed. Thus, radiography
with the selected acquisition program cannot be performed during
fluoroscopy. After fluoroscopy is completed, confirm that the selected
acquisition program is set and then start radiography.

2. If an acquisition program in which auto-positioning is interlocked is selected,

a blue lamp lights and the auto-positioning number is displayed as shown in
the figure below.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
255
11.3 Fluoroscopy
The basic procedure for fluoroscopy is described.

11.3.1 Procedure for fluoroscopy

(1) Basic settings

<1> Click the Fluoroscopy tab.

<2> Click the Switch to normal fluoroscopy button and confirm that the button
lights.

NOTE: The fluoroscopic conditions (kV, mA, ms) are set to those set in the study
protocol. For the procedure for checking and changing the conditions, refer
to subsection 11.3.2 "Detailed fluoroscopy settings".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
256
 (2) Fluoroscopic X-ray generation
Fluoroscopic X-rays are generated while the fluoroscopy start button is held
down.

NOTE: 1. If fluoroscopy is performed continuously for 10 minutes, X-ray exposure is

automatically stopped in accordance with the safety standards. Fluoroscopy
can then be resumed.

2. Fluoroscopy can be performed using the following switches or buttons. For

details, refer to each subsection specified below.

Fluoroscopy operation switch/button Subsection to refer to

Fluoroscopy footswitch 4.2 (3) "Fluoroscopy footswitch in the control room"
Footswitch (with function buttons) 4.8.1 (3) "Footswitch"

3. The desired fluoroscopic images can be saved. For details, refer to the
reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
257
 (3) High Level Control (HLC) fluoroscopy
High Level Control (HLC) fluoroscopy can be selected by using the HLC
fluoroscopy start button.

WARNING: In HLC fluoroscopy, the maximum incident dose to the patient is higher
than the normal dose limitation. Do not use HLC fluoroscopy more
than necessary.

NOTE: 1. The procedure for selecting HLC mode is described in the locations specified
below. In HLC mode, use the fluoroscopy start button to start/terminate HLC
fluoroscopy.
Note that HLC mode cannot be selected in systems for the USA.

 System console : Refer to subsection 11.3.2 "Detailed fluoroscopy settings".

 Function button : Refer to the reference manual.

2. Warning sounds (chimes) are generated during HLC fluoroscopy.

3. For the footswitch with function buttons, the HLC fluoroscopy start function
may not be assigned. For details, refer to subsection 4.8.1(3) "Footswitch".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
258
11.3.2 Detailed fluoroscopy settings
The basic fluoroscopy setting procedure is described. For other settings,
refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing the Study Protocol/Acquisition Program" of
the reference manual.

(1) Setting the fluoroscopic conditions

The fluoroscopic conditions can be set using two methods: automatic setting
and manual setting. The setting method registered in the study protocol is
normally selected. However, it can be changed by following the steps
described below.

<1> Click the Set Fluoroscopic Conditions button.

<2> In the displayed Fluo X-ray dialog box, select the method for setting the
fluoroscopic conditions. This changes between auto and manual each time
the Fluoroscopic Conditions Switch button is clicked.

<3> When Manual is selected, set the fluoroscopic conditions in the Fluoroscopic
Conditions list box.

NOTE: When the values for kV, mA, and ms are set in Manual mode, the
fluoroscopic conditions to be actually used in fluoroscopy are calculated by
the system based on these values. Therefore, confirm the final set values in
the common information display area of the fluoroscopic condition display
section on the system console.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
259
 (2) Fluoroscopy mode selection
Select Fluoroscopy mode from the Fluoroscopy Mode Selection list box.
The following four modes are available.

Low Low X-ray dose mode

Middle Between low and normal mode
Normal Normal X-ray dose mode
High High X-ray dose mode

(3) Fluoroscopy pulse rate selection

The fluoroscopy pulse rate can be selected in the Fluoroscopy Pulse Rate
list box. Select [Cont.] when continuous fluoroscopy is performed.

(4) Maximum incident dose rate selection (except for the USA)
Select HLC mode to set the maximum patient incident dose rate to
175 mGy/min. Place a check mark in the HLC Selection check box.

NOTE: 1. The fluoroscopy mode can be changed using the function buttons. For
details, refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of
the reference manual.

2. If [High] is selected for fluoroscopy mode, HLC mode is automatically

selected. Note that the setting can be changed so that HLC mode is not
automatically selected. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
In systems for the USA, HLC mode is not automatically selected, even if
[High] is selected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
260
 (5) Confirming fluoroscopy mode
Click the Details button. The following information can be checked.

Dose FPD incident dose

Beam Filter Beam hardening filter
Dose Limit Limit of the incident dose to the patient
ABC kV Mode ABC tube voltage

NOTE: 1. When the system is set so that the beam hardening filter is automatically
selected, "Auto" is displayed in the Beam Filter section. The filter that has
been selected automatically can be checked in the common information
display area. For details, refer to subsection 4.1.1 "Common information
display area".

2. The beam hardening filter used in combination can be checked. Click the
Additional Filter Info button on the Utility mode screen. The beam hardening
filter confirmation dialog is displayed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
261
11.4 DA/One-Shot Radiography
A dynamic image is acquired in DA. The acquired image is automatically
stored in the RAID.

In one-shot radiography, a single still image is acquired at any timing during

radiography. The acquired image is automatically stored in the RAID.

11.4.1 Procedure for radiography

(1) Selecting the acquisition program

<1> To perform DA, select the DA program. To perform one-shot radiography,
select the one-shot radiography program. For the selection procedure, refer
to subsection 11.2 "Selecting the Acquisition Program".

NOTE: When DA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can easily enter
the detector, such as the lower extremities, it is recommended that [DT-DA]
(Dynamic Trace DA) be selected for the acquisition program. The effects of
direct X-rays are reduced, ensuring the appropriate dose (image level). In
addition, flattening processing for the image background is enhanced as
compared to that in normal image processing.
Do not select Dynamic Trace for a region in which the entry of direct X-rays
is not significant. Doing so may result in halation.

(2) Checking/setting the acquisition program

<1> Open the Radiography tab.

<2> Confirm the radiographic condition setting method. Either Auto or Manual
has already been assigned to the selected acquisition program. Confirm the
setting method in the display area shown below.

<3> When Manual is selected, set the radiographic conditions in Tube Voltage,
Tube Current, and Pulse Width list boxes.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
262
 (3) Checking the contrast medium
When "Injector interlock" is selected, confirm that the contrast medium
injector is ready.

(4) Starting fluoroscopy

<1> Move the support unit and perform angle setting.

<2> Hold down the fluoroscopy start button. Fluoroscopy starts.

Press the fluoroscopy start button and perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or
more. The radiographic conditions are automatically calculated. For the
fluoroscopic procedures, refer to (2) "Fluoroscopic X-ray generation" of
subsection 11.3.1.

NOTE: If any of the following settings is changed after fluoroscopy, the X-ray
conditions must be set again. In this case, perform fluoroscopy again for at
least 2 seconds.

 Aperture or angle of the diagnostic X-ray beam limiting device blades or

compensation filter (including virtual collimation)
 C-arm angle
 Tabletop position
 FOV size

(5) Starting radiography

Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to the second stage.

For DA, X-ray generation continues while the button is held down.

For one-shot radiography, image acquisition is performed and completed

when the button is pressed.

NOTE: 1. It is possible to start or finish radiography using the footswitch installed in the
examination room.

2. When injector interlock is selected, radiography cannot be started before the

injector is ready.

CAUTION: 1. Hold down the radiography switch until the acquired images are played
back on the monitor. If the switch is released before the images are
played back, the images may not be acquired and radiography must be
performed again.

2. If the Injector interlock/non-interlock selection button blinks during

radiography, stop generating X-rays if required.
[Injector If the button blinks, an injection problem has occurred and injection is
interlock/non- disabled. Though radiography can be continued in this status, there is
interlock selection a possibility that target contrast images may not be acquired and that
button] the study must be performed again.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
263
11.4.2 Detailed settings of DA/one-shot radiography
Various conditions preset to the selected acquisition program can be
changed before starting radiography. For settings other than those
described below, refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing the Study Protcol/
Acquisition Program" of the reference manual.

(1) Setting the focus size

The focus size can be changed.

* This may not be selectable, depending on the X-ray tube assembly used in
combination.

(2) Setting the acquisition rate and time

The acquisition rate and time for DA can be changed. Radiography is
stopped when the time set in the Time field has elapsed. Note that the
actual radiography time may be slightly longer than the set time.

(3) Setting the maximum pulse width

The maximum pulse width during X-ray generation for DA can be changed.
Note that it cannot be changed when Manual is selected for the radiographic
condition setting method.

NOTE: Reducing the maximum pulse width is an effective way to suppress image
blurring resulting from motion such as the heartbeat. However, when the
maximum pulse width is reduced, the desired level of image quality may not
be obtained due to a reduction in image contrast etc. The maximum pulse
width should be adjusted to an appropriate value.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
264
(4) Setting injector interlock
The timing of X-ray generation and contrast medium injection can be set for
DA.

<1> Click the Injector Interlock button.

<2> Select the delay time. X-ray exposure is started when the period after start
of contrast medium injection, set from the Delay Time spin box, has elapsed.

(5) Locking ABC

The ABC function can be locked at any timing during DA and brightness can
be fixed. Note that this function is not available when Manual is selected for
the radiographic condition setting method.

<1> Click the ABC Lock Delay button.

<2> Select the delay time: the ABC function is locked when the period after start
of radiography, set from the Delay Time spin box, has elapsed.

(6) Automatic transfer of images for Parametric Imaging

Images acquired in DA can be transferred automatically to the Angio
Workstation for Parametric Imaging. For the procedure, refer to (6)
"Automatic transfer of images for Parametric Imaging" in subsection 11.5.4.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
265
(7) Other settings
In addition to the settings described above, the following settings can be
changed.

<1> Click the Details button. The setting screen opens.

<2> Change the settings as required.

*1) DR compression is a function for automatically correcting the brightness

between high-intensity and low-intensity areas. When image acquisition is to
be performed with DR compression, place a check mark in the DR
compression check box.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
266
11.5 Digital Subtraction Angiography (DSA)
In DSA, subtraction is performed between images with and without contrast
medium to eliminate the non-vascular tissue and thus generate images
depicting only the blood vessels.

The acquired images are automatically saved on the RAID.

CAUTION: For images with significant differences in brightness level within the
FOV, insert the appropriate compensation filter to decrease the
differences in brightness level. For such images, halation cannot be
corrected by gain adjustment.
If gain adjustment is performed for such images, on the monitor it may
seem that the halation has been corrected. However, the displayed
image may differ significantly from the actual image.

NOTE: 1. As advanced DSA radiographic techniques, stepping DSA, rotational DSA,

3D-DSA, 3D-DA, 3D-LD, and LCI can be performed. Refer to the reference
manual for the image acquisition procedures.

 Stepping DSA (option)

Stepping DSA is used to acquire information for generating a Panoramic
View of vascular images of the lower extremities. DSA of the lower
extremities is performed in several steps (each of the steps is of similar
size).

 Rotational DSA (option)

DSA is performed while the tube support arm is rotated. Angiographic
images for the region of interest can be acquired continuously in the
specified range.

 3D-DSA, 3D-DA, 3D-LD, LCI (option)

3D-DSA, 3D-DA, 3D-LD, and LCI are used to acquire information for
generating three-dimensional images for the region of interest. The basic
acquisition method is the same as for rotational DSA.

2. When DSA is performed for a region in which direct X-rays can easily enter
the detector, such as the lower extremities, it is recommended that [DT-DSA]
(Dynamic Trace DSA) be selected for the acquisition program. The effects
of direct X-rays are reduced, ensuring the appropriate dose (image level).
In this case, the same image processing as in standard DSA is applied to the
image. When [DT-DSA] is selected, flattening processing for the image
background is enhanced as compared to that in normal image processing.
Do not select Dynamic Trace for a region in which the entry of direct X-rays
is not significant. Doing so may result in halation.

3. After DSA acquisition is completed, misalignment between the contrast

image and mask image is corrected and the correction result is applied to
the DSA image automatically.

If misalignment cannot be corrected properly by automatic correction, correct

misalignment by performing pixel shifting.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
267
NOTE: 4. When acquisition program [DT-DSA] (Dynamic Trace DSA) is selected, the
brightness of the region of interest can be changed in three levels. Select
the brightness level using the "Dynamic Trace Parameter" list box before
starting radiography (fluoroscopy). The differences between the parameters
are shown in the table below.

Dynamic Trace Brightness of the region of interest in DT-DSA

Parameter During DSA During fluoroscopy (*1)
1 Same as in standard DSA Brighter than in standard
fluoroscopy
2 (*2) Brighter than Param. 1 by one level
3 Brighter than Param. 1 by two levels

*1) Background flattening is applied when the brightness is changed. The

parameter of this processing is the same for 1 to 3.

*2) The default setting of "Dynamic Trace Parameter" is 2.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
268
11.5.1 DSA procedure

(1) Acquisition program selection

Select the DSA program. For the selection procedure, refer to subsection
11.2 "Selecting the Acquisition Program".

(2) Checking/changing the program settings

Check the preset program settings and change them if required. For the
procedure, refer to section 8 "System Presetting (Utility Mode)" of the
reference manual.

(3) Checking the contrast medium

<1> Confirm that the contrast medium injector is ready.

<2> Confirm that Injector interlock is selected to automatically inject the contrast
medium at the specified timing.

(4) Performing fluoroscopy

Press the fluoroscopy start button and perform fluoroscopy for 2 seconds or
more. The radiographic conditions are calculated automatically.
For the fluoroscopic procedures, refer to (2) "Fluoroscopic X-ray generation"
of subsection 11.3.1.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
269
 (5) Starting radiography
Perform Test Shot to confirm that the radiographic conditions are appropriate.
(Check whether or not the halation level is appropriate.)
After confirmation, start radiography.

<1> Confirm that the Test Shot checkbox is checked. If not, place a check mark.

<2> Press the first stage of X-ray exposure handswitch.

The Test Shot image is displayed on the monitor in the examination room.

<3> Check the degree of halation. The halation areas are displayed black.

<4> If halation correction is required, release the handswitch to stop test exposure
and correct halation, following the steps described below. If halation
correction is not necessary, proceed with step <5> to start radiography.

(a) Tilt the Menu operating lever toward/away from you to correct the halation.

(b) Press the top button of the Menu operating lever to set the corrected result.

Location of the menu operating lever

Main console Refer to subsection 4.2 "Main console".
Tableside console Refer to subsection 4.3 "Tableside Console".

<5> Start radiography. Press the X-ray exposure handswitch to the second
stage. Be sure to hold it down until image acquisition is completed.

CAUTION: Keep the X-ray exposure handswitch ON until the Test Shot image is
played back on the monitor in the examination room. Otherwise, X-ray
exposure is interrupted and Test Shot may need to be performed again.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
270
NOTE: 1. When the specified number of images are acquired, radiography for the next
stage is started automatically with the corresponding acquisition conditions.
When the radiography for the last stage is complete, radiography is
terminated automatically.

2. Test Shot can be omitted, but images may be acquired with darker
conditions than expected. Check the images in advance with Test Shot to
acquire better-quality images.

3. For details concerning halation correction, refer to subsection 11.5.2

"Halation correction" of the reference manual.

4. Radiography can be started and terminated using the Exposure Start button
of the footswitch in the control room. If test exposure is performed using the
footswitch and halation correction is then found to be necessary,
immediately stop exposure. If the footswitch is kept pressed, the system
proceeds to the next radiography step.

5. When injector interlock is selected, radiography cannot be started until the

injector is ready.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
271
11.5.2 Halation correction
If there is halation in the Test Shot image, one of the following two methods
can be used to reduce the halation: Quick correction or Correction with SEC
Hold.

CAUTION: The halation correction value calculated during gain adjustment must
be considered as the reference value. In addition, the Test Shot image
displayed in the halation area must be considered as the reference
image.
For images with significant differences in brightness level within the
FOV, halation cannot be corrected using the calculated correction
value. If gain adjustment is performed for such images, on the monitor
it may seem that the halation has been corrected. However, the actual
image is not corrected and may differ significantly. In order to prevent
this problem, insert the appropriate compensation filter to decrease the
differences in brightness level in such images.

(1) Quick correction

This is a simple method of gain adjustment for halation correction.

<1> When halation is seen in the Test Shot image, release the first stage of the
X-ray exposure handswitch and perform gain adjustment as follows.

NOTE: 1. When thumbnail display is being performed on the reference monitor, the
gain cannot be adjusted even if the X-ray exposure handswitch is turned
OFF after Test Shot is completed.
In this case, perform the following steps to adjust the gain.

(1) Terminate the function currently being executed on the reference monitor.

(2) Select the monitor on which the Test Shot images are displayed. Each time
the Image processing target selection button on the main console is pressed,
selection is switched between the fluoroscopic monitor and the reference
monitor.

(3) Click the DSA Gain button in the menu display area of the reference monitor.

(4) Adjust the gain and apply the setting. Refer to <2> and <3> below.

2. When the DSA Gain button is selected in the menu display area of the
reference monitor, the menu display area gain value (%) is displayed.

<2> Adjust the gain.

Adjust the gain while checking the image halation.

If the gain needs to be increased, push the Menu operating lever away from
you.

If the gain needs to be reduced, pull the Menu operating lever toward you.

The main console and the tableside console both have Menu operating
levers.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
272
 <3> Set the gain.

Press the Menu operating lever.

After the gain is set, the system is set to the SEC HOLD status.

<4> Resume DSA.

Check the halation again with a Test Shot image. If the halation is corrected,
hold down the second stage of the X-ray exposure handswitch and continue
DSA. If the halation still needs to be corrected, release the first stage of the
X-ray exposure handswitch and adjust the gain again.

NOTE: After halation correction, it is possible to omit Test Shot and start DSA
directly. However, if the halation correction is insufficient, images with an
appropriate brightness may not be obtained. Use Test Shot even after gain
adjustment to acquire better-quality images.

(2) Correction with SEC Hold

The gain can also be corrected using the SEC Hold function. Refer to
subsection 11.5.3 "SEC Hold" for further information.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
273
11.5.3 SEC Hold
It is possible to perform DSA by setting the radiographic conditions manually.

NOTE: After setting the radiographic conditions, it is possible to omit Test Shot and
start DSA directly. However, images with an appropriate brightness may not
be obtained. Use Test Shot to acquire better-quality images.

<1> Click the Hold button.

The radiographic conditions can be set manually.

<2> Change the conditions if required. The items below can be changed.

Tube Voltage (kV) : Radiographic tube voltage

Tube Current (mA) : Radiographic tube current
Pulse Width (ms) : Radiographic X-ray pulse width (*1)
Focus : X-ray focus size
Gain (%) : Gain

*1) The conditions cannot be changed.

<3> Click the Set button after changing the gain on the Radiography tab.

NOTE: 1. Gain (%) is linked to the gain adjustment in the examination room.
Therefore, if the gain is corrected in the examination room, the SEC Hold
status should be set automatically.

2. If the setting for the radiographic conditions is Manual, the radiographic

conditions are not set automatically even if fluoroscopy for automatic setting
is performed. The Manual setting must be released before Auto can be set.

3. Click the Hold button again to release the Manual setting for the radiographic
conditions and then select Auto again.

4. It is possible to preset whether the SEC Hold conditions are retained. If the
SEC Hold status is retained, the radiographic conditions are fixed but the
gain adjustment value is reset to 100%.

5. Due to the specifications of the system, often fluoroscopy cannot be

performed with the manually set values.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
274
11.5.4 Detailed settings for DSA
The conditions preset in the selected acquisition program can be changed
before image acquisition. For other settings, refer to subsection 8.2 "Editing
the Study Protocols/Acquisition Program" of the reference manual.

(1) Injector interlock selection

The acquisition timing and contrast medium injection timing can be set.

<1> Click the Injector Interlock button.

<2> Select one of the following two contrast medium injection timings.

 Acquiring a mask after injecting contrast medium

Select Mask Delay. In this case, set the time between injecting the contrast
medium and starting mask image acquisition. Refer to <3> below.

 Injecting the contrast medium after acquiring a mask

Select Injection Delay. Contrast medium injection starts after completion of

mask image acquisition.

<3> When Mask Delay is selected, set the time between injecting the contrast
medium and starting mask image acquisition.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
275
 (2) Setting of the acquisition parameters for mask images and
contrast images
The acquisition rate (Rate), the number of images summed to obtain the
average (Add), the number of acquired frames (Frames), the acquisition time
(Time), and the delay time for the start of the next stage of mask
image/contrast image acquisition can be checked or set.
Five stages of contrast image acquisition can be set (Contrast1 to Contrast5).

<1> Enter the parameter values to be set.

Rate : The acquisition rate can be set here.

Add : The number of summed images can be set here.
Frames : The number of acquired frames can be set here. If the acquisition time is
set, the number of acquired frames is calculated automatically.
The mask stage can be displayed when Mask Record is selected.
Time(s) : The acquisition time can be set here. If the acquisition rate and the number
of acquired frames are set, the acquisition time is calculated automatically.
Note that the actual acquisition time may be slightly longer than the time set
here.
Delay Time(s) : The delay time between completing acquisition for the previous stage and
starting acquisition for the next stage can be set. The delay time set before
mask image acquisition is the time between injecting contrast medium and
starting mask image acquisition. See (1) Injector interlock selection for
further information.

NOTE: 1. The number of stages that can be set is restricted according to the conditions
such as the set acquisition time, the number of acquired frames, etc.

2. The number of acquired frames is automatically set to a multiple of the

number of set summed images.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
276
(3) Recording mask images
Mask images can be saved on the RAID. Place a check mark in the Mask
Record check box.

The number of acquired images is displayed in the Frames column.

(4) Check and change the AEC parameter settings

Check and change the AEC parameter settings if required.

<1> Click the AEC Param. button.

The AEC Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed.

<2> Check and change the AEC parameter settings if required.

Target kV : The target tube voltage can be set here.

Tube Voltage : The maximum and minimum values can be set here.
Pulse Width : The maximum and minimum values can be set here.
Focus : The X-ray focus size can be set here.
When Auto is selected, the X-ray focus size is
automatically selected.
Medium focus is available, depending on the
X-ray tube assembly used in combination. In this
case, the focus sizes for automatic selection can be
selected from L-M-S or M-S.

L-M-S The focus size is automatically set to large, medium, or

small.
M-S The focus size is automatically set to medium or small.
For certain X-ray tube assemblies used in combination,
focus size is restricted to medium only.

AEC ROI : The ROI used for adjusting the AEC can be set here.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
277
 (5) Check and set the AEC dose (standard dose)
Set the standard detector incident dose per X-ray exposure.

(6) Automatic transfer of images for Parametric Imaging

The target images for Parametric Imaging acquired in DSA can be
transferred automatically to the Angio Workstation. Enable the automatic
transfer function by following the procedure described below.

<1> Select the parameter for Parametric Imaging. For details of the parameters,
refer to the operation manual for the XIDF-AWS801 (Parametric Imaging
functional volume).

<2> Click the [PI Auto Transfer] button to enable the automatic transfer function.

NOTE: 1. The automatic transfer function can be enabled using the [PI Auto Transfer]
button in the menu display area on the reference monitor. Note, however,
that the parameter for Parametric Imaging set at the time of automatic
transfer cannot be set in the menu display area.

2. To manually transfer previously acquired images to the Angio Workstation,

use the [PI Parameter] or [PI Transfer] button. For details, refer to the
reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
278
(7) Other settings
The following settings can also be changed.

<1> Click the Details button. The corresponding setting screen is displayed.

<2> Change the settings if required.

*1) [Sub/N] : Subtraction image negative display

[Sub/P] : Subtraction image positive display
[Live/N] : Live image negative display
[Live/P] : Live image positive display

<3> Live image (non-subtracted image) display setting

Display setting can be changed to [Live/N] (live image negative display) or

[Live/P] (live image positive display) using the procedure described below.
Note that the parameters set for [Live/N] and [Live/P] from the Details button
in step <2> will be changed accordingly.

Click the Set Live Parameters button. In the displayed LIVE Parameter
dialog box, change the parameters as required. Each parameter can be set
separately for [Live/N] and [Live/P]. After the setting for one of them is
completed by clicking the OK button, the other can be set.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
279
11.6 Various Settings for Fluoroscopy and Radiography
The setting procedures for the following functions used in fluoroscopy or
radiography are described.

11.6.1 Disabling X-ray exposure

11.6.2 Setting the view ID on images
11.6.3 Setting the contrast medium name on images
11.6.4 Stopwatch
11.6.5 Adjustment of gradation and spatial filter
11.6.6 LIH (Last Image Hold) selection
11.6.7 MIH (Map Image Hold) selection
11.6.8 Simultaneous display setting
11.6.9 Function setting

11.6.1 Disabling X-ray exposure

In order to ensure safety, X-ray exposure can be disabled. For the
procedure for disabling/enabling X-ray exposure, refer to subsection 5.10
"Disabling X-ray Exposure". Note that X-ray exposure is always disabled
before Start study operation is performed.

11.6.2 Setting the View ID on images

It is possible to set the View ID on stored fluoroscopic or radiographic
images as related information.

Select the View ID to be set in the View ID selection list box before starting
image acquisition.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
280
11.6.3 Setting the contrast medium name on images
It is possible to set the contrast medium name on stored fluoroscopic or
radiographic images as related information.

Select the contrast medium name to be set in the Contrast Medium Name
list box before starting image acquisition.

NOTE: 1. A View ID can be entered from the keyboard. Click the View ID selection list
box to enable editing and then enter the View ID in the list box using the
keyboard. After entry is completed, press the Enter key on the keyboard to
register the View ID.

2. Registered View IDs can be deleted during a study. To delete a View ID,
select the View ID from the View ID selection list box and then press the
Delete key or the Backspace key on the keyboard.
When the Enter key is pressed, the View ID is deleted.

3. If no comment is required, before radiography or image acquisition is

performed, delete the text in the list box using the Delete key or other
means, or select "Blank".

4. The items to be included in the list can be preset in the acquisition program.
For setting procedures, refer to subsections 8.2.7 "Editing the contrast
medium name" and 8.2.23 "Editing the View ID lists" of the reference
manual.

5. It is possible to select whether the selected View ID is used continuously

after radiography is completed or the acquisition program is changed. For
the setting procedure, refer to subsection 8.2.5 "System parameter setting"
of the reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
281
11.6.4 Stopwatch
The stopwatch function is provided for measuring time. In addition, a buzzer
sound can be generated at the set time using the timer function.

(1) Stopwatch
To start the timer : Click the Start button.

To stop the timer : Click the Stop button.

To reset the timer: Click the Reset button.

(2) Timer setting

<1> Click the Set Timer button.

<2> Set a timer in the Set Alarm spin box.

A timer can be set from 15 seconds to 59 minutes and 59 seconds.

<3> Select the timer operating mode using the Timer radio buttons.

A buzzer sound is generated at the set time.

A buzzer sound is generated repeatedly at the set time

intervals. A buzzer sound is generated for a certain period of
time and stopped automatically. It is then generated again at
the set time intervals.
The alarm function is set to OFF.

<4> Click the OK button to confirm the settings.

(3) Stopping the buzzer

Click the Buzzer Stop button or the stop button.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
282
11.6.5 Adjustment of gradation and spatial filter
Gradation (brightness and contrast) and the spatial filter of the images
displayed on the reference and fluoroscopic monitors can be adjusted.

<1> Click the Details button.

<2> Set the gradation and spatial filter in the corresponding setting areas shown
below.

*1) Selections are available from types A to H or NONE. The enhancement

frequency and enhancement level is different for each type.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
283
11.6.6 LIH (Last Image Hold) selection
The LIH function allows the last frame of fluoroscopy to be automatically
played back immediately after fluoroscopy is completed. To enable the LIH
function, check the LIH checkbox.

NOTE: 1. It takes approximately 2 seconds for the LIH image to be displayed after
fluoroscopy is completed. If the next fluoroscopy is started during this
period, the LIH image being prepared for display is canceled.

2. The LIH image is updated each time fluoroscopy is performed.

3. LIH is disabled in backup fluoroscopy.

4. The LIH image may disappear when an operation such as acquisition start or
image playback is performed. Display a new LIH image as required.

5. Virtual collimation and virtual filtering

For the LIH image, X-ray exposure field setting (virtual collimation) and
compensation filter position setting (virtual filtering) are enabled.
Since fluoroscopy does not need to be performed during setting, the
exposure dose can be reduced.
If setting is performed with the LIH image displayed, the beam limiting device
blades and compensation filters are displayed as graphics.

6. Virtual ROI

The virtual ROI function can be enabled by changing the setting. To change
the setting, contact your Toshiba representative.
For the virtual ROI using the LIH image, it is possible to confirm the
exposure field for the next fluoroscopy to be performed. While the LIH
image is displayed, the exposure range after the position of the support
system or catheterization table is moved is displayed as a frame in the LIH
image.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
284
NOTE: [Method for selecting the virtual ROI]

In the menu display area of the reference monitor, select the [Virtual ROI
ON] button while the LIH image is displayed. The button display changes to
"Virtual ROI OFF" and the virtual ROI is displayed on the LIH image.

[Method for canceling the virtual ROI]

Select the [Virtual ROI OFF] button. The button display changes to "Virtual
ROI ON] and the virtual ROI display is canceled.

[Limitations of the virtual ROI]

 The virtual ROI is not displayed if the exposure field after the support system
or the catheterization table is moved is outside the range of the LIH image.

 The virtual ROI is not displayed if the arm angle for the support system is
tilted by 40 or more.

 If a tilting table is used in combination, the tilting angle of the tabletop is not
taken into consideration. The virtual ROI is displayed as tilt angle "0" even
when the tabletop is tilted.

7. It is possible to display the selected ABC ROI or AEC ROI on the LIH image.
For the procedure, see the reference manual. Setting is made in the system
parameter setting for the study protocol in Utility mode.

8. When both LIH and MIH are selected, MIH is given priority over LIH, and as
a result the LIH images are not displayed. For details of MIH, refer to
subsection 11.6.7 "MIH (Map Image Hold) selection".

9. If "Last Image Hold (Spot)" is selected in spot fluoroscopy, the fluoroscopic

image for the area set by the beam limiting device blades is automatically
displayed as the LIH image.
For details of the spot fluoroscopy function, refer to the reference manual.

10. Depending on local regulations, it may not be possible to deselect "Last

Image Hold" and "Last Image Hold (Spot)".

11. If fluoroscopy is interrupted by pressing the [X-ray exposure disable] button,

the LIH image may not be displayed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
285
11.6.7 MIH (Map Image Hold) selection
The selected map image can be set for the MIH image. Immediately after
fluoroscopy is completed, the display on the fluoroscopic monitor is switched
from the fluoroscopic image to the MIH image. This function is useful when
comparing the fluoroscopic image and the map image on the fluoroscopic
monitor.

Note that the map image is normally displayed on the reference monitor.
Therefore, both the fluoroscopic and reference monitors need to be viewed
when comparing the fluoroscopic and map images.

(1) MIH selection

<1> Select the desired map image and display it on the reference monitor.

<2> Perform either of the following steps. The map image selected in step <1> is
set to the MIH image and displayed on the fluoroscopic monitor.

 Move the cursor on the selected map image and right-click the mouse. In
the displayed menu, select [MIH Select].
 In the reference monitor menu, select [MIH Select].

NOTE: 1. The virtual collimator, virtual filtering, or virtual ROI cannot be used on the
MIH image.

2. A single frame of a dynamic image can be set to the MIH image. Select the
dynamic image and display the desired frame as a still image. Then set the
still image to the MIH image by performing the step described above. The
selected frame is stored as a map image and set to the MIH image.

3. For systems in which a photo image can be displayed on the reference

monitor, it is possible to set a photo image to the MIH image.

4. The MIH function cannot be used when the spot fluoroscopy function is
selected.

5. Depending on local regulations, it may not be possible to select "MIH".

(2) Canceling the MIH function

To cancel the MIH function, perform either of the following steps.

 Select [MIH] in the reference monitor menu.

 Remove the checkmark from the MIH checkbox.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
286
11.6.8 Simultaneous display setting (simultaneous display during
fluoroscopy)
During fluoroscopy, the fluoroscopic image and the fluoroscopic roadmap
image or live zoom image can be displayed simultaneously.

Image to be displayed Selection method

Fluoroscopic roadmap Check the [Processed Image] checkbox.
image
Live zoom image Check the [Live Image] checkbox.

NOTE: 1. For simultaneous display during fluoroscopy, the images specified in the
table below are displayed on the fluoroscopy monitor and the reference
monitor.

When fluoroscopy
During fluoroscopy
is completed
Fluoroscopy  Fluoroscopic roadmap LIH image
monitor image
 Live zoom image
Reference monitor  Fluoroscopic image Not displayed (*1)

*1) It is possible to display reference images by changing the setting. Consult

with your Toshiba representative if display of reference images is desired.
However, be aware of the following points when this setting is changed.

 Fluoroscopic acquisition of reference images by F-REC(S) or F-REC is not

possible.
In addition, fluoroscopic acquisition of LIH images by F-REC(S) or F-REC for
display on the fluoroscopy monitor is possible.
 Reference images are deleted when fluoroscopy is resumed or radiography
is started.

2. When the [Processed Image] checkbox is checked, the fluoroscopic image is

displayed at the same magnification factor as the fluoroscopic roadmap
image.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
287
11.6.9 Function setting
The following functions set in the Function dialog box are described. Open
the Function dialog box to perform setting.

(1) Function setting

 FOV size selection
 Adjustment of the ABC brightness
 Live zoom
 Image inversion
 Switching the positions of the left and right compensation filters
 Recording images on a VCR
 RDSR transfer
 Fluoroscopic timer setting
 Image-related information selection
(2) Patient position registration
(3) Large-screen monitor layout selection (option)

(1) Function setting

<1> Click . The corresponding dialog box opens.

<2> Click .

<3> Change the settings. For details, refer to the next page.

<4> Click to set the changes.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
288
 FOV size selection
<1> Select the FOV size.

Select the appropriate size in the FOV list box. The image size is enlarged
or reduced depending on the selected size.

NOTE: The FOV size can also be changed from the main console or the tableside
console. Refer to subsections 4.2 "Main Console" and 4.3 "Tableside
Console".

Adjustment of the ABC brightness

The ABC brightness can be adjusted if Auto Control is selected as a
fluoroscopic condition.

<1> Select the adjustment value in the ABC Brightness spin box.

The higher the value, the brighter the monitor image.

Live zoom
The magnification ratio of the fluoroscopic images (including LIH images)
can be changed digitally.

<1> Select the magnification ratio in the live zoom list box.
The fluoroscopic images will be magnified accordingly.

NOTE: 1. If live zoom is selected, the X-ray beam limiting device moves in response to
magnification of the image.

2. Live zoom can also be selected using the corresponding function button.
Refer to section 2 "Execution of Functions Using Function Buttons" of the
reference manual for details.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
289
 Image inversion
The image displayed on the monitor can be laterally/vertically inversed.

<1> Select the image inversion direction using the image inversion selection
checkboxes.

Switching the positions of the left and right compensation filters

The positions of the left and right compensation filters can be switched.

<1> Select the positions of the left and right compensation filters using the
Compensation Filter Switch radio buttons.

Recording images on a VCR

Fluoroscopic/radiographic images can be automatically recorded on a VCR
using the following procedure.

<1> Insert a video cassette into the VCR.

<2> Click the VCR Selection check box to place a check in it.

<3> Select the types of images to be recorded from the list box.

Fluo. Only fluoroscopic images are recorded.

Rad. Only radiographic images are recorded.
Fluo&Rad. Both fluoroscopic and radiographic images are recorded.

NOTE: For details regarding the VCR connection or settings, contact your Toshiba
representative.
For the VCR operating procedures, read the operation manual provided with
the VCR.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
290
RDSR transfer
The dose data is transferred to the specified server when the [Transfer]
button is clicked. Refer to subsection 10.11 "RDS/RDSR Transfer" for
details.

Fluoroscopy timer setting

The fluoroscopy timer can be set so that a buzzer sounds when the specified
fluoroscopic time is reached.

<1> Select the time period for generating buzzer sound in the fluoroscopy timer
setting list box.

If the fluoroscopy timer buzzer sounds, press the function button to which
the fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is assigned. The buzzer stops
and the fluoroscopy timer is reset to 0.
The fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is assigned to the following
function button on the catheterization table as the default setting.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
291
NOTE: 1. For systems to be shipped to the USA, the fluoroscopic time is fixed to
5 minutes for compliance with the HHS standards applicable from June 2006
onwards.
The fluoroscopy timer setting list box is therefore not provided and setting is
not possible.

2. When the system power is turned OFF forcibly during a study using the
Power OFF button and the system power is then restarted, the fluoroscopy
timer is set to 5 minutes automatically. If backup fluoroscopy is started in
this status, the fluoroscopy timer counts up starting from 0.

3. The fluoroscopy timer can be preset to the study protocol. For details, see
the reference manual.

4. If a function other than the fluoroscopy timer buzzer stop function is to be

assigned to the function button in the positioning operating section, it is
recommended that the function should be assigned to a function button in
the image operating section.
When the satellite console (option) is used in combination, it is also possible
to assign the function to a function button on the satellite console.

Image-related information selection

The information to be attached to the image is selected.

 Radiographic object (Quality Control Image)

Radiographic object Selection method

[Patient] Uncheck the checkbox.
[Phantom] Check the checkbox.

 Study content (Procedure Intent)

Study content Selection method

[Diagnosis] Select [Diagnostic Intent].
[Therapy] Select [Therapeutic Intent].
[Diagnosis + therapy] Select [Combined Diagnostic and Therapeutic
Procedure].

No. 2B308-200EN*E
292
 (2) Patient position registration
The patient position at the time of examination is recorded as image-related
information.

<1> Click . The corresponding dialog box opens.

<2> Click .

<3> Select the patient position to be registered.

<4> Click to set the selection.

CAUTION: Be sure to confirm that the selected patient position corresponds to

the actual patient position and then set the selection. If an incorrect
position is selected, incorrect data is transferred to the destination
server.

NOTE: For the procedures for checking and editing image-related information, refer
to the reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
293
 (3) Large-screen monitor layout selection (option)
When the optional large-screen monitor is used, the display layout of the
large-screen monitor can be changed using the [Function] dialog.

<1> Click . The corresponding dialog box opens.

<2> Click .

<3> Select the desired layout and then click [Set].

To display all of the layouts, click [All].

<4> Click to set the selection.

NOTE: The large-screen monitor layout can also be selected in the menu display
area of the examination room monitor. Select the layout in the list displayed
by clicking [Layout]. It is also possible to change the layout using [<Layout]
or [Layout>]. For the menu operating procedures, refer to subsection 12.3
"Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and Selecting
Functions".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
294
11.7 FPD Calibration
This subsection describes the FPD calibration procedure.
For the FPD, artifacts may appear in images due to the effects of the internal
temperature etc. These artifacts can be eliminated by performing calibration.

The following two calibration methods are available.

(1) Automatic calibration

At the time of system startup, calibration is automatically performed if
required.

(2) Manual calibration

Calibration can be performed at the desired timing. This method should be
used if artifacts are observed during the study.

<1> Select the FPD Calibration button in the menu display area on the reference
monitor.
Selection buttons for calibration (Fluoroscopy button, Radiography button, All
button) are displayed.

<2> To perform calibration for fluoroscopy, select the Fluoroscopy button.

Selection button Function Processing time (*1)

Fluoroscopy Executes fluoroscopy calibration Approx. 10 to 20 s
Radiography Executes radiography calibration Approx. 10 to 50 s
All Executes calibration for both Approx. 50 to 70 s
fluoroscopy and radiography
Abort Aborts calibration –
EXIT Closes the selection menu –

*1) The processing time may be longer than that indicated here depending on
the conditions.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
295
 Menu display area

Reference monitor

NOTE: 1. For the function button selection procedure in the menu display area, refer to
subsection 12.3 "Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions".

2. Fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed until calibration is

completed.
During calibration, the FPD Calibration display is lit in the status display area
of the fluoroscopic monitor.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
296
12. Image Playback
This section describes the procedure for playing back the acquired images.

Contents 12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image

12.2 Dynamic Image Playback
12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions

No. 2B308-200EN*E
297
NOTE: 1. If the displayed image disappears during operation, switch to another image
and select the target image again.

2. In dynamic image playback, border lines may appear due to a temporary

image shift in the horizontal direction. In this case, reverse the frames and
perform frame-advance playback.

3. The frame from which image playback of the acquired fluoroscopic image is
started can be specified. The frames before the specified frame are not
played back.
If the acquired fluoroscopic image is played back from the first frame, dark
images are played back for the first few frames. To skip these, specify a
playback start frame located after the dark frames in the sequence.
The playback start frame can be set in site setup in Utility mode. For details,
see the reference manual.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
298
12.1 Selecting Map Image/Dynamic Image
The procedure for selecting a map image (reference image) or dynamic
image to be played back is described here.

NOTE: 1. A map image is stored temporarily as a reference image during an

examination. For the procedure for saving map images, refer to the
reference manual.

2. The dynamic image including the selected map image can be played back.
For the playback procedure, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function
Buttons" of the reference manual.

(1) Selecting the desired image from the thumbnail display

Map images or dynamic images can be displayed on the reference monitor
as thumbnails, and the image to be played back can be selected.

(1.1) Switching between menu display and thumbnail display

If the function selection menu is displayed in the thumbnail display area,

press the menu display button. The thumbnails are displayed. To return to
the menu display, press the button again.
[Menu display]

(1.2) Switching between map image thumbnails and dynamic image

thumbnails

Double-click the top of the thumbnail display area, where "MAP" or "RUN" is
displayed, to switch between the display of map image thumbnails and
dynamic image thumbnails.

 MAP: Map image thumbnail

 RUN: Dynamic image thumbnail

No. 2B308-200EN*E
299
 (1.3) Selecting the desired image

Select the desired image by double clicking the corresponding thumbnail.

The selected image is displayed full-screen.

For the procedure for playing back the selected dynamic image, refer to
subsection 12.2 "Dynamic Image Playback".

NOTE: 1. It is possible to change the number of images displayed in the thumbnail

from seven to five. If it has been changed to five images, the size of each
image is enlarged and "view ID" is displayed on each image. In addition, the
radiography angle for the frontal side is displayed at the lower left of the
screen and the radiography angle for the lateral side is displayed at the lower
right of the screen.
For biplane images, the radiographic angle for the frontal side is displayed at
the lower left of the image and the radiographic angle for the lateral side is
displayed at the lower right of the image.
To change the number of images to five, contact your Toshiba service
representative.

2. If a slide bar is displayed in the thumbnail display area, additional thumbnails

are present and can be viewed by scrolling using the mouse.

3. The display can be switched between the map image thumbnails and
dynamic image thumbnails using the corresponding function buttons (if these
functions have been assigned to function buttons). Press the function button
corresponding to the type of thumbnail to be displayed. Pressing the same
button again switches the display to the other type of thumbnail.

: Map image thumbnail display button

: Dynamic image thumbnail display button

4. Each time the menu button assigned to the function button is pressed, the
display is cycled between the menu, dynamic image thumbnails, and map
image thumbnails, in that order.

5. Thumbnails can be selected using the menu operating lever. Move the lever
upward/downward to select the image and press the lever to set the
selection.

6. When two reference monitors are used, the monitor for image display can be
selected using one of the following methods.

 Select the desired thumbnail using the menu operating lever. When the
monitor selection buttons [Ref.1] [Ref.2] are displayed, select the desired
monitor using the lever. Press the lever to set the selection.
 Move the cursor to the target thumbnail using the mouse and press the right
mouse button. The monitor selection buttons [Ref.1] [Ref.2] are displayed.
Move the cursor to [Ref.1] or [Ref.2] as desired and press the right or left
mouse button.
 Move the cursor to [Ref.1] or [Ref.2] as desired and click it to select it. Then,
move the cursor to the desired thumbnail and double-click it.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
300
(2) Selecting images in catalog display mode
Multiple map images or dynamic images can be displayed on the reference
monitor in catalog display mode, and the image to be played back can be
selected.

<1> Switch from full screen display to catalog display using the following buttons
assigned to the function buttons.

Displayed image Function button (*1)

Dynamic image Dynamic image catalog button
Map image Map image catalog button

*1) For details, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function Buttons" of the

reference manual.

<2> Select the image from the catalog using the menu operating lever on the
console. Press the lever to set the image.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
301
 NOTE: In addition to image selection, the following operations can be performed
using the mouse.

 Fullscreen display : Double-click the thumbnail of the desired image.

 Scrolling : Move the cursor to the thumbnail display area and
roll the mouse wheel.
 Menu item selection : Move the cursor to the thumbnail display area,
press the right mouse button, and then select the
desired item from the displayed menu.

Menu Function
Full Screen Displays the image on which the cursor is placed in fullscreen mode.
Home Displays the first page of the thumbnail display.
End Displays the last page of the thumbnail display.
Previous Page Displays the previous page of the thumbnail display.
Next page Displays the next page of the thumbnail display.

(3) Switching to the previous/next image

The image currently displayed full-screen on the monitor can be switched to
the previous image or next image.
Use the Dynamic image file selection button or the Map image file selection
button to switch the image (*1).

 To display the previous image : Press the - end of the button once.
 To display the next image : Press the + end of the button once.

[Dynamic image file *1) Switches are provided with the following consoles.
selection]  Main console
 Review console
 Tableside console
 Satellite console
[Map image file
selection]

NOTE: The bookmark function, which enables image display switching to be

restricted to bookmarked images, is provided. For the procedure for setting
bookmarks, refer to subsection 4.28 "Bookmark" of the reference manual.
Note that if there are no bookmarked images or the bookmark function is
disabled, image display switching can be restricted by selecting the images
between which display switching is to be performed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
302
12.2 Dynamic Image Playback
The procedure for playing back the selected dynamic image is described.

(1) Playback from main console C

Use the following control buttons to control dynamic image playback.

Playback To play back images, press the dynamic image

playback/pause button when image playback is not
being performed.
Pause To pause image playback, press the dynamic image
playback/pause button during image playback.
Playback speed  Fast playback
Press the frame feed/fast playback button during
image playback.
The playback speed increases each time the button is
pressed.
 Slow playback
Press the frame reverse feed/slow playback button
during image playback.
The playback speed reduces each time the button is
pressed.
* To return to the standard playback speed, press the
dynamic image playback/pause button to pause
image playback and then press the button again.
Frame feeding Press the frame feed/fast playback button when image
playback is paused.
Frame reverse feeding Press the frame reverse feed/slow playback button
when image playback is paused.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
303
(2) Image playback from the review console (option)
It is possible to play back dynamic images using the review console (option).
If the shuttle is released, it automatically returns to the center position and
image playback is stopped. To continue image playback, hold the shuttle at
the playback position.

Playback Turn the shuttle clockwise.

To stop playback, return the shuttle to the center
position.
Reverse playback Turn the shuttle counterclockwise.
To stop reverse playback, return the shuttle to the center
position.
Playback speed control Turn the shuttle farther for faster playback.
Frame advance Stop playback and turn the jog clockwise.
Frame reverse Stop playback and turn the jog counterclockwise.

(3) Playback from the tableside console

Use the following operation buttons to control dynamic image playback. The
playback procedure is the same as for playback from the main console. For
details, refer to (1) "Playback from main Console C".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
304
(4) Image playback using the mouse
If dynamic images are displayed full-screen on the monitor, they can be
played back using the mouse. Move the cursor to the reference monitor or
fluoroscopy monitor and operate the mouse as described below.

Playback (*1) To play back images, double-click the left mouse button
when image playback is not being performed.
Stop Double-click the left mouse button during image
playback.
Frame feeding Rotate the mouse wheel backward while image
playback is paused.
Frame reverse feeding Rotate the mouse wheel forward while image playback
is paused.

*1) When the desired dynamic image is selected from the dynamic image
thumbnails by double-clicking it, the selected image is displayed full-screen,
and image playback starts automatically.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
305
 12.3 Switching Between Menus on the Reference Monitor and
Selecting Functions
This subsection describes the procedures for switching between menus on
the reference monitor and selecting the functions to be executed.

(1) Switching between menus

Moving the Menu operating lever to right once switches to the next menu
[Menu operating lever] and to left once switches to the previous menu.

(2) Switching to the HOME menu

Frequently used functions should be set in the HOME menu because it is
possible to immediately switch to the HOME menu.

To switch to the HOME menu, move the Menu operating lever to left or right
and hold it there for more than one second.

(3) Selecting the function buttons

<1> When the Menu operating lever is moved away from you once, the
immediately upper function button is selected; when it is moved toward you
once, the immediately lower function button is selected. If the lever is moved
and held there, the selection highlight continues to move in the
corresponding direction.

The selected button is enclosed by square brackets.

<2> Press the Menu operating lever to execute the selected function.

Switching to the HOME menu

Name A Name B Name C

Function button
selection
HOME
menu

Switching between menus

NOTE: Menu and function buttons can be selected using the mouse.

 Menu selection : Click or on the menu title.

 Function button selection : Click the desired button.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
306
13. Image Processing During a Study
(Exam Mode)
In Exam mode, it is possible to display an image that has already been
acquired during a study and to perform processing operations, including
distance measurement and annotation, on the displayed image. For details,
refer to section 4 "Image Processing During a Study" of the reference
manual.
Note that some image processing operations, such as gradation processing
(which changes the brightness and contrast of the image) and image
magnification, can be performed using the function buttons without switching
to Exam mode. For details, refer to section 2 "Descriptions of Function
Buttons" of the reference manual.

Contents Selecting Exam Mode Transferring Images for 3D

Reconstruction
Selecting Images Image Transfer to Printing Mode
Playing Back Dynamic Images Calibration (Manual)
Adjusting the Image Gradation Bookmark
Displaying Vital Signs Data No Export
Negative/Positive Reversal Setting the Display Position of
Images for Parametric Imaging
Resetting Negative/Positive
Reversal and Gradation Processing
Image Rotation
Image Vertical Inversion
Image Lateral Inversion
Image Rotation/Image Inversion
Reset
Saving Photo Images
Transferring Images to the
Examination Room
Map Image Operation
Annotation
Display Shutter Function
Tracing Angiographic Images
Editing Subtraction Images
Remask (Change of Mask Image)
Distance Measurement
ROI Measurement
Stereo View for Rotational Images
Panoramic View
Checking/Editing the Image-
Related Information

No. 2B308-200EN*E
307
No. 2B308-200EN*E
308
14. Image File Management
(Directory Mode)
Directory mode is used to archive fluoroscopic or radiographic image data
saved (exported) in the RAID to media or DICOM servers and to read
(import) the data saved on media or DICOM servers.

For details, refer to section 5 "Image File Management" of the reference

manual.

Contents Entering Directory Mode

Data Search
Checking the Volume of the Data
Data Deletion
Archiving the Data to a CD-R/DVDR
Data Transfer to a Network Server
Storing Images to the Specified Storage Destination by Image Type
(Auto Server)
Converting the Image File Format
Data Import
Data Transfer to Review Mode
Settings Related to Data Transfer
Editing the Image-Related Information/Checking Edit History
Rearrangement
Database Output
Confirmation of the Processing Status of Import and Export

No. 2B308-200EN*E
309
No. 2B308-200EN*E
310
15. Image Processing After
Completion of a Study (Review
Mode)
Stored images can be manipulated after a study is completed. These
operations are performed in Review mode.

For details, refer to section 6 "Image Processing After Completion of a

Study" of the reference manual.

Contents Selecting the Image to Be Processed

Switching the Target Patient
Playing Back Dynamic Images
Adjusting the Image Gradation
Displaying Vital Signs Data
Saving Photo Images
Annotation
Editing Subtraction Images
Distance Measurement
ROI Measurement
Stereo View for Rotational Images
Panoramic View
Checking/Editing the Image-Related Information
Image Transfer to Printing Mode
Calibration
Bookmark
No Export
Setting the Display Position of Images for Parametric Imaging

No. 2B308-200EN*E
311
No. 2B308-200EN*E
312
16. Printing (Printing Mode)
Printing is a function for printing hard copies of the acquired images. It
provides print-related operations, including changing image arrangements
and image deletion when creating virtual print images on the monitor, and
enables image data to be sent to an output device.

For details, refer to section 7 "Printing" of the reference manual.

Contents Printing Mode Selection

Print
Print Job
Layout Settings
Sheet/Image Arrangement Editing
Editing an Image
Checking the Processing Status of Printing

No. 2B308-200EN*E
313
No. 2B308-200EN*E
314
17. Moving and Storage
Contents 17.1 Moving
17.2 Storage

No. 2B308-200EN*E
315
17.1 Moving
If the unit is to be moved, contact your Toshiba representative. If the unit is
moved by the user or by personnel not designated by Toshiba, the unit may
be damaged.

17.2 Storage
(1) Environmental conditions for storage
The environmental conditions in the room in which the unit is stored should
be as specified below:

Ambient temperature 5°C to 45°C

Relative humidity 30% to 80% (*1)
Atmospheric pressure 500 hPa to 1060 hPa

*1) There should be no condensation. If the humidity exceeds the specified

value, use a dehumidifier or other means to reduce the humidity.

(2) Checks during storage

Preventive maintenance must be performed even during storage.

For the preventive maintenance procedures, refer to section 18 "System

Maintenance".

(3) Checks when resuming use

Before resuming use after storage, check the system referring to subsection
7.1 "Checks Before Operation". If an abnormality is found during the checks,
contact your Toshiba representative for checks and repair.

NOTE: Storage of the X-ray tube assembly with liquid metal bearing (LM tube)
If the LM tube is used in combination, it is recommended that the LM tube be
stored at an ambient temperature of 18°C or higher. If it is stored at a
temperature lower than 18°C, the liquid metal will harden and must be
melted when the system is started up. The time required for melting the
liquid metal differs depending on the storage temperature. For example, if
the LM tube has been stored at 10°C, approximately 10 minutes is required
for melting the liquid metal.
In cases where melting must be performed, 6 minutes or more is required for
system startup.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
316
18. System Maintenance
In order to maintain the safety and performance of the system, maintenance
and inspection are necessary. Users are responsible for the maintenance
and inspection of the system after purchase.

The maintenance checks include daily checks, periodic checks, and

replacement of consumables and periodic replacement parts. Some periodic
checks and replacement procedures for periodic replacement parts require
the use of special tools or are associated with a risk of personal injury, and
special skills are required. Toshiba will perform such preventive
maintenance work on a for-charge basis. Please contact your Toshiba
representative to arrange for maintenance and checks.

Specified service life: Ten years if the preventive maintenance specified by

the manufacturer is performed. [According to self-certification (our data)]
(Note that the specified service life of the general-purpose PC is five years.
If the system is used for more than five years, replacement of the image
processor is required. The service life differs depending on the conditions of
use. Priority should be given to individually specified service life, if any.)
Note that replacement is required for the following parts even if the specified
service life has not elapsed.

Contents 18.1 Daily Checks

18.2 Periodic Inspection
18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts
18.4 Cleaning
18.5 Disinfection
18.6 Sterilization
18.7 Disposal of the System
18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements in the USA
(Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
317
 CAUTION: 1. If any abnormality is found as a result of checks, stop using the system
and contact your Toshiba representative for repair.

2. If preventive maintenance is performed by the user, special care must

be taken to ensure safety.

18.1 Daily Checks

Checks before and after operation must be carried out by the user. For the
check procedures, refer to section 7 "Daily Checks".

18.2 Periodic Inspection

In order to maintain the safety and performance of the system, the following
periodic checks must be carried out. These checks require special skills. Be
sure to contact your Toshiba service representative for details before
performing these checks.

The items with a mark in the S column of the following table are safety check
items.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
318
 (1) CAS-830B/A1

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire system Checking/cleaning the exterior 6 months
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the control switch 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the cables at the upper section of the 1 year
support column arm
Checking the cable routing arm 1 year
Ceiling rail section Checking the travel surface 1 year
Checking the end stopper 1 year 
Checking the rail securing bolt 1 year 
Ceiling longitudinal Checking the basic operation (all strokes: 210 cm) 6 months
movement drive section Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the travel roller 1 year
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Lateral movement drive Checking the basic operation (all strokes: 90 cm) 6 months
section Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the slide guide and travel rail 1 year
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the backlash between the rack and the 1 year
pinion gear
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Ceiling support column Checking the basic operation (±135°) 6 months
rotation section Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the backlash between the motor-side gear 1 year
and the rotation gear
Checking the electromagnetic brake 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the rotation clamp and duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
C-arm rotation mechanism Checking the basic operation (LAO 120°/RAO 180°) 6 months
Checking the safety switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the rotation clamp and duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 

No. 2B308-200EN*E
319
 Check point Check item Interval S
C-arm sliding section Checking the basic operation (CRA 50°/CAU 90°) 6 months
Checking the safety switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the coupling 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 1 year 
Checking the support roller and travel section 1 year
Checking the C-arm drive belt 1 year
Cleaning the roller travel surface 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose and clamp 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
FPD near/away movement Checking the basic operation 6 months
section Checking the safety switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the slide guide and travel rail 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking the drive belt 1 year
Checking the backlash between the rack and the 1 year 
pinion gear
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Checking the lifter frame 1 year
Checking the interior of the cover 1 year
Checking the roller screen 1 year
FPD rotation section Checking the basic operation 6 months
Checking the stop switch 1 year
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking the drive V belt 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the timing belt 1 year 
Checking the coolant hose and joint clamp of the 1 year
rotation section
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Checking the interior of the cover 1 year
Checking the detector section (rear of the FPD input 1 year
screen)
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section 1 year

No. 2B308-200EN*E
320
 Check point Check item Interval S
X-ray tube support section Checking the important securing sections (*1) 1 year 
Checking the X-ray tube cover (*1) 1 year
Checking the joint of the water-cooling hose (*2) (*3) 1 year
Checking the important securing sections (*2) (*3) 1 year 
X-ray beam limiting device Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
rotation section Checking the basic operation 6 months
Checking the rotation bearing 1 year
Checking the safety Checking the touch sensors 6 months 
functions Checking the override operation 6 months 
Checking the Emergency stop button operation 1 year 
Control box Checking for dust 1 year 
Replacing the fuses 1 year
Power-supply section Checking the line voltage 1 year
Checking the output voltages of the switching power 1 year
supply
Coolant circulator type E Checking the coolant hose for damage 6 months
Cleaning the air vent of the coolant circulator 1 year
Checking the coolant temperature and coolant 6 months
pressure in the coolant circulator
Checking the amount of coolant in the coolant 3 months
circulator
Checking the quality of coolant in the coolant 6 months
circulator
Replacing the coolant 2 years
Checking for coolant leakage in the coolant 3 months
circulator
Replacing the arrester 2 years

*1) For systems that use a 8-inch FPD in combination.

*2) For systems that use a 12-inch FPD in combination.

*3) For systems that use a 12  16-inch FPD in combination.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
321
 (2) CAS-930A

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire system Checking/cleaning the exterior 6 months
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the control switch 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the cables at the upper section of the 1 year
support column arm
Checking the cable routing arm 1 year
Ceiling rail section Checking the travel surface 1 year
Checking the end stopper 1 year 
Checking the rail securing bolt 1 year 
Ceiling longitudinal Checking the basic operation (all strokes: 210 cm) 6 months
movement drive section Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the travel roller 1 year
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Lateral movement drive Checking the basic operation (all strokes: 90 cm) 6 months
section Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the slide guide and travel rail 1 year
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the backlash between the rack and the 1 year
pinion gear
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Ceiling support column Checking the basic operation (135) 6 months
rotation section Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the backlash between the motor-side gear 1 year
and the rotation gear
Checking the electromagnetic brake 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the rotation clamp and duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
C-arm rotation mechanism Checking the basic operation (LAO 120/RAO 180) 6 months
Checking the safety switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the rotation clamp and duct hose 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 

No. 2B308-200EN*E
322
 Check point Check item Interval S
C-arm sliding section Checking the basic operation (CRA 50/CAU 90) 6 months
Checking the safety switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the coupling 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking/lubricating the drive chain 1 year 
Checking the support roller and travel section 1 year
Checking the C-arm drive belt 1 year
Cleaning the roller travel surface 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose and clamp 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
FPD near/away movement Checking the basic operation 6 months
and FPD rotation sections Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the slide guide 1 year
Checking the drive shaft 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the cable and protection tube 6 months 
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Checking the coolant hose and joint clamp of the 1 year 
rotation section
Checking the interior of the cover 1 year
Checking the detector section (rear of the FPD input 1 year
screen)
Checking the grid attachment/detachment section 1 year
X-ray tube support section Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Checking the joint of the water-cooling hose 1 year
X-ray beam limiting device Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
rotation section Checking the basic operation 6 months
Checking the rotation bearing 1 year
Checking the safety Checking the touch sensors 6 months 
functions Checking the override operation 6 months 
Checking the Emergency stop button operation 1 year 
Control box Checking for dust 1 year 
Replacing the fuses 1 year
Power-supply section Checking the line voltage 1 year
Checking the output voltages of the switching power 1 year
supply

No. 2B308-200EN*E
323
 Check point Check item Interval S
Coolant circulator type E Checking the coolant hose for damage 6 months
Cleaning the air vent of the coolant circulator 1 year
Checking the coolant temperature and coolant 6 months
pressure in the coolant circulator
Checking the amount of coolant in the coolant 3 months
circulator
Checking the quality of coolant in the coolant 6 months
circulator
Replacing the coolant 2 years
Checking for coolant leakage in the coolant 3 months
circulator
Replacing the arrester 2 years
Support column sliding Checking the basic operation 6 months
section Checking the safety switch 1 year 
Checking the drive motor 1 year
Checking the coupling 1 year
Checking the speed reducer 1 year 
Checking the R-guide rail travel section 1 year
Checking the support column slide drive belt 1 year 
Checking the mechanical stopper 1 year 
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the duct hose and clamp 1 year
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 

(3) BLA-900A, BLA-900C

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire system Checking the grounding 1 year 
Checking the labels 6 months 
Checking the input line voltage 1 year
Checking the functions Checking the rectangular blades 6 months
Checking the compensation filters for smooth 6 months
movement
Checking the compensation filters for smooth 6 months
rotation
Checking for smooth selection of the beam- 6 months
hardening filter
Checking the rotation of the entire beam limiting 6 months
device
Checking the dose meter cable 6 months
Checking the important securing sections 1 year 

No. 2B308-200EN*E
324
 (4) CAT-850B/CAT-860B

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance check Checking/cleaning the exterior 1 year
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the tabletop mat 1 year
(*1)
Entire unit Checking the performance 1 year 
Checking the cable connections 1 year
Checking the connector connections 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the grounding 1 year 
Tabletop vertical movement Checking the anchor securing status 1 year 
section Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Checking the stop switch 1 year 
Checking the motor 1 year
Checking the belt 1 year
Checking the linear guide 1 year
Checking the lead screw 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the encoder and potentiometer 1 year
Checking the bolt for the rotation-prevention nut 1 year
Tabletop longitudinal Checking the electromagnetic brake 1 year
movement section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the cross roller guide 1 year
Checking the potentiometer 1 year
Tabletop lateral movement Checking the electromagnetic brake 1 year
section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the cross roller guide 1 year
Checking the potentiometer 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Tabletop rotation section Checking the electromagnetic brake 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the potentiometer 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Stepping DSA kit Checking the stop switch 1 year 
(when the XBSD-850B is Checking the motor 1 year
built in) Checking the belt tension and checking for damage 1 year
Checking the drive pinion 1 year
Checking the encoder and potentiometer 1 year
Control/display panel Checking the operation and display 1 year
Accessories and optional Checking the tabletop control switch 1 year
parts Checking the footswitch 1 year
Checking the operation and display 1 year
(*2)
Table control switch Checking the securing bolts 1 year
Checking operation and display 1 year
(*2)
Center lock mechanism Checking the lateral locking mechanism 1 year
Checking the rotation locking mechanism 1 year
(*1) Checking the Emergency stop button

(*2) CAT-860B only

No. 2B308-200EN*E
325
 (5) CAT-880B

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance check Checking the external appearance 1 year
Checking the labels 1 year 
Checking the tabletop mat 1 year
(*1)
Entire unit Checking the performance 1 year 
Checking the cable connections 1 year
Checking the connector connections 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the grounding 1 year 
Tabletop rotation section Checking the brake pad 1 year 
Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the potentiometer 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the bearing bolts 1 year
Replacing the fuses 1 year
Tabletop vertical movement Checking the anchor bolt securing status 1 year 
section Checking the important securing sections 1 year 
Checking the stop switch/interlock switch 1 year 
Checking the motor 1 year
Checking the chains/lubrication oils 1 year
Checking the linear guide 1 year
Checking the lead screw 1 year
Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the bolt for the rotation-prevention nut 1 year
Replacing the arrester 2 years
Tabletop longitudinal tilt Checking the interlock switch 1 year 
section Checking the belt 1 year
Checking the jack 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the bracket securing bolts 1 year 
Checking the shaft brackets 1 year 
Checking the securing bolts for bearing housing 1 year 
Checking the H/U mechanical stopper 1 year 
Checking the tightness of ETP BUSH 1 year
Checking the shaft securing bolts 1 year 

No. 2B308-200EN*E
326
 Check point Check item Interval S
Tabletop lateral movement Checking the magnet brake 1 year
section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the cross roller guide 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Tabletop lateral tilt section Checking the linear guide 1 year
Checking the lead screws 1 year
Checking the block securing for cam-follower 1 year 
Checking the securing for cam-follower 1 year 
Checking the cable routing 1 year
Checking the belt 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the bearing securing bolts 1 year 
Checking the cam-follower guide 1 year
Checking the spring for the cover 1 year
Tabletop longitudinal Checking the magnet brake 1 year
movement section Checking the mechanical stopper securing status 1 year 
Checking the cross roller guide 1 year
Checking the fall-prevention mechanism 1 year
Checking the drive units 1 year
Checking the encoder 1 year
Checking the cam-follower guide 1 year
Control/display panel Visual checking 1 year
Checking the operation and display 1 year
Accessories and optional Checking the tabletop control switch 1 year
parts Checking the footswitch 1 year
Checking the drape holder 1 year
Checking the accessory table rail 1 year
Checking the hand grip 1 year

(*1) Checking the Emergency stop button

No. 2B308-200EN*E
327
 (6) DFP-8000B/B2

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance Checking the labels 1 year
Cleaning the interior of the system 6 months
Cleaning the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and main 6 months
console
Cleaning the PWBs 1 year
Replacing the fuses 1 year
Checking the cables and connectors 1 year
Checking cooling fan operation 6 months
Tightening the screws in each section 1 year
Checking fan operation of the FPD command 6 months
processor
Cleaning the exterior of the FPD command 6 months
processor
Single unit Checking the input line voltage 1 year
Checking the DC line voltage 1 year
Checking the batteries on PWBs 1 year
Replacing the RAID power supplies 5 years
Replacing the RAID BBU (battery backup unit) 5 years
Replacing the RAID disks 5 years
Replacing the RAID controller 5 years
System Hardware self-diagnosis test 1 year
Windows system file backup 6 months

No. 2B308-200EN*E
328
 (7) XTP-8100XG

Check point Check item Interval S

External appearance Checking the labels 1 year 
Cleaning the interior of the system 6 months
Checking the cables and connectors 1 year
Periodic replacement of the fuses 1 year
Checking the cooling fan operation 6 months
Checking the amount of insulation oil 1 year
Replacing the battery 2 years
Replacing the electrolytic capacitors 7 years
Water-cooled unit and high- Checking the amount of coolant 3 months
voltage cable for the X-ray Checking the interior of the coolant tank 3 months
tube
Checking the pump 6 months
Checking the circulating coolant filter 1 year
Checking the high-voltage cable 1 year
Checking for coolant leakage from the coolant hose 6 months
Checking the pH of the coolant 3 months
X-ray output Checking the radiographic tube voltage/current 3 months
Checking the fluoroscopic tube voltage/current 3 months
Checking the pulsed fluoroscopic tube 1 year
voltage/current
Checking the fluoroscopy timer 6 months
Activation of the getter Activating the getter electrode of the LM tube 3 months
electrode

No. 2B308-200EN*E
329
 (8) MSF-04A, MSF-06A, MSF-56A

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Checking appearance, cleaning 6 months 
Checking labels 1 year 
Checking movement 1 year
Lateral ceiling rails Checking travel surface of rails 1 year
Checking the longitudinal travel rollers 1 year 
Checking float prevention rollers 1 year
Checking the wobble prevention rollers 1 year
Checking end stoppers 1 year 
Checking important securing sections 1 year 
Travel base section Checking travel rollers 1 year 
Checking float prevention rollers 1 year
Checking wobble prevention rollers 1 year
Checking operation of lateral movement friction 1 year
brake
Checking movement of support column rotation 1 year
shaft friction brake
Checking important securing sections 1 year 
Support column section Inspection, lubrication of roller chain 1 year 
Inspecting roller chain sprocket 1 year 
Inspecting securing block for roller chain terminals 1 year 
Inspecting gas spring 1 year
Inspecting both ends of gas spring 1 year
Inspecting roller units 1 year
Inspecting end stopper 1 year 
Checking important securing sections 1 year 
Monitor frame section Checking important securing sections 1 year 
Wiring Inspecting cable duct hose 1 year
Inspecting the securing side of the cable hanger 1 year
Inspecting the travel surface of the cable hanger 1 year
Inspecting hose clamp, hose band 1 year
Inspecting the terminal box and terminal board 1 year

No. 2B308-200EN*E
330
 (9) Entire system

Check point Check item Interval S

Power supply Checking the grounding 1 year 
Checking the input line voltage 1 year
Electrical safety test Measuring the enclosure current 1 year 
Measuring the patient leakage current 1 year 
Power linkage within the System power linkage 6 months
system Emergency stop operation 6 months
Checking the system and Checking the fluoroscopic ABC operation 1 year
image quality Checking the radiographic ABC operation 1 year
Checking the ABC incident dose and image level 1 year
Checking the dose limit adjustment 1 year
(patient incident dose level)
Checking F-ACT operation 1 year
(estimation of DA conditions)
Checking F-ACT operation 1 year
(estimation of DSA conditions)
Checking the monitor adjustment 1 year
Checking the fluoroscopic image quality 1 year
Checking the DA image quality 1 year
Checking the DSA image quality 1 year
Checking the area dose meter 2 years
Performing gain calibration 6 months
Checking the SNRF (Super Noise Reduction Filter) 1 year
Checking the DPRF (Digital Pattern Recognition 1 year
Filter)
Injector Interlock operation test 1 year
Electrical safety check 1 year  (*1)

(*1) Checking the leakage current

(10) X-ray grid attachment unit

Check point Check item Interval S

Entire unit Appearance check, cleaning 6 months
Operational checks (checking whether the X-ray 6 months 
grid can be inserted properly, operational check of
the touch sensor)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
331
18.3 Periodically Replaced Parts
In order to maintain the safety, specifications, and performance of the
product, periodic replacement is required for some parts even within the
rated service life of the system.

(1) Periodically replaced parts

Special techniques are required for the replacement of periodic replacement
parts. Toshiba performs replacement work for the parts listed below at the
user's expense.

The replacement interval is defined for each part according to the

specifications and performance of the product.

<1> CAS-830B

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Battery 3 years Control box A01-PWB
Touch sensor 3 years For the FPD
Roll screen 3 years FPD near/away movement section
Duct hose 3 years FPD near/away movement section
(without slits) 5 years C-arm sliding section
5 years From the ceiling to the support column rotation section
Duct hose 3 years FPD near/away movement section
(with slits) 3 years C-arm sliding section
3 years From the ceiling to the support column rotation section
Microswitches 3 years Ceiling longitudinal travel section
3 years Ceiling lateral travel section
3 years Ceiling support column rotation section
3 years C-arm sliding section
3 years C-arm rotation section, C-arm sliding section
3 years FPD near/away movement section
3 years FPD rotation section
Photocouplers 3 years C-arm rotation section
3 years FPD near/away movement section
Encoder 3 years Ceiling longitudinal travel section, ceiling lateral travel
section, ceiling support column rotation section, C-arm
rotation section, C-arm sliding section, FPD near/away
movement section, FPD rotation section
Magnet brake 3 years Ceiling support column rotation section
Cable routing arm 3 years Arm box, support column arm
clamp
Coolant 2 years Coolant circulator, type E
Arrester 2 years Coolant circulator, type E

No. 2B308-200EN*E
332
 <2> CAS-930A

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Battery 3 years Control box
Touch sensor 3 years For the FPD
Duct hose 3 years C-arm sliding section, between the support sliding holder
(without slits) and the support column rotation section
5 years Between the ceiling and the support sliding holder section
Duct hose 3 years C-arm sliding section, between the support sliding holder
(with slits) and the support column rotation section
3 years Between the ceiling and the support sliding holder section
Microswitches 3 years Ceiling longitudinal travel section
3 years Ceiling lateral travel section
3 years Ceiling support column rotation section
3 years C-arm sliding section, support sliding section
3 years C-arm rotation section, C-arm sliding section
3 years FPD near/away movement section
3 years FPD rotation section
Photocouplers 3 years C-arm rotation section
3 years FPD rotation section
Encoder 3 years Ceiling longitudinal travel section, ceiling lateral travel
section, ceiling support column rotation section, C-arm
rotation section, C-arm sliding section, FPD near/away
movement section, FPD rotation section, support sliding
section
Magnet brake 3 years Ceiling support column rotation section
Cable routing arm 3 years Arm box, support column arm
clamp
Dosimeter cable 3 years Between the cabinet and the X-ray tube assembly
Bush at the C-arm 2 years C-arm sliding section
slide duct hose
clamp section
FPD near/away 3 years Between the cabinet and the FPD near/away movement
movement encoder section
cable
C-arm sliding 6 years Between the C-arm rotation relay section and the C-arm
encoder cable sliding encoder
FPD signal/power 6 years Between the cabinet and the FPD near/away movement
cable section
FPD rotation motor 3 years Between the cabinet and the FPD near/away movement
cable (power section
supply, I/O)
Metal grounding 6 years Between the cabinet and the X-ray tube assembly
cable
Coolant 2 years Coolant circulator, type E
Arrester 2 years Coolant circulator, type E
Fuse 1 year For wireless foot switch power supply line (when a wireless
foot switch is used)
0.5 A (quick)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
333
 <3> CAT-850B, CAT-860B

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Microswitch 3 years Tabletop vertical movement limit switch
3 years Tabletop longitudinal movement limit switch
(when the XBSD-850B is used in combination)
Contactor 3 years For setting the tabletop vertical movement holding brake
ON/OFF
Potentiometer 3 years Tabletop vertical movement section, tabletop longitudinal
movement section, tabletop lateral movement section
Magnet brake 3 years Tabletop rotation locking
3 years Tabletop longitudinal movement locking (one), tabletop
lateral movement locking (two)
Patient 3 years Band for securing the patient to the extension tabletop
immobilization band
Extension tabletop 3 years Band for securing the extension tabletop to the
securing band catheterization table
Battery 1 year Wireless footswitch (option)

<4> CAT-880B

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Microswitch 3 years Tabletop vertical movement limit switch
3 years Tabletop longitudinal movement limit switch
3 years Tabletop vertical movement interlock switch
3 years Tabletop lateral movement initial switch
3 years Tabletop longitudinal tilting interlock switch
3 years Tabletop rotational brake operation detection switch
Contactor 5 years For servo amplifier drive power supply
SSR 5 years For tabletop rotation brake
5 years For servo motor brake
Potentiometer 3 years Tabletop rotation
Magnet brake 3 years Tabletop longitudinal movement locking (one)
3 years Tabletop lateral movement locking (two)
Photocoupler 3 years Tabletop longitudinal tilting initial switch
3 years Tabletop lateral tilting initial switch
3 years Tabletop rotational center detector
3 years Tabletop rotational brake operation detector
3 years Solenoid operation detector
Patient 1 year Band for securing the patient to the catheterization table.
immobilization band
Zipper tube 3 years Tabletop rotation section (in the pit)
3 years Longitudinal tilting section
3 years Vertical movement section
Fastener tube 3 years Tabletop lateral movement section
Battery 2 years For TABLE CONT PWB
Disk spring 5 years For tabletop rotation locking
Spring 3 years Lateral tilt cover
Arrester 2 years Tabletop vertical movement section
Battery 1 year Wireless footswitch (option)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
334
 <5> DFP-8000B/B2

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Fuse 1 year 10 A (slow-blow), system controller F1
1 year 0.5 A (time-lag), system controller F3, F4
1 year 1 A (time-lag), system controller F6
XIDF-ESD801 F2
1 year 2 A (time-lag)
XIDF-ESD801 F1
1 year 3 A (time-lag), system controller F5
1 year 5 A (time-lag), system controller F7, F8, F10
1 year 6.25 A (time-lag), system controller F2
1 year 15 A (slow-blow), CCB F1
1 year 6 A (quick), SYS-IF F2
1 year 3.15 A (normal), SYS-IF F1, F3
1 year 5 A (time-lag), DVI-Tx (F) F1
Battery 3 years POWER PC
3 years ADIF
5 years SERVER PC
RAID power 5 years Power supply for RAID
supply
RAID BBU 5 years Battery backup unit for RAID
RAID disks 5 years RAID disk drives
RAID controller 5 years Controller for RAID

<6> XTP-8100XG

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Fuse 1 year Power Cabinet F1 to F5
Battery 2 years GXC-V1
Electrolytic 3 years X-ray high-voltage generator
capacitors
Pump 10000 hours Water-cooled heat exchanger HEX-125
Coolant 2 years For HEX-125
Coolant for the X-ray tube

<7> BLA-900A, BLA-900C

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Ion chamber 2 years Rotation section of the X-ray beam limiting device
relay cable

<8> MSF-04A, MSF-06A, MSF-56A

Replacement
Part name Application/Location
interval
Gas spring 5 years Support column
Cable duct hose 5 years Monitor suspension main unit

No. 2B308-200EN*E
335
(2) Recommended replacement parts

Part name Replacement interval

System disk 5 years
Servo amplifier 3 years
Inverter unit 3 years
Tabletop mat 3 years
X-ray tube cover 3 years
Joint box side cable suspension 5 years
arm clamp parts (CAS-930A)
Bush and resin washer used at 5 years
the C-arm slide duct hose
clamp section (CAS-930A)

(3) Consumable parts

<1> CD-R

In this system, the following CD-Rs (or equivalent) can be used.

For the operating procedures, refer to the operation manual provided with
the CD-R that is used.

Note that the performance of the media cannot be guaranteed. In no event

shall Toshiba be liable for problems caused by the media, such as loss of
data from the media or inability to save data on the media.

Manufacturer Storage capacity Speed

Taiyo Yuden CD-R 700 MB 2 to 48
Mitsubishi Chemical CD-R 700 MB 2 to 48

<2> DVD±R

In this system, the following DVD±R (or equivalent) can be used.

For the operating procedures, refer to the operation manual provided with
the DVD±R that is used.

Note that the performance of the media cannot be guaranteed. In no event

shall Toshiba be liable for problems caused by the media, such as loss of
data from the media or inability to save data on the media.

Manufacturer Storage capacity Supporting speed

Taiyo Yuden Single layer 4.7 GB 16 speed (maximum 24
writing speed)
Mitsubishi Chemical Single layer 4.7 GB 16 speed (maximum 20
writing speed)
Sony Single layer 4.7 GB 16 speed

No. 2B308-200EN*E
336
18.4 Cleaning
After operating the unit, clean the main unit, the optional units, and the room.

If cleaning is performed by a cleaning agency, ensure that they are aware of

the following WARNING and CAUTION instructions.

WARNING: 1. If disinfection is required due to the presence of blood etc., perform

thorough disinfection referring to subsection 18.5 "Disinfection".

2. Turn OFF the power to the unit before cleaning. If the power is ON, a
malfunction may occur, resulting in an accident.
Entry of liquids such as water or detergent into the unit could result in
a short circuit or electric shock.

3. If the arm of the support unit needs to be moved during cleaning, turn
ON the power switch after fully wiping off liquid such as water and
detergent from the surrounding area of the support unit, and then
operate it in a normal manner. Forcible movement of the arm may
cause an error. After the arm is moved, immediately turn OFF the
power switch.

4. Do not pour or spray liquids such as disinfectant, detergent, or water

on the system. Entry of liquids into the system may cause a
malfunction or an accident.

5. Do not pour liquids such as water or detergent on the floor. Entry of

liquids into the system or into the cable pit may cause a malfunction or
an accident.

6. Cleaning of the support unit, top of the monitor support, ceiling rails,
and other units located high above the floor should be performed by a
professional cleaning agency. Never work on a stepladder etc.

7. When the FPD cover etc. on the top of the arm of the support unit is to
be cleaned, set the arm rotation angle or slide angle to 90 to move the
part to be cleaned to a sufficiently low position for safety.

CAUTION: Do not clean the system with organic solvents (such as paint thinner) or
abrasive cleansers. They may cause surface damage or discoloration.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
337
(1) Cleaning the unit
Wipe off stains with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent.

Dilute the mild detergent to the concentration specified by the manufacturer.

Moisten a soft cloth with diluted detergent and then wring the cloth out firmly
so that the detergent does not drip from the cloth.

Wipe off the stains and then wipe the unit again with a dry soft cloth.

(2) Cleaning of the room

Remove dust from the room using a vacuum cleaner. When cleaning the
floor, use a tightly wrung out mop or cloth so that water does not drip.

(3) Cleaning the tabletop mat (XBTM-001A) cover

Turn the cover inside out and clean it with the fastener open. Observe the
following precautions.

 When the cover is washed, the water temperature used for washing should
be 95C or less.
 The cover should not be chlorine-bleached, dry cleaned, or ironed.
 When the cover is dried in a dryer, the temperature should be set to low.
 The tabletop mat cannot be washed. Clean it according to the procedure in
step (1) "Cleaning the unit".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
338
18.5 Disinfection
Disinfect the surfaces of the unit, accessories, and options according to the
instructions of the hospital's infection control officer.

WARNING: 1. Disinfect all sections that come into contact with the operator or
patient after each study. Disinfect other sections everyday.

2. After disinfection, ventilate the room thoroughly before turning ON the

power. If any flammable gases remain in the room, there is a danger of
fire or explosion when the power is turned ON.

3. Do not pour or spray disinfectant on the unit. Entry of disinfectant into

the unit may cause a malfunction or an accident.

4. Be sure to turn OFF the power of the unit before disinfection. If power
is supplied, an accident may occur due to unintended operation of the
unit when control switches are touched.
If liquid enters the unit, a fire or electric shock may occur.

CAUTION: 1. Do not use the types of disinfectants listed below. They will damage the
system. The performance and safety of the system cannot be guaranteed if
it has been damaged by use of an unsuitable disinfectant.

 Disinfectants that are excessively corrosive to metal or rubber, such as

chlorine-based disinfectants.
 Disinfectants that have instructions stating that they are inappropriate for
any of the following: metal, plastic, rubber, or painted surfaces.
 Disinfectants that may enter the system, such as formalin gas or spray-
type agents.

2. Disinfect the system only when necessary. Performing disinfection many

times may result in discoloration or cracking of the surface finish or in
damage to rubber or plastic parts. If the system appears to be harmed by a
disinfectant, immediately stop using the system. Contact your Toshiba
representative for repair.

3. Wipe off disinfectants thoroughly after the system has been disinfected.
Failure to do so may result in discoloration or cracking of the surface finish or
in damage to rubber or plastic parts. If the system appears to be harmed by
a disinfectant, immediately stop using the system. Contact your Toshiba
representative for repair.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
339
 (1) Recommended disinfectants
The disinfectants listed below can be used on this unit. Read the handling
instructions for the disinfectant to be used and fully understand its
characteristics and precautions before using it.

 Glutaraldehyde
 Benzalkonium chloride
 Ethanol for disinfection (Do not use this on the synthetic rubber on the front
panel of the control console.)

(2) Disinfection procedures

Wipe the surface of the unit with a cloth moistened with the disinfectant and
tightly wrung out. Be careful not to allow disinfectant to enter the unit.

18.6 Sterilization
Sterilization cannot be performed for this system. If a sterile environment is
required, use sterile caps or sheets.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
340
18.7 Disposal of the System
This system contains harmful materials such as lead (for shielding X-rays)
and batteries. If these materials are left outdoors, environmental
contamination may result.

When disposing of this system, contact your Toshiba representative.

NOTE: 1. The following information is only for EEA countries.

(1) Concerning the WEEE label (Directive 2002/96/EC)

The use of this symbol indicates that this product

should not be treated as household waste.
By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly,
you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could
otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste-handling
of this product. For more detailed information
concerning the return and recycling of this product,
please consult the supplier from whom you purchased
the product.
* For system products, this label may be attached to the main unit only.

(2) Concerning BATTERIES (Directive 2006/66/EC)

The directive 2006/66/EC requires separate collection

and appropriate disposal of spent batteries.

This product contains batteries that are not

intended to be replaced by the user.
Replacement of those batteries will usually be done
during regular maintenance or service by service staff
who can also arrange proper disposal.

2. Regulatory information

The high-efficiency LCD backlights used in this product contain 5 mg or less

of mercury, the disposal of which may be regulated due to environmental
considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or
the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).
This information is only for the U.S.A.

3. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.

See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
This is applicable to California, U.S.A., only.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
341
18.8 Periodic Inspection Based on Requirements in the USA
(Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act)
Perform periodic inspection based on requirements in the USA.
The points to be checked in the periodic inspection are listed below.
Of the items required by the standards, items that are not included in the
following list have already been checked at the time of shipment from the
factory. It is not necessary to check these items again.

Details of periodic inspection are described in the performance check

manual for this system.
Perform this periodic inspection at the local distributor or service office.

(1) DFP-8000B/B2, XTP-8100XG

Items to be checked Check interval

(a) Air kerma rate Once/year
(b) Reproducibility and linearity When the inverter unit or the high-
voltage transformer installed in the
X-ray high-voltage generator is
replaced
(c) Peak tube potential Once/year
(d) Tube current Once/year
(e) Automatic exposure control When the XSUB PWB of the X-ray
limits high-voltage generator is replaced
(f) Displayed AKR and Once/2 years
cumulative air kerma

(2) Beam limiting device

Items to be checked Check interval

(a) Beam quality  When the X-ray tube assembly is
replaced
 When the X-ray beam limiting device
is replaced
(b) Alignment of the X-ray field  When the X-ray tube assembly is
with the fluoroscopic image replaced
receptor
 When the X-ray beam limiting device
is replaced
 When the FPD is replaced

No. 2B308-200EN*E
342
19. Specifications
Contents 19.1 Electrical Safety
19.2 Support Unit
19.3 Catheterization Table
19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device
19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly
19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)
19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit
19.8 TV Monitors (for image display)
19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG)
19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000B/B2)
19.11 Power Requirements
19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options
19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections
19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
343
19.1 Electrical Safety
Classification and the standard values are based on IEC 60601-1: 2005.

(a) Type of protection against electric shock:

Class I (permanently installed equipment)

(b) Degree of protection against electric shock:

Equipment including type B applied parts (only for the catheterization table)

(c) Leakage current

Current path Normal status Single fault condition

Enclosure leakage current 0.1 mA or less 0.5 mA or less
Touch current
Ground leakage current 5 mA or less 10 mA or less
Patient leakage current DC 0.01 mA or less DC 0.05 mA or less
AC 0.1 mA or less AC 0.5 mA or less
Total patient leakage DC 0.05 mA or less DC 0.1 mA or less
current AC 0.5 mA or less AC 1.0 mA or less

No. 2B308-200EN*E
344
 19.2 Support Unit
(1) System movement
The movement range and the maximum movement speed of each operation
of the system are shown in the table below. Note that the movement range
may be restricted depending on the following conditions.

 The layout of the examination room

 The arm setting position relative to the patient
 Whether angulation is performed in two directions (LAO/RAO and
CRA/CAU) at the same time
 The status of units used in combination such as the height of the tabletop of
the catheterization table

CAS-830B/A1 CAS-930A
C-arm rotation Movement range LAO120° to RAO180 LAO120° to RAO180
Rotation speed Max. 30/s (*1) Max. 30/s (*1)
C-arm sliding Movement range LAO50° to RAO90 LAO50° to RAO90 (*6)
Sliding speed Max. 20/s Max. 20/s (*1)
Support column sliding Movement range LAO50° to RAO30 (*6)
Sliding speed Max. 10/s
FPD near/away Movement distance  When the 8-inch FPD or 300 mm
movement 12-inch FPD is used in
combination: 350 mm
 When the 12  16-inch FPD is
used in combination: 300 mm
Movement speed Max. 100 mm/s Max. 100 mm/s
SID (Distance 900 mm to 1250 mm 900 mm to 1200 mm
between X-ray focus
and FPD input
surface)
Support column rotation Movement range Approx. +135 to approx. -135 Approx. +135 to approx. -135
Movement speed 10°/s (*2) 10°/s (*2)
Longitudinal movement in Movement range 2100 mm (*3) 2100 mm (*3)
the ceiling travel direction
Movement speed Max. 200 mm/s (*4) Max. 200 mm/s (*4)
Lateral movement in the Movement range 900 mm (*5) 900 mm (*5)
ceiling travel direction
Movement speed Max. 200 mm/s (*4) Max. 200 mm/s (*4)

*1) Refer to the table below for the C-arm rotation speed and C-arm sliding
speed in radiography with the optional function. Note that the C-arm
sliding speed is for C-arm sliding performed as a combination of sliding
of the C-arm itself and sliding of the support column.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
345
 C-arm rotation speed
C-arm rotation speed
(set at the patient left
Optional function (set at the patient head end)
or right side)
CAS-830B/A1 CAS-930A CAS-930A
Rotational DA Max. 50/s Max. 50/s Max. 50/s
3D-Angio
(3D-DSA, 3D-DA, Max. 50/s Max. 50/s Max. 80/s
3D-LD)
Rotational DSA Max. 40/s Max. 40/s Max. 40/s
LCI Max. 25/s Max. 50/s Max. 50/s
Max. 50/s (*7)

*2) When operation is performed locally using the support column rotation
button on the support column of the support unit, the speed is limited to
6/s.

*3) 900 mm when a CT system is used in combination

*4) When operation is performed locally using the support column rotation
button on the support column of the support unit, the speed is limited to
150 mm/s.

*5) 2250 mm when a CT system is used in combination

*6) Movement range of C-arm sliding performed as a combination of sliding

of the C-arm itself and sliding of the support column

Movement range
(With the C-arm set at the patient left
or right side)
Manual operation LAO90° to RAO90
3D Angiography LAO90° to RAO120

*7) Only when the TFP-1216A/C1 is used in combination

Other) While the Override button is held down, the operation speed is limited
to 1/3 of the maximum speed for all operations.

(2) Standard dimensions

CAS-830B/A1 CAS-930A
Isocenter height 1050 mm 1050 mm
Inner diameter of the C-arm Approx. 890 mm Approx. 890 mm
C-arm offset - -
C-arm reach Approx. 890 mm Approx. 890 mm
Focus-to-skin distance (FSD) Min. 300 mm Min. 300 mm
Focus-to-isocenter distance 696 mm 696 mm

No. 2B308-200EN*E
346
(3) Mass

CAS-830B/A1 CAS-930A
Main unit (*) Max. approx. 850 kg Max. approx. 1533 kg
Control cabinet Approx. 110 kg Approx. 120 kg

*) The mass includes that of the peripheral units such as the FPD, X-ray
tube assembly, etc.

(4) Finishing
Finish color: Toshiba standard white

(5) Input surface of the FPD and the central axis of the X-ray
beam cone

 8-inch FPD or 12-inch FPD : The central axis of the X-ray beam cone is
perpendicular to the input surface of the FPD.

 12  16-inch FPD : The central axis of the X-ray beam cone is

almost perpendicular to the input surface of the
FPD. It is tilted by 1.4° relative to the
perpendicular in the direction corresponding to
an increased X-ray tube target angle.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
347
 19.3 Catheterization Table
(1) System movement

CAT-850B CAT-860B CAT-880B

Longitudinal movement 1,350 mm 1,500 mm 1,350 mm
Lateral movement 200 mm 200 mm 200 mm
Tabletop rotation +90° to -180° +90° to -180° -90° to +90°
Tabletop vertical movement stroke 775 mm to 1,150 mm 775 mm to 1,100 mm 754 mm to 1,054 mm
Tabletop vertical movement speed Approx. 20 mm/s Approx. 20 mm/s Approx. 20 mm/s
Tabletop tilting stroke - - -16° to +16°
Tabletop tilting speed - - Tabletop longitudinal
tilting: Approx. 1.5°/s
Tabletop lateral
tilting: Approx. 3°/s

(2) Standard dimensions

CAT-850B CAT-860B CAT-880B

Tabletop length 2,950 mm 3,150 mm 2,950 mm
Tabletop width (chest) 450 mm 450 mm 450 mm

(3) Permissible load

Maximum permissible Maximum patient Maximum weight of

load weight accessories and options
CAT-850B 240 kg 220 kg 20 kg
CAT-860B 220 kg 200 kg (*1) 20 kg
CAT-880B 270 kg 250 kg 20 kg

*1) 98 kg when the extension tabletop XBET-860B (option) is used in

combination

(4) Additional load

CAT-850B/CAT-860B/CAT-880B
Additional load at the time of cardiopulmonary 100 kg
resuscitation (CPR)

(5) Inherent filtration (aluminum equivalent)

Tube voltage: 100 kV (HVL) Tube voltage: 100 kV (HVL)

3.7 mm aluminum 3.6 mm aluminum
Tabletop (thickest position) Maximum 1.5 mm Maximum 1.5 mm
Arm cover Approx. 0.3 mm Approx. 0.2 mm
Tabletop mat Approx. 0.4 mm Approx. 0.5 mm
Tabletop mat (XBTM-001A) Approx. 0.5 mm Approx. 0.5 mm
Arm support Approx. 0.7 mm Approx. 0.6 mm
Armrest Approx. 0.4 mm Approx. 0.3 mm
Extension tabletop (XBET-860B) Approx. 0.5 mm Approx. 0.5 mm

No. 2B308-200EN*E
348
 19.4 X-ray Beam Limiting Device

BLA-900A BLA-900C
X-ray exposure field (square) Maximum Approx. 400  400 mm (*1) Approx. 340  340 mm (*1)
Minimum 10  10 mm (*2)
X-ray exposure field (circular) Maximum
Minimum
Leakage dose Dose 0.75 mGy/h or less
(Including the leakage dose from the X-ray tube)
Conditions 1000 mm from the focus
125 kV, 18 mA
Minimum inherent filtration 1.8 mm Aleq (*3) 2.0 mm Aleq (*3)
Beam hardening filter Filter F1: Copper 0.2 mm
(Aluminum equivalent = Value (Approx. 6 mm Aleq) (*3)
at a tube voltage of 70 kV)
F2: Copper 0.3 mm
(Approx. 8 mm Aleq) (*3)
F4: Copper 0.5 mm
(Approx. 13 mm Aleq) (*3)
F5: Copper 0.9 mm
(Approx. 22 mm Aleq)
(*3)
F3: Aluminum 1.8 mm F3: Aluminum 2.0 mm
Movement Automatic after registration in the acquisition program.
Compensation filters Material Stainless steel
Heart/straight type : 19 mm Aleq (*3)
Straight type : 16 mm Aleq (*3)
Shape/Number Heart/straight type : 1 each for left/right
Straight type : 1
Rotation range Approx. 60° (Filter Approx. 135° (Filter
rotation, opening, and rotation, opening, and
closing can be performed closing can be performed
independently.) independently.)
Rotation time Approx. 3 seconds/120° Approx. 9 seconds/270°
(minimum)
Automatic operation Programmed setting of compensation filter positions
linked with auto-positioning is possible.
Beam limiting device rotation Rotation range 135°

*1) X-ray exposure field on a plane surface 900 mm away from the X-ray focus

*2) X-ray exposure field on a plane surface 1330 mm away from the X-ray focus

*3) Tube voltage: 70 kV (HVL), 2.5 mm aluminum or

Tube voltage: 75 kV (HVL), 2.7 mm aluminum

No. 2B308-200EN*E
349
19.5 X-ray Tube Assembly
X-ray tube assembly with liquid metal bearing
(hereinafter referred to as the LM tube)
DSRX-T7345GFS DSRX-T7444GDS DSRX-T7445GFS
Focus size (mm) 0.3/0.6/1.0 0.5/0.8 0.4/0.6/0.9
Short-time maximum input (kW) 17/48/100 50/100 30/50/100
Target angle (°) 11 8 9
Anode heat capacity (kHU) 3000 3000 3000
Maximum anode cooling rate 5.5 kW (7700 HU/s) 5.5 kW (7700 HU/s) 5.5 kW (7700 HU/s)
Inherent filtration 1.1 mm Aleq 1.1 mm Aleq 1.1 mm Aleq
(Tube voltage 75 kV) (Tube voltage 75 kV) (Tube voltage 75 kV)
Total filtration For systems with the For systems with the For systems with the
BLA-900A: BLA-900C: BLA-900A:
2.9 mm aluminum or 3.1 mm aluminum or 2.9 mm aluminum or
equivalent equivalent equivalent

*) For systems with the DSRX-T7345GFS, when a 12  16-inch FPD is

used in combination, the edge of the X-ray exposure field may be
excluded if a small SID is set.

*) The total filtration is the sum of the inherent filtration of the X-ray tube
assembly and the filtration of the beam hardening filter in the X-ray beam
limiting device. For the filtration of the beam hardening filter, refer to
subsection 19.4 "X-ray Beam Limiting Device".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
350
19.6 X-ray Flat Panel Detector (FPD)
8-inch FPD 12-inch FPD
TFP-800A/A1 TFP-1200A
TFP-800A/C1 TFP-1200C1
FOV size 198.7 mm  198.7 mm (8"  8") 298.0 mm  298.0 mm (12"  12")
173.8 mm  173.8 mm (7"  7") 248.3 mm  248.3 mm (10"  10")
149.0 mm  149.0 mm (6"  6") 198.7 mm  198.7 mm (8"  8")
124.2 mm  124.2 mm (5"  5") 149.0 mm  149.0 mm (6"  6")
Active area 194 mm  194 mm 294.1 mm  294.1 mm
Pixel size 194 m  194 m 194 m  194 m
Output image 1024  1024 1536  1536
format
(Digital output)  Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less  Acquisition rate of 12 fps or less
 Nonbinning  Nonbinning for the entire area
512  512 1024  1024
 Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less  Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
 Binning  Nonbinning for the central area
768  768
 Acquisition rate of 30 fps or less
 Binning for the entire area
512  512
 Acquisition rate of 60 fps or less
 Readout for pixel addition for the
central area
Output image 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
format composite synchronization signal composite synchronization signal
(Analog output) 1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75  1 Vp-p, termination resistor: 75 
Resolution (Lp/mm) 2.6 (nonbinning) 2.6 (nonbinning)
DQE (%) TFP-800A/A1: 65% or more TFP-1200A: 65% or more
(0 lp/mm) (0 lp/mm)
TFP-800A/C1: 77% (0 lp/mm) TFP-1200A/C1: 77% (0 lp/mm)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
351
 12  16-inch FPD
TFP-1216A/A1
TFP-1216A/C1
FOV size 298.0 mm  397.3 mm (12"  16")
298.0 mm  298.0 mm (12"  12")
198.7 mm  198.7 mm (8"  8")
149.0 mm  149.0 mm (6"  6")
Active area 292.2 mm  391.5 mm
Pixel size 194 m  194 m
Output image TFP-1216A/A1, /C1:
format
(Digital output) 1536  2048
 Acquisition rate 6 fps or less
 Nonbinning for the entire area
1024  1024
 Acquisition rate 30 fps or less
 Nonbinning for the central area
768  1024
 Acquisition rate 30 fps or less
 Binning for the entire area
TFP-1216A/C1:
512  512
 Acquisition rate 60 fps or less
 Readout for pixel addition for the central
area
Output image 1125 lines, interlaced, 60 Hz, video
format composite synchronization signal 1 Vp-p,
(Analog output) termination resistor: 75 
Resolution (lp/mm) 2.6 lp/mm
DQE (%) TFP-1216A/A1: 65% or more (0 lp/mm)
TFP-1216A/C1: 77% or more (0 lp/mm)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
352
19.7 Monitor Suspension Unit
(1) Monitors

Maximum Monitors that can be installed

loading No. of Type Mass Maximum Maximum
capacity monitors width height
IDI1000F-2WCA 44 kg 2 19-inch LCD 11.4 kg or less 460 mm 370 mm
IDI1000F-3WCA 3 monitor or (each monitor)
smaller
IDI1000F-4WCA 4
IDI1000F-6WCA 6
MSF-04A 30 kg 4 10 kg or less
MSF-06A 45 kg 6 (each monitor)
MSF-56A 65 kg 1 Large-screen 50 kg or less 1319 mm 776 mm
monitor (each monitor)
2 19-inch LCD 10 kg or less 460 mm 370 mm
monitor or (each monitor)
smaller

(2) System movement

(2.1) IDI1000F-2WCA/IDI1000F-3WCA/IDI1000F-4WCA/IDI1000F-6WCA

(a) Operation method : Manual operation (no holding brake)

(b) Longitudinal movement : 4010 mm (*1)

(c) Lateral movement : 1524 mm

(d) Ceiling base rotation : ±180°

(e) Monitor frame rotation : ±150°

(f) Monitor tray tilt : ±10°

(g) Up/down movement of the monitor : 622 mm

*1) May be limited depending on the layout

(2.2) MSF-56A/MSF-04A/MSF-06A

(a) Operation method : Manual operation (no holding brake)

(b) Longitudinal movement : 3928 mm (*1)

(c) Lateral movement : 2472 mm (*2)

(d) Support column rotation : ±180

(e) Support column vertical movement : 350 mm

*1) May be limited depending on the layout.

*2) 2946 mm when the lateral rails for flat panel monitor suspension XGMR-
MSF021 (option) is used in combination.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
353
19.8 TV Monitors (for image display)
(1) Standard monitors

System monitor (LCD)

Fluoroscopic
or
monitor/reference monitor
Ext. signal display monitor
Model name ML19193, CL19196 or CDL2013-1A or equivalent
equivalent
Monitor model name – –
Screen size 19 inches 21.3 inches
Color/monochrome Monochrome Color
Resolution 1280  1024 pixels 1600  1200 pixels
2
Maximum brightness ML19193: 1400 cd/m –
(0.7 Vp-p input) CL19196: 800 cd/m2
Scanning frequency
Vertical 75 Hz 60 Hz
Horizontal 80 kHz 75 kHz
Automatic brightness Provided None
control function
Tilt mechanism Provided Provided

(2) Optional monitors

Large-screen monitor Large monitor

(for fluoroscopic and reference (for fluoroscopic and Backup monitor
images) reference images)
For the examination room For the examination room For the examination room
Model name XMEZ-LMM021 (*1) XMEZ-LMM021/A2 (*1) ML19193, CL19196 or
equivalent
Monitor model name LS560W, MDSC-8156RL (*3), MDSC-8258MNA –
or MDSC-8258RL (*3)
Screen size 56.2 inches or 58 inches 58 inches 19 inches
Color/monochrome Color Color Monochrome
Resolution 3840  2160 pixels 3840  2160 pixels 1280  1024 pixels
2 2
Maximum brightness 450 cd/m (56.2 inches) 700 cd/m ML19193: 1400 cd/m2
(0.7 Vp-p input) 700 cd/m2 (58.0 inches) CL19196: 800 cd/m2
Scanning frequency
Vertical 60 Hz 60 Hz (standard) 75 Hz
Horizontal 130 kHz 130 kHz 80 kHz
Automatic brightness Provided Provided Provided
control function

No. 2B308-200EN*E
354
 Monitor integration system
For the control room
Model name XMEZ-LMMCR1 (*2)
Monitor model name MX270W
Screen size 27 inches
Color/monochrome Color
Resolution 2560  1440 pixels
2
Maximum brightness 300 cd/m
(0.7 Vp-p input)
Scanning frequency
Vertical 29.5 to 61 Hz
Horizontal 31 to 89 kHz
Automatic brightness Provided
control function

*1) This kit is for the large-screen monitor and includes the large-screen monitor
(the model name of the monitor is different from the model name of the kit).
*2) This kit is for the monitor integration system and includes the integrated
monitor (the model name of the monitor is different from the model name of
the kit).
*3) This monitor can be used in combination with the XMEZ-LMM021/A1.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
355
19.9 X-ray High-Voltage Generator (XTP-8100XG)
(1) Rating

High-voltage generation method Inverter type

Short-time rating 1250 mA 80 kV (0.1 second)
1000 mA 100 kV (0.1 second)
800 mA 125 kV (0.1 second)
Long-time rating Continuous fluoroscopy: 125 kV, 4 mA
Pulsed fluoroscopy: 120 kV, 200 mA (peak) (*1)
*1) This is limited by the rating of the X-ray tube
assembly.
Maximum nominal electric power 100 kW
(*2) *2) Product of the maximum tube current that
can be used at a tube voltage of 100 kV and
the tube voltage (100 kV)
(Loading time: 0.1 second)
Generator duty cycle:
200 mA @ 125 kV: 8.8%
400 mA @ 125 kV: 4.4%
800 mA @ 125 kV: 2.2%
1000 mA @ 100 kV: 2.2%

(2) Radiographic condition ranges

The radiographic conditions for the radiographic techniques described above
are set automatically. However, if desired, the radiographic conditions can
be set manually for each technique within the ranges described below.

Tube voltage setting range 50 kV to 125 kV (2-kV steps)

Tube current setting range 20 mA to 1000 mA (16 steps) (*1)
*1) This is limited by the rating of the X-ray tube
assembly.
Acquisition time setting range DSA : 1.0 ms to 100 ms
DA : 1.0 ms to 25 ms
One-shot radiography : 1.0 ms to 100 ms
Available mAs range
 One-shot radiography > 0.5 mAs, < 125 mAs
 DSA < 100 mAs

No. 2B308-200EN*E
356
 (3) Fluoroscopy
(a) Fluoroscopy (continuous fluoroscopy)

Tube voltage range 50 kV to 125 kV

Tube current range 0.5 mA to 4 mA (The minimum tube current
for manual setting is 0.5 mA.)
Fluoroscopic time setting (*1)
 Setting range 1 to 5 minutes (in steps of 1 minute)
 Function The buzzer sounds when the time reaches the
preset time. If fluoroscopy is performed
continuously for 10 minutes, fluoroscopy is
automatically interrupted.

*1) Systems shipped to the USA in June 2006 onwards have the following
specifications.

 Setting range : Fixed to 5 minutes (setting is not possible)

 Function : A buzzer sounds at the end of 5 minutes of

fluoroscopy.

(b) Pulsed fluoroscopy

Tube voltage range 50 kV to 120 kV

(restricted depending on the rating of the
X-ray tube assembly)
Tube current range 10 mA to 200 mA
(restricted depending on the rating of the
X-ray tube assembly)
Pulse width 1.0 ms to 13.3 ms
(restricted depending on the rating of the
X-ray tube assembly and the repetition pulse
rate)
Repetition pulse rate 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 exp/s

No. 2B308-200EN*E
357
19.10 Digital Radiography System (DFP-8000B/B2)
(1) Image input section
2
(a) Input image : 1024 , 30 fps (maximum)
2
512 , 60 fps (maximum) (*1, 2)

*1) When the 12-inch FPD is used in

combination, select an FOV of 8" or
less.
*2) Excluding systems in which the
12  16-inch FPD is used in
combination.

(b) Bit depth : 14 bits (when the FPD is combined)

(2) Image recording unit

(a) Image disk capacity : 144 GB (RAID level 5)

(b) Standard number of images

2
 1024 8/10/12 bits : Approximately 118,800/95,000/79,200
(maximum)
2
 512 8/10/12 bits : Approximately 473,000/379,000/316,000
(maximum)
(*) These are the numbers when the
maximum number of frames are
recorded per dynamic image.
When a different number of frames is
used, the number of images that can be
recorded may decrease.

(3) Image display section

(a) Fluoroscopic/reference monitors

 Display system : A fluoroscopic image output system and a

radiographic image output system are
provided in both the examination room and
the control room.
(When the XIDF-REF801 (option) is used in
combination, another image output system is
added in both the examination room and the
control room.)

 Image display : 1280  1024, 75 Hz, monochrome

(BNC connection for VIDEO, H, V)
1280  1024, 60 Hz, monochrome
(DVI-D connection)

(b) System monitor

 Display system : One system for the control room

 Image display : 1600  1200, 60 Hz, color or monochrome

(BNC connection for R, G, B, H, V)
1600  1200, 60 Hz, color
(DVI-D connection)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
358
(4) Fluoroscopy
2
(a) Input image : 1024 , 10 bits

(b) Pulse rate (can be selected

and set at the time of
installation) : Continuous, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20,
30 exp/s

(c) Fluoroscopy mode selection : Two modes (normal/high) (*1), three modes
(low/normal/high), or four modes
(low/mid/normal/high) are available.

*1) Two modes: Only for USA

(d) Fluoroscopic image processing:

 Noise reduction spatial filter

 Signal enhancement spatial filter
 Recursive filter
 Gray-scale processing
 Dynamic range compression
 Display gamma processing (monitor correction)

(e) Fluoroscopic image operation:

 Image magnification
 Image rotation
 Subtraction
 Peak hold
 Image addition

(f) Graphic display : The X-ray exposure field, compensation

filter, ABC ROI, and AEC ROI are
graphically displayed on LIH images.

(g) Fluoroscopic image recording

 Still image recording : An LIH image or a frame acquired at the

desired timing during fluoroscopy (*1) can be
recorded on the image disk.

*1) Only when the F-Store function is set to

OFF (disabled).

 Dynamic image recording : A dynamic image for the set maximum time
(up to 90 s and within 1020 frames) can be
recorded on the image disk.
In addition, the fluoroscopic images for a
certain period of time (initial value: 10 s)
from the end of fluoroscopy can be recorded
on the image disk by operating the system
after fluoroscopy is completed (F-Store
function).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
359
(h) Spot fluoroscopy
: The area outside the specified ROI is
shielded from X-rays and fluoroscopy is
performed only for the ROI. The latest LIH
image is displayed for the area outside the
ROI.

(5) Fluoroscopy roadmapping processing

 Subtraction : Blood vessels and the guide wire can be

visualized using radiographic or fluoroscopic
images as mask images. Mask images are
generated from fluoroscopic images by
performing peak-trace processing, summed
averaging, bottom trace processing, or LIH
processing. It is also possible to use DSA
radiographic images as mask images.

 Landmark image display : Background images (mask images, bones,

and blood vessels containing contrast
medium) and the guide wire are displayed
by roadmapping. Radiographic images are
used as mask images.

 Fluoroscopy roadmapping image acquisition

a) Still image acquisition : An LIH image or a frame acquired at the

desired timing during fluoroscopy (*1)
can be recorded on the image disk.

*1) Only when the F-Store function is

set to OFF (disabled).

b) Dynamic image acquisition: A dynamic image for the set maximum

time (up to 90 s and within 1020 frames)
can be recorded on the image disk.
In addition, the fluoroscopic images for a
certain period of time (initial value: 10 s)
from the end of fluoroscopy can be
recorded on the image disk by operating
the system after fluoroscopy is completed
(F-Store function).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
360
(6) Study protocols/acquisition programs
(a) Study protocols : Acquisition programs (max. 50), parameters
in Fluoroscopy mode, UI customization data,
and C-arm auto-positioning data (max. 64)
can be preset.

(b) Number of registered study

protocols : 100 (maximum)

(c) Acquisition programs : The radiographic technique, image

acquisition parameters, X-ray radiographic
conditions, View ID, etc. can be preset.

(d) Acquisition program

selection : Manual selection and automatic selection
synchronized with auto-positioning are
possible.

(7) Radiography
The following radiographic techniques can be set.

(a) DSA function

Using the DSA function, images of blood vessels only are extracted by
subtracting mask images acquired before injection of contrast medium from
contrast images acquired after injection of contrast medium. Continuous
DSA is performed by using pulsed X-rays to acquire radiographic images.
To enable subtraction to be performed correctly, the X-ray conditions in DSA
are fixed (the mask and contrast images must be acquired under the same
conditions).

 Acquisition mode (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

2
1024 12 bits 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15, 30 fps

 Stage setting : Mask 1 stage + Contrast 5 stages

(maximum)

 Stage common parameters : Acquisition matrix, number of bits

 Stage individual parameters : Acquisition rate, number of acquisition

frames, delay between stages

 Summed averaging during

radiography : Mask (1 to 32 frames), Live (1 to 8 frames)

 Acquisition time : 600 seconds or 1023 frames (maximum)

(Sum of the mask stage and the contrast
stages)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
361
(b) DA function

Using the DA function, digital acquisition of images using pulsed X-rays is

performed.

 Acquisition mode (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

2
1024 8/10/12 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30 fps
2
512 8/10/12 bits (*1) 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30, 60 fps (*2)

*1) For systems in which the 12  16-inch FPD is used in combination,

2
512 cannot be selected.
*2) When acquisition is performed at a rate of 60 fps in systems with the
12-inch FPD used in combination, select an FOV of 8" or less.

 Acquisition time : 600 seconds or 2400 frames (maximum)

(2047 frames for systems using a
12  16-inch FPD.)

 X-ray conditions : ABC operation is performed during

radiography by estimating the radiographic
conditions from the immediately preceding
fluoroscopic conditions.

(c) One-shot radiography function

Using the one-shot radiography function, a digital radiographic image can be

acquired by performing radiography once during fluoroscopy. This function
is useful for checking the insertion position of the catheter and for observing
and recording the conditions during angioplasty.
2
 Acquisition mode : 1024 , 12 bits (A single frame is recorded.)

 Radiographic conditions : The radiographic conditions are estimated

from the immediately preceding fluoroscopic
conditions.

 Image operations : Dynamic range compression, spatial filter

processing, grayscale processing, and
image rotation

(d) Rotation DA function (manual rotation)

Image acquisition with DA can be performed continuously between two

specified points while the C-arm is rotated or slid.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
362
(e) Rotational DA function (optional)

Image acquisition with DA can be performed continuously between two

specified points while C-arm rotation or sliding is performed or C-arm
rotation and sliding are performed simultaneously.

 Acquisition mode

Acquisition mode Acquisition rate

2
1024 8/10/12 bits 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30 fps
2
512 8/10/12 bits (*1) 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5 10, 15, 30, 60 fps (*2)

*1) For systems in which the 12  16-inch FPD is used in combination,

2
512 cannot be selected.
*2) When acquisition is performed at a rate of 60 fps in systems with the
12-inch FPD used in combination, select an FOV of 8" or less.

 Acquisition program : The rotation angle, rotation direction, and

rotation speed of the support unit can be
preset in the acquisition program.

(f) Rotational DSA function (optional)

 Acquisition mode : X-ray control using the angle trigger method

is employed. The mean image acquisition
speed changes as the support unit rotation
speed changes.
2
1024 , 12 bits : Approximately 1 to 25 fps

 Rotation mode : Mask-Return-Contrast acquisition (MRC

method)
Mask-Contrast acquisition (MC method)
Mask-Return-Contrast 1-Contrast 2 (MRCC
method)
Mask-Contrast 1-Contrast 2 (MCC method)

 Acquisition program : The rotation angle, rotation direction, and

rotation speed of the support unit can be
preset in the acquisition program.

 Stage common parameters : Acquisition matrix, number of bits, rotation

speed, acquisition rate, and number of
acquisition frames

 Stage individual parameters : Delay between stages

 Support unit rotation maximum speed

Patient head-end set Patient left side or right side set

Rotation direction
position position
LAO/RAO 40°/s 30°/s (CAS-830B)
40°/s (CAS-930A)
CAU/CRA 20°/s 20°/s

 X-ray radiation timing : The support unit angles at the time of each
mask image acquisition and the
corresponding contrast image acquisition
can be matched. (Angle trigger method)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
363
 (g) Stepping DSA function (optional)

 Number of steps : Maximum 7 steps/8 stages

 Step speed : 1.7 s or less/step (step width: 220 mm)

 Acquisition mode (can be selected and set at the time of installation)

Acquisition mode
2
1024 , 12 bits 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15 fps

 Other : The radiographic conditions and the

compensation filter position can be set for
each stage.

(h) 3D-Angio function (optional)

 Data acquisition range

Support unit C-arm set position Data acquisition range

CAS-830B, CAS-930A Set at the patient head end RAO100 to LAO100
CAS-930A Set at the patient side LAO85 to RAO115
(support column rotation angle: +90)
Set at the patient side RAO85 to LAO115
(support column rotation angle: -90)

 Movement speed

Support unit C-arm set position C-arm movement speed

CAS-830B, CAS-930A Set at the patient head end Max. 50/s
CAS-930A Set at the patient side Max. 80/s

 Radiography technique : 3D-DSA, 3D-DA, and 3D-LD

 Rotational modes

a) 3D-DSA : Mask - Return - Contrast acquisition (MRC

method)
Mask - Contrast acquisition (MC method)

b) 3D-DA : Contrast acquisition (C method)

c) 3D-LD : Contrast acquisition (C method)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
364
  Types of reconstruction images

a) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images

b) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images, device image extracted

from mask image, and device 3D display (*1)

c) Bone image and blood vessel image extracted from contrast image of
3D-DSA images, and bone and blood vessel 3D display

d) Blood vessel 3D display from 3D-DSA images, bone image extracted

from mask image, and bone 3D display (*2)

e) 3D display from 3D-DA images

f) 3D display from 3D-LD images

 3D-DSA, 3D-DA, 3D-LD acquisition mode

2
1024 , 12 bits

1/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 30°/s (*3)

2/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 50°/s
2
512 , 12 bits (only for 3D-DSA and 3D-DA when the TFP-1216A/C1 is used
in combination)

1/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 50°/s

 3D-DSA, 3D-DA, 3D-LD acquisition mode (CAS-930A: set at the patient left
or right side)

10242, 12 bits

1/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 30°/s (*3)

2/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 50°/s
3.2/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 80°/s
2
512 , 12 bits (for acquisition modes other than 3D-LD)

1/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 50°/s

2/frame : Maximum C-arm rotation speed 80°/s

*1) Superimposed display of the blood vessels and the device (device fusion)
can be performed using the corresponding workstation function.
*2) It is possible to superimpose and display blood vessel image and bone
image (bone fusion), depending on the function of the workstation used in
combination.
*3) When the maximum C-arm rotation speed of 30°/s is selected, acquisition is
performed at intervals of 1.2/frame.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
365
 (i) LCI (Low Contrast Imaging) acquisition function (optional)

Images used to generate LCI images are acquired.

 Data acquisition range

Support unit C-arm set position Data acquisition range

CAS-830B, CAS-930A Set at the patient head end RAO100 to LAO100
CAS-930A Set at the patient side LAO85 to
(support column rotation angle: +90) RAO approx. 110
Set at the patient side RAO85 to
(support column rotation angle: -90) LAO approx. 110

 Rotation speed

Support unit Rotation speed

CAS-830B Up to 25/s (when an FPD other than the TFP-1216A/C1
is used in combination)
Up to 50/s (when the TFP-1216A/C1 is used in
combination)
CAS-930A Up to 50/s

 Radiographic techniques : LCI-Fast, LCI-Middle, LCI-High (Quality)

 Rotation mode : Contrast acquisition (C method)

 Reconstruction image type : 3D display using LCI images (mainly MPR)

3D display using Fine Voxel image
Reduction of metal artifacts

 LCI acquisition mode (CAS-830B)

2
a) 1024 , 12 bits
2
LCI-Fast acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 250
frames, 25/s
2
LCI-Middle acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 400
frames, 15/s
2
LCI-High acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 600
frames, 10/s
2
b) 512 , 12 bits (when the TFP-1216A/C1 is used in combination)
2
LCI-Fast HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 220
frames, 50/s
2
LCI-Middle HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 380
frames, 30/s
2
LCI-High HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 580
frames, 20/s

No. 2B308-200EN*E
366
 LCI acquisition mode (CAS-930A: set at the patient head end)
2
a) 1024 , 12 bits
2
LCI-Fast acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 250
frames, 25/s
2
LCI-Middle acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 400
frames, 15/s
2
LCI-High acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 600
frames, 10/s
2
b) 512 , 12 bits
2
LCI-Fast HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 220
frames, 50/s
2
LCI-Middle HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 380
frames, 30/s
2
LCI-High HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 580
frames, 20/s

 LCI acquisition mode (CAS-930A: set at the patient left or right side)
2
a) 1024 , 12 bits
2
LCI-Fast acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 250
frames, 25°/s
2
LCI-Middle acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 400
frames, 15°/s
2
LCI-High acquisition : 1024 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 580
frames, 10°/s
2
b) 512 , 12 bits
2
LCI-Fast HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 220
frames, 50°/s
2
LCI-Middle HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 380
frames, 30°/s
2
LCI-High HS acquisition : 512 , 12 bits, acquisition of approx. 580
frames, 20°/s

No. 2B308-200EN*E
367
(8) Image processing
The following image processing operations can be performed for
radiographic images in the control or examination room.

 Spatial filter processing

 Gray-scale processing
 Scattered radiation correction processing (*1)
 Negative/positive reversal
 Display gamma function (monitor correction/several non-linear gamma
functions selectable by the user) (*1)
 Image magnification (magnification ratio: 1.0 to 5.0), panning
 Summed average (mask/live addition for up to 64 frames (maximum))
 Subtraction
 Landmarking
 Scanned image inversion (*2)
 Image inversion (lateral inversion, vertical inversion) (*2)
 Image rotation (An image can be rotated to the desired angle during
fluoroscopy or radiography. It is also possible to automatically rotate an
image so that the head end of the tabletop always comes to the top of the
monitor regardless of the C-arm insertion direction.)
 Auto-windowing
 Auto pixel shift (The amount of shift (mismatch) between mask images and
live images caused by motion artifacts is detected and is automatically
corrected or is corrected in the specified ROI.)
 Manual pixel shift (*2)
 Annotation (characters, arrows, segments, rectangles, circles) (*2)
 Shutter display
The shutter can be displayed manually or automatically. In automatic mode,
the shutter is applied to the beam limiting device blade position of the last
frame. Note that shutter display is temporarily canceled while a dynamic
image is being played back on the system monitor.
 Storage of processed images
The image is displayed with the previous processing function applied. In
addition, it is possible to return the processed image to the original (the
image at the time of acquisition) (*3).
 Peak/Bottom trace function (*2)
 Panoramic view (*2)
 SNRF processing
This is a digital image processing filter that can reduce noise from a dynamic
image without afterimage. This function is useful not only for fluoroscopic
images but also radiographic images.
 Stereo view (using rotational DSA images) (*2)

*1) These parameters are preset in the examination protocols.

They cannot be changed in units of image.
*2) These image processing operations can only be performed from the control
room.
*3) The applicable image processing functions depend on the software version.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
368
(9) Analysis functions
(a) Distance measurement

(b) Simplified stenosis ratio measurement (comparison calculation using two

measured lengths)

(c) Calibration

 Automatic calibration : Automatic calculation is performed based on

the support unit and table location
information. Calculation is performed
assuming that the object is located at the
isocenter.

 Manual calibration : Calculation is performed by using a

calibration object or by entering the PID.

(10) Parallel processing

While fluoroscopy or fluorography/radiography is being performed in the
examination room, the following processing operations can be performed
independently in the control room. Note, however, that there are some
limitations.

(a) Image selection, image playback (*1), and image processing for a desired
patient

(b) Reference image recording

(c) Photo image recording

(d) Image analysis

(e) Imager output (*2)

(f) Recording on external media (*2)

(g) Network transfer/receive (*2)

*1) The following limitations apply.

 Dynamic image playback cannot be performed simultaneously on the

reference monitor and system monitor.

 Image playback is stopped during fluoroscopy roadmapping, rotational DSA,

3D radiography, or stepping DSA.

 When images acquired in rotational DSA, 3D radiography, or stepping DSA

are played back in dynamic mode on the examination room monitor or
system monitor, other image playback operations are stopped.

*2) Imager output, media recording, and network transfer/receive can be

performed in the background. Background processing may take a while.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
369
(11) Vital sign data
(a) Display channel : The two channels for the electrocardiogram
and the blood-pressure waveform are
displayed independently.

(b) Acquisition : Acquired at the same time as the

radiographic images (saved with the
corresponding images)

(c) Transfer : DICOM transfer is possible as image-related

information. Recording on external media is
possible in the DICOM format.

(12) Image storage

(a) CD-R recording

 Images to be recorded : Dynamic images, still images

 Related information : Patient information, study information, vital

sign data

 Recording method : Compliance with DICOM 3.0.

2 2
(512 or 1024 , 8/10/12 bits, JPEG lossless
compression)
 Recording image frames : Approximately 4800 images maximum
2
(512 , 8 bits)

 Recording operation : Manual or automatic background recording

can be performed after completing a study
(Finish Study).

(b) DVD±R recording

 Images to be recorded : Dynamic images, still images

 Related information : Patient information, study information, vital

sign data

 Recording method : Compliance with DICOM 3.0.

2 2
(512 or 1024 , 8/10/12 bits, JPEG lossless
compression)

 Recording operation : Manual or automatic background recording

can be performed after completing an
examination.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
370
(13) Study appointments
(a) Number of appointments : 200 or more

(b) Appointment items : Patient ID, patient name, sex, date of birth,
study protocols, examining physician, other

* The scheduled study date is registered at the time of patient information

registration and the appointment information can be retrieved and managed.

(c) Appointment method

 Keyboard entry

 DICOM MWM

For a previously examined patient, a new appointment can be made after

retrieving the existing patient information and study information. (Up to
10,000 study histories can be stored.)

(d) Previous image reference ("Prevision")

 Previous images to be referred to during a study (DICOM XA images) can be

set at the time of making an appointment.

 The previous images can be imported from the following locations to the
image disk.

 CD-R/DVDR/DVD RAM

 Network server

* This function will be limited depending on the specifications of the connected

dynamic image PACS and those of the stored images.

(14) Imager output

 DICOM print (imager connection)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
371
(15) Function for supporting personal information protection
and security countermeasures

 User authentication

Identification and authentication by user ID and password

 User management/user's right management

Restriction of usable functions according to user's eligibility

 Audit trace (audit log)

Recording event logs related to personal information lifecycle, system

operation, and security

 Urgent user

For the user who is not registered in the system, it is possible to use the
minimal functions required for performing examination.

 Screen lock

When the system is not used for a given length of time, it is possible to
automatically lock the screen. Note that if the system is being used in
examination, the screen is not locked.

(16) Dose management (optional)

The ionization chamber of the area dose meter is installed on the front
surface of the beam limiting device (inside the X-ray tube cover). Dose
management can be performed during examination.

(a) Display of the dose rate during fluoroscopy and radiography (fluoroscopic
monitor and system monitor)

(b) The total dose is displayed when neither fluoroscopy nor radiography is
being performed.

(c) Recording of the dose as related information in each study

(d) DICOM MPPS or DICOM RDS output of the total dose for each study as a
study result
(The dose information can also be stored as image data.)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
372
(17) Network function
The following network functions are supported. (A connection check is
required at the time of actual connection.)

For the conformity specifications, refer to DICOM Conformance Statement.

(a) DICOM Storage (Storage SCU) : Image transfer

(b) DICOM Storage Commitment : Check of image storage

(Storage Commitment SCU)

(c) DICOM Query/Retrieve SCU, Storage SCP : Image search and image
retrieval

*) XA images can be handled. This function will be limited depending on

the specifications of the connected dynamic image PACS and those of
the stored images.

(d) DICOM Modality Worklist Management : Retrieval of patient and

examination information

(e) DICOM Modality Performed Procedure Step : Examination result response

(f) DICOM Radiation Dose Structured Report : Output of the structured

report concerning the dose

(18) External signal input (option)

Video signals of one of the following types can be selected and input. In
addition, the signals can be output and displayed on the external display
monitor (option).

(a) 1280  1024 (SXGA) or 1600  1200 (UXGA)

(b) NTSC or PAL

No. 2B308-200EN*E
373
19.11 Power Requirements
(1) Rating of the circuit breaker
(a) Three-phase power supply

Line voltage 380/400/415/440/480 V 200 V (*1)

Rated current 100 A 150 A
Circuit breaker  Must not trip at 200 A for 10 seconds.  Must not trip at 400 A for 10 seconds.
characteristics
 Must not trip at 400 A for 1 second.  Must not trip at 800 A for 1 second.
 Must not trip at 1000 A for 0.01 second.  Must not trip at 1600 A for 0.01 second.

(b) Single-phase power supply

Line voltage 200/220/230/240 V

Rated current 40 A
Circuit breaker  Must not trip at 400 A for 0.1 second.
characteristics
 Must not trip at 600 A for 0.01 second.
 Must not trip at 1000 A for 0.01 second.

(2) Permissible power impedance

(3-phase) : 380 V 0.08  or less
400 V 0.09  or less
415 V 0.09  or less
440 V 0.10  or less
480 V 0.12  or less
200 V (*1) 0.043  or less

No. 2B308-200EN*E
374
 (3) Recommended capacity of the
three-phase distribution
transformer : 100 kVA or more

Line voltage Line frequency Line capacity Line voltage fluctuation

XTP-8100XG Three-phase 400 V 50-60 Hz Max. ±10% or less
(When ST-7008 is used: 220 V) 160 kVA
Single-phase 100 V (nominal
maximum
power
output)
Max.
10 kVA
(long-term
rated output)
DFP-8000B/B2 Three-phase 50-60 Hz Max. ±10% or less
 380/400/415/440/480 VAC 170 kVA

 200 VAC (*1)

Single-phase 50-60 Hz 6 kVA ±10% or less
 200/220/230/240 VAC
CAS-830B/A1 Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 5 kVA ±10% or less
CAT-850B Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 1.5 kVA ±10% or less
Single-phase 220 VAC
CAT-880B Three-phase 220 VAC 50-60 Hz 3 kVA ±10% or less
Single-phase 220 VAC
BLA-900A 24 VDC – Max. 48 W ±10% or less
BLA-900C 24 VDC – Max. 48 W ±10% or less

NOTE: Since the system requires the large-capacity power supply, the system
cannot be used using the independent power plant.

(4) Earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)

It is recommended that an ELCB be used to protect the power-supply circuit
from an earth fault.
Install an ELCB as described below:

 Trip current : 100 mA

 Antinoise characteristics : To prevent unintended operation, a

high-frequency-resistant type (inverter-
compatible type) must be used.

 Recommended models : NV100-SW-3P-100A manufactured by

Mitsubishi Electric
NV225-CW-3P-150A manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric
NV-ZH (leak current relay) manufactured by
Mitsubishi Electric

*1) The XSDT-100B must be used in combination.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
375
19.12 Weights of the Accessories and Options
The maximum total weight of the accessories and options that can be used
in combination with the catheterization table is 20 kg. Calculate the total
weight referring to the table below.

(1) Accessories

Part name Weight (kg)

Tabletop mat (*1) 2.0
Tabletop mat (*2) 5.0
Drip infusion stand 1.0
Leg fixing band (*2) 0.3
Patient fixing band (*2) 0.3
Tabletop operating box (*3) 4.2
Tableside console 4.2

*1) Provided with CAT-850B and CAT-860B

*2) Provided with CAT-880B

*3) Provided with CAT-860B and CAT-880B

(2) Options

Part name Model name Weight (kg)

Tabletop mat XBTM-001A 5.0
Arm support XBAS-001A 2.0
Armrest (for one arm) XBAR-001A 1.0
Armrest (for two arms) XBAR110A 3.0
Hand grip (for CAT-850B, -860B) XBHG-001A 5.2
Hand grip (for CAT-880B) XBHG-002A 5.0
Arm cover XBAC-001A 1.9
Auxiliary tabletop kit XBET-001A 2.0
Head-end table control switch kit XBHR-001A 5.0
Tabletop control switch XBFG-001A 5.0
Drape holder XBDB-001A 0.7
Extension rails XBER-001A 8.0
Satellite console XGCP-880AA 4.2
XGCP-930AA
Extension tabletop (for CAT-860B) XBET-860B 11.5

No. 2B308-200EN*E
376
19.13 Materials Used in Patient Contact Sections
(1) Accessories

Part name Material

Tabletop mat (*1) Polyvinyl chloride
Tabletop mat (*2) Polyurethane

*1) Provided with CAT-850B and CAT-860B

*2) Provided with CAT-880B

(2) Options

Part name Model name Material

Tabletop mat XBTM-001A Polyurethane
Arm support XBAS-001A Acrylic
Armrest (for one arm) XBAR-001A C-CFP
Armrest (for two arms) XBAR110A C-CFP
Hand grip (for CAT-850B, -860B) XBHG-001A Aluminum,
polyvinyl chloride
Hand grip (for CAT-880B) XBHG-002A Aluminum,
polyvinyl chloride
Tabletop operating switch XBFG-001A Aluminum, iron
Extension tabletop (for CAT-860B) XBET-860B CFRP, Nylon

No. 2B308-200EN*E
377
19.14 Applicable Standards (IEC)
 IEC 60601-1 (2005)
 IEC 60601-1-2 (2007)
 IEC 60601-1-3 (2008)
 IEC 60601-1-6 (2010)
 IEC 60601-1-9 (2007)
 IEC 60601-2-28 (2010)
 IEC 60601-2-43 (2010)
 IEC 62304 (2006)
 IEC 62366 (2007)
 IEC 60627 (2001)
 IEC 60580 (2000)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
378
20. Technical Data
Contents 20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43
20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2
20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3
20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020
20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging

No. 2B308-200EN*E
379
20.1 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-2-43
The technical data required by IEC 60601-2-43:2000 and
IEC 60601-2-43:2010 is given below.

(1) Power supply

 Line voltage, phase, and frequency : Described in subsection 19.11

 Line impedance : Described in subsection 19.11

 Explanation of connection of the

power supply : Described in subsection 3.1

 Characteristics of the overcurrent

breaker : Described in subsection 19.11

(2) Electrical output data and combination of X-ray conditions

 Radiography

Nominal maximum tube voltage : 125 kV (at 800 mA)

Nominal maximum tube current : 1000 mA (at 100 kV)
Nominal electrical power : 100 kW (100 kV, 1000 mA, 0.1 s)

 Fluoroscopy

Nominal maximum tube voltage : 125 kV (at 4 mA)

Nominal maximum tube current : 4 mA (at 125 kV)

(3) X-ray conditions and operating modes

 Radiography

Tube voltage : 50 kV to 125 kV

Tube current : 20 mA to 1000 mA

Acquisition time : 1.0 to 100 ms

(when kV and mAs are controlled)

 Fluoroscopy

Tube voltage : 50 kV to 125 kV

Tube current : 0.5 mA to 4.0 mA

 Operating mode

Continuously connected to the power supply in the standby status

Compliant with the specified load (nominal maximum power consumption:
100 kW)

(4) Class of protection against electric shock

 Class I

No. 2B308-200EN*E
380
(5) Tests
This unit meets test items required by IEC 60601-2-43:2000 and
IEC 60601-2-43:2010 in the ranges described below.

 Reproducibility : Range  0.5 mAs

 Linearity

(a) Linearity of reference tube current·time products : Range  0.5 mAs

(b) Linearity of consecutive tube current·time products : Range  0.5 mAs

 The test conditions (representative example) for reproducibility/linearity are

shown in the table below.

Test conditions A B C D E F
Tube voltage (kV) 50 125 62 100 62 100
Tube current (mA) 630 20 80 32 100 50
Acquisition time (ms) 40 40 40 40 40 40
Reproducibility (R) R R R R
Linearity (L) L L L L
Thickness of aluminum 10 45 21 34 21 34
(mm)
Hardening filter F3

 Accuracy

Radiographic tube voltage (10%) : All combinations which can be set

Radiographic tube current (20%) : All combinations which can be set
Acquisition time (10% +1 ms) : All combinations which can be set
Fluoroscopic tube voltage (10%) : All combinations which can be set
Fluoroscopic tube current (20%) : All combinations which can be set

(6) Measurement method

 Tube voltage : Measured in the high-voltage circuit

using a high-voltage divider

 Tube current : Measured at the neutral point of the

rectified high-voltage circuit of the
X-ray high-voltage generator

 Acquisition time : The interval between when the tube

voltage rises to 75% of the peak value
and when the tube voltage falls to 75%
of the peak value is measured.

(7) Appropriate X-ray tubes to be combined for tests

Described in subsection 2.2.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
381
 (8) Patient entrance reference point
In this system, the following point is specified as the patient entrance
reference point.

The distance between the X-ray focus and the patient entrance reference
point is regarded as the average focus-to-skin distance.

 Patient entrance reference point : A point 15 cm from the isocenter

towards the X-ray tube on the central
axis of the X-ray beam.

NOTE: For the reference air kerma rate, the influence of backscatter radiation is not
included in accordance with the measurement method described in IEC
60601-2-43. The reference value may vary depending on the settings.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
382
(9) Radiation data
Reference air kerma data is provided for the patient exposure reference
point specified by IEC 60601-2-43: 2010. The tube voltage, tube current,
pulse width, and additional filter are automatically selected according to the
selected program.

(9.1) Available settings

The skin dose level varies according to the conditions, and a risk of radiation
exposure is present even in normal use. The settings that affect the skin
dose level and the available settings are described below.

 Study protocol : An appropriate study protocol is selected

according to the purpose of the examination.
Fluoroscopic and radiographic conditions
are registered in each protocol.

 Radiographic program : Several programs are preset in each study

protocol. The desired radiographic program
can be selected.

 Fluoroscopy mode : Up to four fluoroscopy modes (low, middle,

normal, high) are registered in each study
protocol. When the mode is switched, the
FPD incident dose, pulse rate, additional
filter, dose limit, and ABC tube voltage
settings are changed accordingly.

 Pulse rate

Fluoroscopy : Continuous, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 30 fps

(Only preset rates are displayed.)
DA : 1, 2, 3, 5, 7.5, 10, 15, 30, 60 fps
DSA : 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 15, 30 fps

 Beam hardening filter : The additional filter is automatically selected

from the following filters or the preset filter is
selected.

F3 : Al 1.8 mm (Al 2.0 mm)

F1 : Cu 0.2mm
F2 : Cu 0.3 mm
F4 : Cu 0.5 mm
F5 : Cu 0.9 mm (Al 2.0 mm and/or Cu 0.9 mm
may not be available in some systems.)

 FOV : The FOV changes according to the

reference incident dose set for each FOV.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
383
  Dose setting

Fluoroscopy : The dose mode (low, normal, high, auto) is

switched automatically according to the
fluoroscopy mode selected. It is not possible
to change the dose mode directly.
DA : Dose mode (low, normal, high, auto)
DSA : The dose setting is selected in the
radiographic program.
Focus size : The following options are available for the
focus size for radiography.
 L (large)/M (middle)/Auto
 L (large)/M (middle)/S (small)/Auto
For Auto, either "L-M-S" or "M-S" can be
selected.

 ABC brightness : For fluoroscopy and DA, the image

brightness can be adjusted using this
function. If the brightness is changed by one
step, the dose changes by about 15%.

 HLC : High-dose rate fluoroscopy mode can be

selected using the HLC footswitch. The
dose limit is set to 125 mGy/min in this mode
(176 mGy/min for sites outside Japan).

(9.2) Measurement conditions

Phantom Rectangular PMMA (acrylic), thickness: 20 cm,

sides: 25 cm or more
SID 120 cm
Distance between X-ray focus and 94 cm to 96 cm (with the phantom is set in
phantom contact with the FPD)
Distance between X-ray focus and 70 cm
isocenter
Distance between X-ray focus and 55 cm
patient exposure reference point
Dose measurement point Patient exposure reference point
X-ray grid IN
Tabletop of the catheterization table OUT
X-ray beam direction LAO 90/CRA 0 (a lateral position at which
the tabletop of the catheterization table is not
included in the exposure field)
Exposure field size Each FOV
Radiography Radiography is performed after completion of
fluoroscopy.

*) The patient exposure reference point is 15 cm toward the X-ray tube

assembly from the isocenter.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
384
 (10) Dose data for systems with the TFP-800A
(10.1) Cardiac protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
High 15 19.6 28.4 34.2 39.9
Normal 15 28.6 35.3 40.0 43.8
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 18.7 24.8 30.7 33.4
Low 10 6.5 8.6 11.0 12.6
DT fluoroscopy Middle 15 22.0 22.5 25.3 35.5
Fluoroscopy roadmap Middle 15 27.0 36.1 40.6 44.5
HLC fluoroscopy Middle 15 12.3 13.1 15.1 24.3

(Unit: mGy/min)

*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".

*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

 Fluoroscopic mode setting at the time of dose measurement

Beam hardening
Dose Rate (f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Auto 15 Auto High High
Normal High 15 Auto Normal Low
Middle Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Low Low 10 F4 Normal High

*) The dose values specified above may not be obtained, depending on

fluoroscopy mode setting.

 Frame Rate : The dose rate (default) per frame in

fluoroscopy is specified below.

15 fps
30 fps 20 fps
or less
Ratio 0.67 0.83 1.0

*) The doses for other frame rates can be

calculated based on the above ratios.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
385
 Beam hardening filter : When Auto is selected, the filter is
automatically selected according to the
object to be examined.

 Focus size : Small focus is set (initial setting).

 Dose limit : Maximum air kerma at 30 cm from the FPD

accessible surface during fluoroscopy. The
maximum fluoroscopic dose is limited to this
value.

High
Low Normal
(HLC)
Japan 25 50 125
USA, etc. 44 87 175

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) Dose limit setting for Normal and HLC
mode is performed in accordance with
the applicable regulations in each country
or region.

 Fluoroscopic tube voltage : ABC reference tube voltage setting

(High: 80 kV, Low: 70 kV)

 DT : Selection of Dynamic Trace program (DT)

 HLC fluoroscopy : The HLC footswitch is used.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
386
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
CAG15 15 0.21 0.31 0.37 0.39
DA LV15 15 0.25 0.31 0.32 0.34
DT DA 15 0.12 0.15 0.17 0.18
One shot One shot 1.54 1.68 1.80 1.86
DSA DSA10fps 10 2.91 3.03 3.38 3.58

(Unit: mGy/f)

<Measurement conditions>

 DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.0

*) The dose in Low mode should be

calculated using the above ratio.

 Beam hardening filter : When Auto is selected for DA, the beam
filter is automatically selected according to
the radiographic conditions.

 Frame rate : The dose per frame in radiography is

independent of the frame rate setting.

 Focus size : Automatically selected in Auto mode.

 DT DA : Selection of Dynamic Trace program (DT)

 DSA : 400 µR/f (103.2 nC/kg)/82 kV/BF:F3/focus:

Auto
: The DSA dose values that can be set by the
user and the corresponding incident dose
rate are provided in the table below.
(Unit: R/f)

DSA dose 100 150 200 250 300 400 500

Ratio 0.25 0.375 0.5 0.625 0.75 1.0 1.25

*) In addition to the dose setting, the tube

voltage and acquisition rate can also be
changed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
387
 (10.2) Angio protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (10.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DSA3fps 3 2.03 2.16 2.26 2.29
DSA
DSA6fps 6 1.33 1.44 1.56 1.68
DA15fps 15 0.21 0.31 0.37 0.39
DA
DT DA 15 0.12 0.15 0.17 0.18
One shot One shot 1.54 1.68 1.80 1.86
3D 3D 25 1.46
3D-Low 25 0.29
LCI LCI 30 0.88
Middle
LCI-Low 30 0.23

(Unit: mGy/f)

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 DSA3fps : 400 µR/f (103.2 nC/kg)/92 kV/BF:F3/Focus:

Auto
 DSA6fps : 400 µR/f (103.2 nC/kg)/88 kV/BF:F1/Focus:
Auto

No. 2B308-200EN*E
388
 (10.3) EP protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
High 15 18.6 25.3 30.8 33.3
Normal 7.5 7.2 9.8 12.6 13.6
Fluoroscopy
Middle 7.5 4.7 6.6 8.5 9.2
Low 5 2.5 3.5 4.6 5.1
HLC
Low 5 10.5 13.9 16.2 18.3
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (a).

 Fluoroscopic mode setting at the time of dose measurement

Beam hardening
Dose Rate(f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Normal Normal 7.5 Auto Normal High
Middle Low 7.5 Auto Normal High
Low Low 5 F5 (F4) Normal High

*) The dose values specified above may not be obtained, depending on

fluoroscopy mode setting.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
389
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.08 0.11 0.14 0.15
LV15 15 0.09 0.13 0.14 0.15
One shot One shot 0.71 0.84 0.92 0.95
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.55 2.48 2.69 3.09

(Unit: mGy/f)

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 Beam hardening filter : F1 for DA, Auto for DSA

 DSA dose : Dose delivered under the conditions of

300 µR/f (77.46 nC/kg)/82 kV, focus: Auto
: The DSA dose values that can be set by the
user and the corresponding incident dose
rate are provided in the table below.
(Unit: R/f)

DSA dose 100 150 200 250 300 400 500

Ratio 0.33 0.5 0.67 0.83 1.0 1.33 1.67

*) In addition to the dose setting, the tube

voltage and acquisition rate can also be
changed.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
390
 (10.4) Pediatric protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 20.6 27.9 33.6 35.4
Normal 15 18.8 25.0 31.2 33.4
Middle 15 13.5 19.1 23.2 26.7
Low 7.5 3.9 5.3 6.9 7.6
DT
Middle 15 15.3 22.2 27.2 27.9
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 27.0 38.5 46.3 53.9
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (a).

 Fluoroscopic mode setting at the time of dose measurement

Beam hardening
Dose Rate (f/s) Dose limit kV
filter
High Normal 20 Auto Normal Low
Normal Normal 15 Auto Normal Low
Middle Normal 15 Auto Low High
Low Low 7.5 F5 (F4) Low High

*) The dose values specified above may not be obtained, depending on

fluoroscopy mode setting.

The maximum fluoroscopic dose is limited by the dose limit setting. The
dose in Low mode is limited to 50% of that in Normal mode.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
391
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 8-inch 7-inch 6-inch 5-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.21 0.32 0.33 0.35
LV30 30 0.23 0.27 0.28 0.29
DT DA 15 0.13 0.16 0.18 0.19
One shot One shot 1.57 1.70 1.82 1.84
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.48 1.49 1.50 1.44

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 Beam hardening filter : For radiographic programs other than DT

DA, "Auto" is selected and the beam
hardening filter is automatically selected
according to the conditions.

(10.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols

The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (10.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

Refer to (10.3) (b).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
392
 (11) Dose data for systems with the TFP-1200A
(11.1) Cardiac protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 18.9 19.4 23.1 36.1
Normal 15 26.0 28.1 30.1 40.2
Middle 15 16.8 18.3 20.5 30.7
Low 10 5.4 5.8 6.9 10.7
DT
Middle 15 21.7 29.8 34.0 35.2
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 26.8 27.2 30.6 40.0
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 12.9 18.9 22.5 27.1
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.23 0.25 0.27 0.41
LV15 15 0.28 0.30 0.31 0.38
DT DA 15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.18
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.90 1.96 3.30 3.33

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

No. 2B308-200EN*E
393
 (11.2) Angio protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (11.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

For the radiographic programs other than those specified below, refer to
(11.1) (b).

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DSA DSA3fps 3 1.30 1.96 2.40 2.92
DSA6fps 6 0.89 1.31 1.65 1.86
DA15fps 15 0.23 0.25 0.27 0.41
DA
DT DA 15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.18
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
3D 3D 25 1.17 1.46
3D-Low 25 0.23 0.29
LCI LCI 30 0.81 0.88
Middle
LCI-Low 30 0.22 0.23

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).

 DSA3fps : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

 DSA6fps : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

No. 2B308-200EN*E
394
 (11.3) EP protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Frontal Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 15 17.5 18.3 21.0 31.4
Normal 7.5 6.1 6.6 7.7 12.0
Middle 7.5 4.1 4.5 5.2 8.2
Low 5 2.7 2.9 3.5 5.5
HLC
Middle 5 9.6 10.3 11.7 16.8
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.14
LV15 15 0.10 0.10 0.11 0.14
One shot One shot 0.78 0.77 0.87 1.08
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.88 1.85 1.95 2.99

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.3) (b).

 DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

No. 2B308-200EN*E
395
 (11.4) Pediatric protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode
Fluoroscopy High 20 19.4 19.7 23.6 32.7
Normal 15 17.0 18.0 21.8 31.0
Middle 15 12.2 12.6 15.3 23.6
Low 7.5 4.1 4.5 5.2 8.3
DT
Middle 15 14.8 16.0 18.3 28.9
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 27.7 29.2 34.0 53.3
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.4) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 10-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program
DA CAG15 15 0.25 0.25 0.27 0.38
LV30 30 0.28 0.29 0.29 0.32
DT DA 15 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.18
One shot One shot 1.85 1.89 1.99 2.18
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.99 2.07 1.95 1.83

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

No. 2B308-200EN*E
396
(11.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols

The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (11.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

Refer to (11.3) (b).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
397
 (12) Dose data for systems with the TFP-1216A
(12.1) Cardiac protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch 
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 15 12.2 16.8 29.1 39.8
Normal 15 17.6 22.3 33.3 41.6
Middle 15 11.3 16.1 26.0 31.5
Low 10 3.8 5.2 8.6 12.0
DT
Middle 15 13.7 20.3 30.3 35.1
fluoroscopy
Fluoroscopy
Middle 15 17.5 22.4 34.7 40.8
roadmap
HLC
Middle 15 8.3 11.3 20.2 25.8
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic 12-inch 
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.15 0.16 0.24 0.41
LV15 15 0.18 0.20 0.28 0.36
DT DA 15 0.10 0.10 0.12 0.17
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.90 1.96 3.30 3.33

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
398
 <Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.5

*) The dose in each dose mode should be

calculated based on the above ratios.

 DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

(12.2) Angio protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (12.1) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

For the radiographic programs other than those specified below, refer to
(12.1) (b).

FOV
Radiographic 12-inch 
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DSA DSA3fps 3 1.26 1.87 2.46 2.88
DSA6fps 6 0.76 0.81 1.62 1.81
DA15fps 15 0.15 0.16 0.24 0.41
DA
DT DA 15 0.10 0.10 0.12 0.17
One shot One shot 1.84 1.83 1.99 2.09
3D 3D 25 1.17 1.46
3D-Low 25 0.23 0.29
LCI LCI 30 0.81 0.88
Middle
LCI-Low 30 0.22 0.23

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.2) (b).

 DSA3fps : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

 DSA6fps : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

No. 2B308-200EN*E
399
 (12.3) EP protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch 
Frontal Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 15 11.9 15.8 27.8 33.3
Normal 7.5 4.1 5.7 10.0 13.1
Middle 7.5 2.7 3.9 6.8 9.3
Low 5 1.9 2.6 4.5 6.1
HLC
Low 5 6.3 8.6 14.6 18.5
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Low".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic 12-inch 
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.13
LV15 15 0.06 0.07 0.10 0.14
One shot One shot 0.78 0.77 0.87 1.08
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.88 1.85 1.95 2.99

(Unit: mGy/f)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
400
 <Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.3) (b).

 DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.5

*) The dose in each dose mode should be

calculated based on the above ratios.

 DSA : Focus setting: "Auto (L-M-S)"

(12.4) Pediatric protocol

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

FOV
Fluoroscopy 12-inch 
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
mode 16-inch
Fluoroscopy High 20 12.2 16.6 29.0 34.0
Normal 15 11.9 16.2 27.9 32.8
Middle 15 8.2 11.4 19.2 26.5
Low 7.5 2.9 3.9 6.8 9.4
DT
Middle 15 10.7 13.5 23.3 32.3
fluoroscopy
HLC
Middle 15 19.0 25.8 44.2 58.0
fluoroscopy

(Unit: mGy/min)
*) The initial fluoroscopy mode setting is "Middle".
*) The values are higher than those for normal fluoroscopy due to the
extended SID.

<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions, refer to (10.4) (a).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
401
 (b) Reference air kerma for radiography

FOV
Radiographic 12-inch 
Rate (f/s) 12-inch 8-inch 6-inch
program 16-inch
DA CAG15 15 0.16 0.16 0.25 0.40
LV30 30 0.20 0.20 0.29 0.33
DT DA 15 0.11 0.11 0.13 0.18
One shot One shot 1.02 1.69 1.85 1.96
DSA DSA10fps 10 1.97 1.91 1.93 1.72

(Unit: mGy/f)
<Measurement conditions>

For the measurement conditions other than those specified below, refer to
(10.1) (b).

 DA dose : Dose for normal dose mode (default)

The values in the table below are the initial
dose ratios for each dose mode of DA.

Low Normal High

Ratio 0.6 1.0 1.5

*) The dose in each dose mode should be

calculated based on the above ratios.

 DA : Focus setting: "Auto (M-S)"

(12.5) Cardiac-Low, Angio-Low, and Pediatric-Low protocols

The dose values when image acquisition is performed with the low dose
setting using the EP protocol are specified below.

(a) Reference air kerma for fluoroscopy

Refer to (12.3) (a).

(b) Reference air kerma for radiography

Refer to (12.3) (b).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
402
(13) Distribution of stray radiation
The distribution maps of stray radiation required by IEC 60601-2-43: 2010
are shown below.

When the following distribution maps are used to confirm compliance with
the IEC 60601-2-43:2000 requirements, the values in the distribution maps
2
should be multiplied by 0.01. In this case, the unit is Gy/(Gym ).

(a) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 100 cm above the floor

2
Unit: Gy/(Gycm )

No. 2B308-200EN*E
403
(b) C-arm rotation angle LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°, 150 cm above the floor

Unit: Gy/(Gycm2)

(c) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 100 cm above the floor

2
Unit: Gy/(Gycm )

No. 2B308-200EN*E
404
(d) C-arm rotation angle LAO = 90°, CRA/CAU = 0°, 150 cm above the floor

Unit: Gy/(Gycm2)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
405
(14) Measurement conditions
(a) Fluoroscopic tube voltage: 125 kV

(b) Beam hardening filter: Cu 0.5 mm

(c) Measurement position

No. 2B308-200EN*E
406
20.2 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-2
The technical data required by IEC 60601-1-2:2007 is provided below.

20.2.1 Contents of the attachment

The contents of this attachment are described below.

(1) Classification and applicable standards

(2) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic emissions -
(3) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
(4) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not LIFE-
SUPPORTING
(5) Recommended separation distances between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment and the Infinix-i for
EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not LIFE-SUPPORTING
20.2.2 Technical data

(1) Classification and applicable standards

 Classification

The classification of the Infinix-i is group 1, class A.

 Applicable standards

For the "applicable standards" item, application of IEC 60601-1-2:2007 is

described.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
407
 (2) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic emissions -
(a) Infinix-i

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions

The Infinix-i is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the Infinix-i should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The Infinix-i uses RF energy only for its internal function.
RF emissions
Group 1 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to
CISPR 11
cause an interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11
The Infinix-i is suitable for use in all establishments,
Harmonic emissions
Not applicable including domestic establishments and those directly
IEC 61000-3-2
connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
Voltage fluctuations/ that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
flicker emissions Not applicable
IEC 61000-3-3
Do not use cables and parts other than those used for this system.
NOTE If cables and parts other than those used for this system are used, the emission
performance may be affected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
408
 (3) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
(a) Infinix-i

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The Infinix-i is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the Infinix-i should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601-1 Electromagnetic
Immunity test Compliance level
test level environment - guidance
Floors should be wood,
concrete, or ceramic tile. If
Electrostatic 6 kV contact 6 kV contact floors are covered with
discharge (ESD)
8 kV air 8 kV air synthetic material, the relative
IEC 61000-4-2
humidity should be at least
30%.
2 kV for power supply 2 kV for power supply
Electrical fast lines lines Mains power quality should be
transient/burst that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV for input/output 1 kV for input/output hospital environment.
lines lines

1 kV differential mode 1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be

Surge
that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV common mode 2 kV common mode hospital environment.
The quality of the power supply
should be equivalent to that of
Voltage dips, the standard commercial
short interruptions power supply or the power
and voltage supply within the hospital. If
variations on 5 seconds 5 seconds the Infinix-i is to be used even
power supply in the event of a power failure,
input lines power should be supplied to
IEC 61000-4-11 the Infinix-i from an
uninterruptible power supply
unit or batteries.
Power frequency magnetic
Power frequency
fields should be at levels
(50/60 Hz)
3 A/m 3 A/m characteristic of a typical
magnetic field
location in a typical commercial
IEC 61000-4-8
or hospital environment.
UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Do not use cables and parts other than those used for the current system.
NOTE
If cables and parts other than those used for the current system are used, the
immunity may be affected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
409
 (4) Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
- electromagnetic immunity -
for EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not
LIFE-SUPPORTING

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The Infinix-i is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the Infinix-i should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Compliance
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any part of
the Infinix-i, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated
from the equation applicable to the frequency of
the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz : d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m 80 MHz to 800 MHz : d = 1.2 P
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz : d = 2.3 P
where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
a
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
should be less than the compliance level in each
b
frequency range.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol.

NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected
by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
NOTE 3: Do not use cables and parts other than those used for the current system.
If cables and parts other than those used for the current system are used, the immunity
may be affected.
a
: Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the Infinix-i is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the
Infinix-i should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed,
additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the Infinix-i.
b
: Within the frequency range from 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
410
 (5) Recommended separation distances between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment and the Infinix-i for
EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS that are not
LIFE-SUPPORTING

Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment

and the Infinix-i
The Infinix-i is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled.
The customer or the user of the Infinix-i can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining
a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and
the Infinix-i as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)
Rated maximum output power 150kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
of transmitter (W)
d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected
by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
NOTE 3: Do not use cables and parts other than those used for the current system.
If cables and parts other than those used for the current system are used, the immunity
may be affected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
411
20.3 Technical Data Required by IEC 60601-1-3
The technical data required by IEC 60601-1-3: 2008 is given below.

(1) Accuracy of the automatic control system

Change in the brightness data controlled by ABC with respect to the mean
value in DA and fluoroscopy (with a fixed subject thickness):

The maximum value is within +20% of the minimum value (maximum value /
minimum value < 1.2)

(2) Distribution of scattered radiation in the vertical direction

Distribution of the scattered radiation in the vertical direction in the significant
zone of occupancy is shown in the figure below.

(Unit: mm)

<Measurement conditions> Fluoroscopic conditions: Beam hardening filter: F3 (Al)

125 kV/3mA
SID: 100 cm Tabletop height: 100 cm

The graph is normalized by long-time rating 2.2 kW (conversion

at 125 kV/18 mA).

No. 2B308-200EN*E
412
No. 2B308-200EN*E
413
20.4 Technical Data Required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020
The technical data required by DHHS 21CFR § 1020 is given below.

20.4.1 Required items for HHS standards

(1) Reproducibility
CV  0.045 (CV: Coefficient of variation)

(2) Linearity

X1  X 2
0.09
X1  X 2

(3) Maximum entrance dose limit

88 mGy/min (10 R/min)
176 mGy/min (HLC) (20 R/min)

(4) Maximum product of mA and seconds

600 mAs in automatic exposure control

20.4.2 System accuracy

(1) Technique factors during radiography and pulsed

fluoroscopy
(1.1) mA value indication

The following are the maximum deviations from the indicated mA setting.

The maximum deviation from the indicated mA setting is equal to:

[ 15 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.


(1.2) kV value indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated kV setting is equal to:

[ 7 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.


No. 2B308-200EN*E
414
(1.3) Exposure time value indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated exposure time setting and
following exposure in automatic exposure control is as follows.

(a) Time range of 0.001 to 0.009 s

[ 1 + (Test instrumentation error)] ms

Generator design Refer to table 1.


(b) Time range of 0.010 s or more

[ 10 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.


RADIOGRAPHY

The exposure time is defined as the interval between the time (A) that the
tube potential reaches 75% of the observed tube voltage crest value and the
time (B) that it falls back to the 75% level.

PULSED FLUOROSCOPY

The exposure time is defined based on the signal from the PXCIF board in
the power cabinet of X-ray high-voltage generator XTP-8100XG.
Measurement location: Between TP13 (RX) and TP1 (GND)

No. 2B308-200EN*E
415
(2) Technique factors during fluoroscopy
(2.1) mA value indication (Continuous fluoroscopy only)

The maximum deviations from the indicated mA values are as follows.

(a) From 0.5 mA to 0.9 mA

[ 0.2 + (Test instrumentation error)] mA

Generator design Refer to table 1.


(b) From 1 mA to 4 mA

[ 15 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.


(2.2) kV value indication (Continuous fluoroscopy only)

The maximum deviation from the indicated kV value is as follows.

[ 7 + (Test instrumentation error)] %

Generator design Refer to table 1.


(2.3) Time value indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated time setting is as follows.

5 minutes 0 %
 5%

(2.4) F. total time indication

The maximum deviation from the indicated time setting is as follows.

0 %
 5%

Table 1 Test instrumentation errors

Item Test instrument Error

MFG Type
Radiographic mA Alco Elect. Co., Ltd. MA-1201DC or 0.5%
MA-2000
Radiographic kV ditto KV-201D 2%
Radiographic time ditto TD-3A 0.5%1 dgt
Fluoroscopic kV ditto KV-201D 2%
Fluoroscopic mA ditto MA-1201DC or 0.5%
MA-2000

No. 2B308-200EN*E
416
20.4.3 Reference location
In this system, the reference location for which the AKR (air kerma rate) and
cumulative air kerma are displayed is specified as below.

 Calculation procedure based on the isocenter

A location 150 mm toward the X-ray tube assembly from the isocenter is
specified as the reference location.

 Calculation procedure based on a point a specified distance from the

tabletop
The reference location is specified as a location 50 mm toward the X-ray
tube assembly from a point in the center of the X-ray beam (reference point
(*1)) that is a specified distance (default: 100 mm) above the tabletop.

Refer to the following figure.

X-ray center axis

X-ray detector
100 mm (*1)

Patient
50 mm

Reference point
Reference location

Tabletop mat

Tabletop

X-ray tube assembly

LAO/RAO/CRA/CAU = 0°

*1) The reference point is a point in the region of interest for

fluoroscopy/radiography and is on the X-ray center axis.
This point can be set in the range of 0 mm to 500 mm from the upper surface
of the tabletop of the catheterization table. 100 mm is set at the time of
shipment.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
417
 X-ray center axis

X-ray detector

100 mm (*1)
Patient
Reference point
Reference location

Tabletop mat

Tabletop

50 mm X-ray tube assembly

Conceptual figure after tilting in the LAO/RAO direction (CRA/CAU = 0°)

*1) The reference point is a point in the region of interest for

fluoroscopy/radiography and is on the X-ray center axis.
This point can be set in the range of 0 mm to 500 mm from the upper surface
of the tabletop of the catheterization table. 100 mm is set at the time of
shipment.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
418
20.4.4 Modes of operation

(1) Modes
(1.1) Fluoroscopy

(a) Pulsed fluoroscopy

(b) Continuous fluoroscopy

(1.2) Radiography

(a) Digital angiography (DA)

(b) One-shot radiography

(c) Digital subtraction angiography (DSA) function

(d) Rotational DA

(e) Rotational DSA

(f) 3D-DA, 3D-DSA

(2) Selection procedures, indications, and technique factors in

each mode
(2.1) Fluoroscopy

(a) Select a study protocol and start a study. Fluoroscopy is enabled.

(b) Select pulsed fluoroscopy or continuous fluoroscopy on the Fluoroscopic

conditions setting screen in Acquisition mode at the system console.

(c) It is possible to select automatic control or manual setting as the fluoroscopic

X-ray condition setting procedure.

(d) In automatic control, X-ray conditions are determined by video signals sent
from the FPD.

(e) Check the fluoroscopy control parameters in Acquisition mode.

(f) For detailed specifications, refer to subsection 19.9 (3) "Fluoroscopy" and
subsection 19.10 (4) "Fluoroscopy".

(g) For detailed operating procedures, refer to section 11

"Fluoroscopy/Radiography (Acquisition Mode)".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
419
(2.2) Radiography

(a) Select a study protocol and start a study.

(b) Select an acquisition program in Acquisition mode at the system console. It

is possible to switch the type of radiography and to select automatic control
or manual setting.

(c) In automatic control, the X-ray condition setting procedure differs according
to the type of radiography.

 Digital angiography (DA), rotational DA

The X-ray conditions when radiography is started are determined by
fluoroscopy performed immediately before radiography. During
radiography, the X-ray conditions are determined by video signals sent
from the FPD.

 Other types of radiography

The X-ray conditions are determined by fluoroscopy performed
immediately before radiography.

(d) Check the radiography control parameters in Acquisition mode.

(e) For detailed specifications, refer to subsection 19.9 (2) "Radiographic

condition ranges" and subsection 19.10 (7) "Radiography".

(f) For detailed operating procedures, refer to section 11

"Fluoroscopy/Radiography (Acquisition Mode)".

No. 2B308-200EN*E
420
20.5 Information Sources Related to Pediatric Imaging
This information is only for the U.S.A.

As the awareness of the administration of ionizing radiation continues to

flourish new sources of information are becoming available. Users of this
equipment should continue to educate themselves in the area of pediatric
imaging. Some sources for this information are:

The FDA website "Radiation Emitting Products" has information, current

news and safety alerts related to ionizing radiation imaging. This area of the
website also contains links to various websites that include current
information.

http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/RadiationEmitting
ProductsandProcedures/MedicalImaging/ucm298899.htm

Toshiba Education Center – Toshiba hosts a website that allows access to a

variety of training. This includes computer based training modules, onsite
support, classroom training and sponsored CME course work.

http://medical.toshiba.com/education/institute-advanced-imaging/index.php

Image Gently Website – is a website that contains links to information and

educational modules related to pediatric imaging. This site includes links to
various manufacturer websites for training modules.

http://www.pedrad.org/associations/5364/ig/?page=664

AAPM website – Contains educational material related to all types of ionizing

radiation training and measurement methodologies.

http://www.aapm.org/default.asp

American Society of Radiologic Technologists – the website has training and

is source for current information related to ionizing radiation.

http://www.asrt.org/

No. 2B308-200EN*E
421
No. 2B308-200EN*E
422
21. System Message Display
In this system, a message may be displayed on the monitor to notify the user
of the system status.

Contents 21.1 Message Display Section

21.2 Message Types
21.3 Corrective Actions

No. 2B308-200EN*E
423
21.1 Message Display Section
Depending on the message type and status, the message may be displayed
on the reference monitor, fluoroscopy monitor, or system monitor. Take
appropriate measures according to the displayed message.

Note that the message display section may differ depending on the setting at
the time of system installation. Check the message display section.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
424
21.2 Message Types
There are four types of messages.

Status messages Messages that indicate the system status

Example: (Frontal tube) LM frozen. X-ray disabled. Please wait.
Guide messages Messages that guide operation
Example: Move tabletop to 1st position. Then select [1st Stage].
Error messages Messages that indicate the contents of the error when the system does not
operate normally due to a system failure, software error, or operational error
An error code may be displayed.
Example: System disk error. Call service.
Message icons Icons displaying message notification

Example:

No. 2B308-200EN*E
425
21.3 Corrective Actions
When a message is displayed, take appropriate corrective action according
to the message. If it not clear what action should be taken, check the table
on the following pages.

NOTE: 1. If the error cannot be reset or the same error occurs repeatedly, contact your
Toshiba service representative for inspection and repair.

2. If the corrective action for the error is not clear, contact your Toshiba service
representative.

3. If a status message that indicates processing is in progress in the system is

displayed, wait until the processing is completed. On completion of
processing, the message is cleared.

4. Some terms have been abbreviated in the messages.

SC : Service center
SW : Switch
Trig SW : C-arm/tabletop operation start lever or the auto-positioning start
button of the tableside console.
BP : Biplane

No. 2B308-200EN*E
426
 Message Action
The beam limiting device blades are closed.
Open the blades.

An error for which error reset can be executed or system

operation can be switched to reduced operation has
occurred.
Check the error message displayed on the monitor for the
corrective action.
Press table SW 5 s after Press the Emergency stop button.
After waiting for 5 seconds, press the Power reset button on
SW. System may the operating panel of the catheterization table.
If the system is not recovered, contact your Toshiba service
recover. representative.
1 1st stage set out of range. SM0478 The first-stage setting is disabled. Adjust the longitudinal
SM0377
Adjust table long. position. position of the table.
SM0493

2 2 Proc PWBs are not installed. SM0136 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Call service.
3 3D WS error. SM0394 Check the cause at the 3D WS.
A Acq. Program change failed. SM0096 Try to change the study program again using the function
button in the menu display area or using Acquisition mode.
If the study program still cannot be changed, abort the
current study and start a new study, or contact your Toshiba
service representative.
(ADIF PWB) BBM abnormal. SM0133 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Call service.
(ADIF) PWB is not installed. SM0105 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(ADIF) PWB control is SM0110 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
ADIF PWB memory is abnormal. SM0463 Contact your Toshiba service representative
Call service.
ADIF-SYSIF error. SM1080 Restart the system. If this message is displayed again after
X-ray disabled. system restart, contact your Toshiba service representative.
Adjust gain/move arm to end & SM0532 Adjust the gain or press the Set End button after moving the
select [Set End]. C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA.
Adjust gain/press trigSW. SM0524 Adjust the gain. Alternatively, press the auto-positioning
Arm moves to end position. start button on the tableside console or press the
Arm/tabletop movement start lever of the tableside console.
Check the console configured in the system.
Adjust table long/lateral pos. & SM0528 Adjust the longitudinal position and the lateral position of the
SM1021
select [Confirm Cond.] tabletop and then press the Confirm Cond. button.
Adjustment data is incorrect. SM0584 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Call service.
Analysis result error (numeric SM0920 The target image was acquired with DDCF. It is
val.) may be larger. recommended that an image acquired without DDCF be
analyzed.
Angle is outside range. SM0864 Use an image with the appropriate angle information.
(CRA/CAU)
Angle is outside range. (CRA) SM0861 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Angle is outside range. (LAO) SM0860 Contact your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
427
 Message Action
A Angle is outside range. SM0863 Use an image with the appropriate angle information.
(RAO/LAO)
Angle is outside range. (RAO) SM0859 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Another analysis app started in SM0909 Terminate the analysis in progress and then start a new
Current Case. analysis.
Another analysis app started in SM0910 Terminate the analysis in progress and then start a new
exam room. analysis.
Another analysis app started in SM0908 Terminate the analysis in progress and then start a new
Post Process. analysis.
Arm could not move to preset SM0522 The C-arm cannot be moved to the preset position.
position.
Arm rotation speed was SM0544 The C-arm operational speed for rotational DSA is
SM1040
automatically adjusted. automatically set.
Auto-detect of spherical SM0787 Detect the contour of the steel ball again.
phantom failed.
Auto-pos. impossible with SM0078 Auto-positioning cannot be executed with the selected
SM0982
selected No. number. Select another auto-positioning number.
Arm pos. not specified. SM0425 Set the support unit to a position where rotational DA is
SM0427
Perform setting again. SM0995
possible.
AUTO MAP disabled during SM0042 Auto-mapping is not possible during continuous playback.
continuous playback.
AUTO MAP failed. SM0012 The auto-map function could not be executed. Try again. If
auto-mapping still cannot be started, contact your Toshiba
service representative.
Auto-pos. STORE disabled SM0070 This auto-positioning cannot be executed before the start of
before study start. a study. Try again after the study is started.
Authorization is required to SM1064 This processing cannot be executed with the authority level
perform processing. of the user currently logged in to the system. The system
must be logged in to by a person with the authority level for
this processing to execute this processing.
Apex and positions of both SM0829 Set a longer distance between the valve and the cardiac
valves too close. apex and then perform tracing again.
Avg. process umber exceeded SM0786 The number of segments exceeded the upper limit during
upper limit. distance calibration.
B Backup failed. HP0034 If this message is displayed even after retry, contact your
Toshiba service representative.
C Cannot reach the specified SM0436
If this message is displayed when the -arm is switched to
SM1212
position. SM1213 the RL orientation or LL orientation, set the C-arm floor
SM1214 base rotation angle to within the range of 45°. If the same
SM1215 message is displayed again after the angle is changed,
perform auto-positioning as shown below.
 When the -arm is switched to the RL orientation : No. 71
 When the -arm is switched to the LL orientation : No. 70
Can't switch system. Move SM0264 System switching has failed. Return the system to the
arm/tabletop to original pos. original system and then use the system.
 0° layout system
Reset the CAS-810A support column rotation angle to its
original angle.
 90° layout system
Reset the catheterization tabletop rotation angle to its
original angle.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
428
 Message Action
C Centerline analysis is not SM0878 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
possible. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Centerline analysis with heart SM0830 The cardiac centerlines for ED and ES may differ
contour not possible. significantly.
Confirm that the correct analysis target image is used and
that tracing is performed appropriately.
Check arm status. SM0363 The C-arm is not at the set position. Move the C-arm to the
Reset arm to the set position. set position.
Check each stage view. SM0368 Perform fluoroscopy and check the field from the first stage
to the last stage.
Check each stage view. SM0365 Perform fluoroscopy and check all the fields. After all the
Then select [Fix View]. fields are checked, set [Fix View] to ON.
Collimator is operating. SM0060 Release the operating switch and stop the X-ray beam
SM0063 limiting device. (Frontal)
Comm with in-room con soles SM1210 An error related to the X-ray beam limiting device has
failed. Ltd functions occurred. The X-ray beam limiting device cannot be used.
The support unit can be operated as usual.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(Collimator) Commun. failed. SM0059 Communication with the X-ray beam limiting device is
Auto-pos. is limited. SM0062 broken. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Connection to the backup file HP0066 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
transfer destination failed.
(Console unit) Commun. failed. SM0118 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Console disabled.
Creation of mask image failed. SM0016 The system has failed in mask image creation. Contact
your Toshiba service representative.
Creation of F-MASK failed. SM0015 The system has failed in mask image creation. The display
Change to normal fluoro. will change to normal fluoroscopic images. Contact your
Toshiba service representative.
Correction line crosses edge on SM0782 Of the two lines drawn by vessel contour detection, select
opposite side. one line as the correction target.
D Data transfer error. SM0037 The system has failed in data transfer. The data transfer
Node/Device name not destination name or device name may be set incorrectly.
recognized. Contact your Toshiba service representative. Check the
setting in Utility mode.
Data transfer failed. SM0039 The system has failed in data transfer. Try again. If data
transfer fails again, contact your Toshiba service
representative.
DB is abnormal. Reset SM1078 Perform system reset.
software. SM1173 To perform full reset of the software, select Software Reset.
SM1174 To perform partial reset of the software, select Partial
SM1175 Reset.
DC power supply error. SM0126 Contact your Toshiba service representative. The DC
Call service. SM0127 power supply of the SYSTEM I/F is defective.
DDS image transfer failed. SM1448 Transfer the image after fluoroscopy/radiography is
completed. If the error is not resolved, contact your Toshiba
service representative.
DICOM file does not exist or SM0874 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
may be damaged. representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
429
 Message Action
D Disk write error. SM1182 System local processing failed. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
Display image differs from SM0922 Use images selected from the same dynamic image.
registered ED or ES image.
Dose meter abnormal. Dose SM0081 The system has failed in concurrent display of normal
info. disabled. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). The display will change to
normal fluoroscopic images. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Do Test Shot or press [Cond. SM0344 Perform test exposure or press the Cond. Setting button
setting] to skip test.
Do test shot or move to next SM0379 Perform test exposure or move the tabletop to the next
SM0480
stage. stage.
Do test shot, set Mask/Cont SM0372
Perform test exposure. Alternatively, press the Mask 
SM0481
button ON, or step tabletop. Contrast button or move the tabletop to the next stage.
Do test shot or set Mask/Cont SM0373
Perform test exposure or press the Mask  Contrast
SM0482
button ON. button.
Do Test Shot or select trigger SM0525 Perform test exposure. Alternatively, press the auto-
SW. positioning start button on the tableside console or press
the Arm/tabletop movement start lever of the tableside
console. Check the console configured in the system.
Do Test Shot or select [Confirm SM0526 Perform test exposure or press the Confirm Cond. button.
Cond.].
Do Test Shot/move arm to end SM0533 Perform test exposure or press the Set End button after
& select [Set End]. moving the C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA.
E Emergency SW pressed. SM0158 Eliminate the cause of the emergency stop and press the
Movement is limited. reset switch. If the cause cannot be eliminated, contact
your Toshiba service representative.
Emergency SW pressed. SM0551 The settings are cleared because the emergency stop
SM0553
Start setting from 1st step. button was pressed. Perform setting again.
SM1059

Error detected during acquisition SM0155 An error has been detected during preparation for
SM0156
preparation. fluoroscopic processing at the start of fluoroscopic image
recording. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Error detected during image SM0140 The system recovers automatically. If this error occurs
processing. again after system recovery, contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Error in collimator. SM0061 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
SM0064

Error in communication with SM1188 Printing processing failed. Contact your Toshiba service
imager. representative.
Error in image transfer to server. SM1183 Network processing failed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Error in support unit. SM0045 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
SM0053

Error in table. SM0067 Contact your Toshiba service representative.

SM1347
When the operating table is used in combination: An error
has occurred in the operating table. If the brake for column
rotation of the table is released or loose, securely fix the
table with the brake. If the error cannot be cleared, contact
your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
430
 Message Action
E Exam room door is open. X-ray SM0380 Close the examination room door.
SM0402
disabled.
Exam room door is open. SM0466 Close the examination room door.
Radiography disabled.
Exam room door is open. SM0467 Close the examination room door.
F File already exists. SM0809 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
File not found. SM0808 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
File read error SM0812 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
File write error SM0811 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Fluoroscopy could not be SM0757 Retry start of fluoroscopy.
started. Retry.
Fluoroscopy could not be SM0758 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
started. Call service.
For HSBP fluoro, only normal SM0505 Perform normal fluoroscopy during the operation of high-
fluoro. is enabled speed biplane fluoroscopy.
(F OPTI/F) Communication SM0144 Communication with the frontal OPTI/F is disabled.
error. Reboot system. Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(Frontal) Do fluoroscopy before SM0255 Execute fluoroscopy for approximately 2 seconds for the
radiography. radiographic region before executing radiography.
(Frontal) Perform fluoroscopy. SM0138 Perform fluoroscopy on the frontal side.
(Frontal Tube) Housing SM0134 Immediately terminate X-ray generation and wait until the
overheating probable. X-ray tube cools. Check the air conditioning of the room
where the water cooling unit is installed. Contact your
Toshiba service representative.
(Frontal tube) LM frozen. X-ray SM0100 The frozen liquid bearing is being unfrozen. Wait for some
disabled. Please wait. time and try again. If X-rays still cannot be generated,
contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F CCDIF) PWB control is SM0108 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
(F CCDIF) PWB is not installed. SM0103 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(F CCDIF) Test pattern SM0464 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
abnormal. Call service.
(F CCD camera) SM0098 Communication with the frontal CCD camera is disabled.
Communication failed. Reboot SM0142 Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
system. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F HV-GEN.) Communication SM0113 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
failed. X-ray disabled.
F Fluoro is interrupted. (10min. SM0698 Set the fluoroscopy switch to OFF. To continue
timer) Restart fluoro. fluoroscopy, set the fluoroscopy switch to ON.
(FPD) Abnormal images Call SM0962 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
service.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
431
 Message Action
F (FPD) Preparation error. Call SM0966 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
service.
(FPD) Temp. error. Power was SM0969 The power of the FPD was turned OFF due to detection of
turned OFF. abnormal FPD temperature.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
For the biplane system, use the other FPD and terminate
the examination.
(FPD) Temp. error. Power will SM0968 The power of the FPD will be turned OFF after five minutes
be OFF in 5 min. due to detection of abnormal FPD temperature.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(FPD) Temp. error. Shut down SM0581 The system power supply is shut down automatically in five
starts in 5 min. minutes. Discontinue the examination after confirming
safety and save the data. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
(F FPD) Communication error. SM0561 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is
X-ray disabled. SM1159 disabled. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD) Control impossible. SM0569 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is
X-ray disabled. disabled. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD) error If fluoro/rad SM0515 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
disabled, call service.
(F FPD) Image processing PWB SM0563 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
error.
(F FPD) preparation mode. SM0513 After completion of the radiographic preparations of the
X-ray disabled. FPD for the frontal plane, start radiography for the frontal
plane.
(F FPD) Power supply error. SM0559 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is
X-ray disabled. disabled. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD I/F) PWB is not installed. SM0509 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(F FPD I/F) PWB control is SM0511 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
(F FPD I/F) PWB image size SM0517 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
error.
(F FPD I/F) PWB error. SM0519 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD) I/F PWB ver. SM1436 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
correction impossible.
(F FPD I/F) Test pattern error. SM0565 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Call service.
(FPD) Temp. error. Shutdown SM0577 Stop using the system and contact your Toshiba service
system & call service. representative.
(FPD) Version error Call service. SM0964 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature high. Call SM0578 Reduce the temperature in the examination room. If the
service. error occurs after the room temperature has been reduced,
contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature low. Call SM0580 Increase the temperature in the examination room. If the
service. error occurs after the room temperature has been
increased, contact your Toshiba service representative.
(F FPD) Temperature sensor SM0585 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
error. Call service.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
432
 Message Action
F (F FPD) Temperature detect SM0586 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
error. Call service.
(F FPD) Test pattern error. Call SM0587 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
service.
For the password, enter 8 or HP0043 Enter the password again following the instructions. For
more characters including 1 or details for the password, refer to section 9 of the reference
more special symbols. manual.
F-side fluoro. is performed with SM0261 Set a lower dose and perform fluoroscopy.
lower X-ray cond.
F-REC error. Decrease pulse SM0157 A fluoroscopic image recording error occurred. Reduce the
rate or create storage space. fluoroscopic pulse rate (e/s) or delete unnecessary data
using the Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted
data cannot be recovered. There is insufficient free space
for fluorography in the RAID.
F-side fluoro. is performed with SM0261 The X-ray conditions on the frontal side are automatically
lower X-ray cond. lowered in fluoroscopy.
F-Rec canceled. Disabled SM0083 Fluoroscopic image recording has been canceled.
during F-MASK/F-SUB. Fluoroscopic image recording is not possible during mask
generation, fluoroscopic subtraction, or fluoroscopic
landmark image display. Wait until these processing
operations are completed and then try again.
G GCM PWB is not installed SM1131 System check is required. Contact your Toshiba service
Fluoro and rad enabled. SM1132 representative.
The system can be operated as usual even if this message
is displayed.
Generator & tube prep mode. SM0263 The X-ray high-voltage generator and the X-ray tube
Please wait. assembly are getting ready. Wait until they are ready.
Graph display in centerline SM0879 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
analysis is not possible. recommended that tracing be performed again.
H H11 A01 Hardware error. SM0189 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H12 A02 Hardware error. SM0190 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H13 A03 Hardware error. SM0191 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H14 A04 Hardware error. SM0192 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H18 M.C. PWB hardware err. SM1375 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H19 A.C. PWB hardware err. SM1376 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H1D tableside console PWB SM1377 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
initialize error
H1E Satellite console PWB SM1378 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
initialize error
H20 A01 Support unit battery SM0194 The battery power resource for memory backup is running
voltage low. short. Contact your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
433
 Message Action
H H21 A01 Software error. SM0195 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H21 Console Control PWB SM0182 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
initialize err. Cons
disabled.
H21 Table PWB initialize err. SM0159 The table vertical movement axis and tabletop longitudinal
Operation is limited. movement axis do not operate. Linked operations such as
auto-positioning and stepping DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H22 A02 Software error. SM0196 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H22 Table PCL5014 init. error. SM0160 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Operation is limited by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Toshiba service representative.
H23 A03 Software error. SM0197 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H23 Tableside console PWB SM0161 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
initialize error.
H24 A04 Software error. SM0198 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Support unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H24 Satellite console PWB SM0162 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
initialize error.
H25 CAN error. Support unit SM0199 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
set to single operation rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba
mode. service representative.
H25 CAN error Table switched SM0163 Linked operations such as table auto-positioning and
to single oper. mode. stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H25 Console Control CAN SM0183 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
commun. error Cons
disabled.
H26 BU Memory abnormal. SM0164 Linked operations such as table auto-positioning and
Table operation is limited. stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H26 CAN error. Support unit SM0200 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
set to single operation rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba
mode. service representative.
H28 M. Net error. Support unit SM1379 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
op. limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H29 M. Net error. Support unit SM1380 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
op. limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H2A BBM data abnormal. SM0202 Linked operations such as support unit auto-positioning and
Support unit op. is limited rotational DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H2B M.C. PWB battery voltage SM1381 The memory backup battery level is low. Contact your
is low. Toshiba service representative.
H30 M. Net err. Table- side SM1391 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
console disabled.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
434
 Message Action
H H31 Table U/D backup sensor SM0165 Backup sensor error for the table vertical movement axis.
error. Contact your Toshiba service representative. Operations
are not restricted.
H31 M. Net err. Table- side SM1392 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
console disabled.
H32 M. Net err. Satel- lite SM1393 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
console disabled.
H33 M. Net err. Satel- lite SM1394 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
console disabled.
H35 Tabletop tilt backup SM0441 Tabletop tilt axis backup sensor error. Contact your
sensor error. Toshiba representative.
H41 Table U/D driver error. SM0166 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Vertical op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H42 Table long. driver error. SM0167 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Long. op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Toshiba service representative.
H43 Rotation motor driver SM0203 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked
failure. Rot. op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H44 Slide motor driver failure. SM0204 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H45 Detector near/away motor SM0205 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
failure. Op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H45 Table tilt driver error. Tilt SM0442 Tabletop tilting is disabled. Contact your Toshiba
operation is disabled. representative.
H46 Ceiling long. motor driver SM0206 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
failure. Op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H47 Ceiling lateral motor driver SM0207 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
failure. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H48 Ceiling rotation motor SM0208 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked
driver failure. Op. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
disabled. cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H49 Collimator rotation motor SM0927 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
driver failure Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
435
 Message Action
H H4A FPD rotation motor driver SM0928 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
failure Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H4B Floor base rotation motor SM0929 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
driver failure Op. disabled. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H4E Support col. rot. mot. SM0930 Support column rotation of the support unit cannot be
driver failure Op. disabled. performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H4F Col slide motor driver SM1384 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
failed. Slide disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H53 Rotation axis limit sw SM0210 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked
actuated. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H54 Slide axis limit sw SM0211 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
actuated. Op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H55 Detector N/A axis limit sw SM0212 The I.I. near/away movement axis does not operate. Linked
actuated. Op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H55 Table tilt sensor error. SM0443 There are some limitations in tabletop tilting. Contact your
Table op. is limited. Toshiba representative.
H61 Table U/D sensor error. SM0168 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Auto operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H62 Table long. sensor error. SM0169 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Auto op. disabled. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H63 Rotation sensor error. SM0213 The main rotation axis does not operate. Linked operations
Axis operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H64 Slide sensor error. Axis SM0214 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H64 Table rot. sensor error. SM0170 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping
Auto operation disabled. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H65 Detector N/A sensor error. SM0215 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H65 Table tilt sensor error. SM0444 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
Auto operation is disabled. your Toshiba representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
436
 Message Action
H H66 Ceiling long. sensor error. SM0216 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H67 Ceiling lateral sensor SM0217 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
error. Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H68 Ceiling rot. sensor error. SM0218 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked
Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H69 Collimator rotation axis SM0931 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H6A FPD rotation axis sensor SM0932 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H6B Floor base rotation axis SM0933 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
sensor error. Op. disabled. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H6E Support column rotation SM0219 Support column rotation axis sensor error. Linked
sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H6F Column slide sensor error. SM1385 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H71 Table U/D sensor error. SM0171 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
Auto operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H72 Table long. sensor error. SM0172 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Auto op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Toshiba service representative.
H73 Rotation sensor error. SM0220 The C-arm rotation axis does not operate. Linked
Axis operation disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H74 Slide sensor error. Axis SM0221 The C-arm slide axis does not operate. Linked operations
operation disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H75 Detector N/A sensor error. SM0222 The FPD near/away movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
437
 Message Action
H H75 Table tilt sensor error. SM0445 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
Auto operation is disabled. your Toshiba representative.
H76 Ceiling long. sensor error. SM0223 The ceiling longitudinal movement axis does not operate.
Axis op. disabled. Linked operations such as auto-positioning and rotational
DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H77 Ceiling lateral sensor SM0224 The ceiling lateral movement axis does not operate. Linked
error. Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H78 Ceiling rot. sensor error. SM0225 The ceiling rotation axis does not operate. Linked
Axis op. disabled. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H79 Collimator rotation axis SM0934 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H7A FPD rotation axis sensor SM0935 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H7B Floor base rotation axis SM0936 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error. Op. disabled. cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H7E Support column rotation SM0226 Support column rotation axis sensor error. Linked
sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H7F Column slide sensor error. SM1386 The column sliding axis does not operate. Linked operation
Slide op. disabled. such as auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be
performed. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H81 Tabletop vertical axis SM0173 The table vertical movement axis does not operate. Linked
backup sensor error. operations such as auto-positioning and stepping DSA
cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H82 Table long. sensor error. SM0174 The tabletop longitudinal movement axis cannot be driven
Auto op. disabled. by the motor. Stepping DSA cannot be performed. Contact
your Toshiba service representative.
H83 Rotation backup sensor SM0227 C-arm rotation axis backup sensor error. Contact your
error. Toshiba service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H83 Table lat. sensor error. SM0175 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping
Auto operation disabled. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
438
 Message Action
H H84 Slide backup sensor error. SM0228 C-arm slide axis backup sensor error. Contact your
Toshiba service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H84 Table rot. sensor error. SM0176 Linked operations such as auto-positioning and stepping
Auto operation disabled. DSA cannot be performed. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H85 Detector N/A backup SM0229 The FPD near-away movement axis backup sensor error.
sensor error. Contact your Toshiba service representative. Operations
are not restricted.
H85 Tabletop tilt axis backup SM0446 Tabletop tilting and AUTO operation are disabled. Contact
sensor error. your Toshiba representative.
H86 Ceiling longitudinal backup SM0230 Ceiling longitudinal movement axis backup sensor error.
sensor error. Contact your Toshiba service representative. Operations
are not restricted.
H87 Ceiling lateral backup SM0231 Ceiling lateral movement axis backup sensor error. Contact
sensor error. your Toshiba service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H88 Ceiling rotational backup SM0232 Ceiling rotation axis backup sensor error. Contact your
sensor error. Toshiba service representative. Operations are not
restricted.
H89 Collimator rotation axis SM0937 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
backup sensor error cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H8A FPD rotation axis backup SM0938 FPD/X-ray beam limiting device rotation of the support unit
sensor error cannot be performed. If support column rotation of the
C-arm is performed, the images from ongoing fluoroscopy
or radiography will be rotated. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
H8B Floor base rotation axis SM0939 Floor base rotation of the support unit cannot be performed.
backup sensor error Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H8C Detector U/D backup SM0234 The X-ray beam up/down movement mechanism section of
sensor error. the -arm does not operate. Linked operations such as
auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H8D Tube U/D backup sensor SM0233 The X-ray beam up/down movement mechanism section of
error. the -arm does not operate. Linked operations such as
auto-positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H8E Support column rot. SM0235 Backup sensor error for the support column rotation
backup sensor error. mechanism section. Contact your Toshiba service
representative. Operations are not restricted.
H8F Comp. filter sensor error. SM0236 Compensation filter sensor error. The support unit can be
Filter op. disabled. operated normally. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
H92 Main console switch error. SM0184 Contact your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
439
 Message Action
H H92 Short mode. Support unit SM0237 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
op. is limited. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and rotational DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H92 Table U/D Movement SM0177 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
sw/Trigger sw error. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and stepping DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H93 Collimator error. SM1211 An error related to the X-ray beam limiting device has
Collimator op. is limited. occurred. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H93 Main console switch error. SM0185 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H93 Table step-slide SM0178 The operating switch is shorted and the corresponding axis
test/Override switch error. does not operate. Linked operations such as auto-
positioning and stepping DSA cannot be performed.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H94 Collimator error. SM0238 Error related to the X-ray beam limiting device. The
Collimator op. is limited. operation of the X-ray beam limiting device is disabled. The
support unit can be operated normally. Contact your
Toshiba service representative.
H94 Image console switch SM0186 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
error.
H94 MAG switch error. SM0179 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H95 A04 PWB error. SM0239 Error related to the X-ray beam limiting device. The
Collimator op. is limited. operation of the X-ray beam limiting device is disabled. The
support unit can be operated normally. Contact your
Toshiba service representative.
H95 Table control switch error. SM0447 The Step-sliding test button or the Override button is
defective.
Contact your Toshiba representative.
H96 MCPWB err Support unit SM1387 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
& collimator op. Limited Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H97 A01 PWB error. Support SM0240 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H97 Console Control PWB SM0187 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
hardware err. Cons
disabled.
H97 Table PWB hardware SM0180 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
error. Operation is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H98 VME bus error. Support SM0241 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
unit op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H99 Console Control PWB SM0188 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
hardware err. Cons
disabled.
H99 Support unit fatal error. SM0242 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
Op. is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
H99 Table PWB hardware SM0181 A fatal error has occurred. No operation is permitted.
error. Operation is limited. Contact your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
440
 Message Action
H HA1 In-room console relay SM1201 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in
PWB error.Ltd functions the examination room. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
HA2 In-room console relay SM1202 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in
PWB error.Ltd functions the examination room. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
HA3 tableside console switch SM1203 Image operations cannot be performed from the tableside
error console. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
HA4 satellite console switch SM1204 Image operations cannot be performed from the satellite
error console. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
HA5 In-room console CAN SM1205 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in
error.Ltd functions the examination room. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
HA6 In-room console relay SM1206 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in
PWB memory error. the examination room. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
HB4 MAG switch error. SM1207 Image FOV size switching error. Contact your Toshiba
service representative.
HB7 In-room console relay SM1208 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in
PWB error.Ltd functions the examination room. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
HB9 In-room console relay SM1209 Image operations cannot be performed from the console in
PWB error.Ltd functions the examination room. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Heart apex is not found on heart SM0815 Perform tracing again.
contours.
Heart apex is not found on SM0817 Confirm that the image is the correct analysis target.
L-side image.
Heart contour reached borders SM0876 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
of image. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Heart contour too small for SM0834 Perform tracing again so that a larger contour can be
centerline analysis. obtained.
Heart contour too small for SM0835 Perform tracing so that a large contour can be obtained.
radial analysis.
Heart wall motion result cannot SM0890 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
be calculated. recommended that tracing be performed again.
HSIP error. Switching to backup SM0102 Data cannot be stored in or read from the RAID.
fluoroscopy. Immediately contact your Toshiba service representative.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. Other SM0501 After completion of high-speed biplane fluoroscopy,
ops. interrupted. continue the interrupted process.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. SM0503 After completion of high-speed biplane fluoroscopy, operate
Operation disabled. the system.
HSBP fluoro. in progress. SM0508 The fluoroscopic image cannot be displayed simultaneously
Simultaneous disp. disabled. during high-speed biplane fluoroscopy.
HSBP rad. disabled. Mode SM0506 High-speed biplane radiography is disabled. The mode
switched to normal rad. switches to normal biplane radiography.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
441
 Message Action
H HV GEN. error. Use continuous SM0251 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
fluoro. Call service.
HV GEN. error. Use continuous SM0249 Continuous fluoroscopy or radiography is possible. Contact
fluoro/radio. Call service. your Toshiba service representative.
HV GEN. error. Radiography SM0247 Use continuous fluoroscopy or pulse fluoroscopy. Contact
disabled. Call service. your Toshiba service representative.
HV GEN. temp. high. Select SM0248 Wait for some time or select reduced operation mode.
reduced op. or wait. SM0253

HV GEN. error. Call service. SM0254 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
HV GEN. error. Change focus. SM0246 Use another focus. Contact your Toshiba service
Call service. representative.
HV GEN. error. Reset error. SM0245 Turn the system power OFF and the ON again.
I Images acq'd from another SM0891 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
plane not calibrated. recommended that tracing be performed again.
Image has no CF values set SM0918 Select a calibrated image.
Calibration is required.
Image info for ED differs from SM0854 Image information may have been overwritten during
that for ES. analysis. Do not perform simultaneous operations on the
same image.
Image Proc. PWB abnormal. SM0151 If this message is displayed constantly and disturbs system
Switching to backup fluoro. operation, contact your Toshiba service representative.
Image process parameter SM0583 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
download error. Call service.
Images for 3D reconstruction do SM0387 Select the 3D reconstruction image.
not exist.
Image transfer failed. SM1194 Image transfer failed. Recheck the Auto Transfer setting in
Utility mode.
Image used in control room. SM0014 After the processing in the control room is terminated, try
Processing can't be saved. again.
Image γ curve is incorrect or SM0871 Perform analysis using another image.
does not exist.
Inappropriate radiographic SM0773 Confirm that the image is the correct analysis target.
conditions for analysis.
Incorrect data exists in normals SM0831 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
file. representative.
Incorrect FPD adjustment data SM1071 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
One-shot rad. is disabled. SM1072

Information for displaying the CU0068 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
detailed parameters of the
transfer destination does not
exist.
Insufficient free space in DB. No SM0913 Delete unnecessary photo images and then perform
startup. analysis again.
Injector is not ready. SM0137 Check the status of the injector.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
442
 Message Action
I Insufficient work area in local SM0912 Delete unnecessary panoramic view images or terminate
disk. No startup. printing. Then perform analysis again.
Internal error. (Code=22) SM0785 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Internal error. SM1453 Reset the hardware. For the reset procedure, refer to
Press reset SW on CCB front. subsection 5.8 "System Reset".
Initialization of the disk failed. HP0031 Replace the disk and retry.
Insufficient space for images. SM0150 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
Create space. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for
radiography in the RAID.)
Insufficient space. Delete SM0005 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
unnecessary data. Retry. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for map
images and photo images in the RAID.)
Insufficient space. Delete SM0007 The free space in the RAID is insufficient. Take appropriate
unnecessary images. Retry. measures such as deleting unnecessary data using the
Directory mode screen. Note that the deleted data cannot
be recovered. (There is insufficient free space for map
images and photo images in the RAID.)
Internal error. SM0767 Restart the system.
Internal error. Do Partial Reset. SM0980 Perform Partial Reset.
L LIH cannot be used. SM0019 The LIH (Last Image Hold) function cannot be used.
L-side fluoro. is performed with SM0262 The X-ray conditions on the lateral side are automatically
lower X-ray cond. lowered in fluoroscopy.
(Lateral Tube) Housing SM0135 Wait until the X-ray tube cools.
overheating probable.
(Lateral tube) LM frozen. X-ray SM0101 The frozen liquid bearing is being unfrozen. Wait for some
disabled. Please wait. time and try again. If X-rays still cannot be generated,
contact your Toshiba service representative.
(Lateral) Do fluoroscopy before SM0256 Execute fluoroscopy for approximately 2 seconds for the
radiography. radiographic region before executing radiography.
(Lateral) Perform fluoroscopy. SM0139 Perform fluoroscopy on the lateral side.
(L CCD camera) SM0099 Communication with the lateral CCD camera is disabled.
Communication failed. Reboot SM0143 Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
system. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(L CCDIF) PWB control is SM0109 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
(L CCDIF) Test pattern SM0465 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
abnormal. Call service.
(L CCDIF) PWB is not installed. SM0104 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(L FPD) error If fluoro/rad SM0516 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
disabled, call service.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
443
 Message Action
L (L FPD) Temperature high. Call SM0588 FPD temperature error. Contact your Toshiba service
service. representative.
If the FPD is continuously used, the power of the FPD may
be turned OFF.
(L FPD) Temperature low. Call SM0589 FPD temperature error. Contact your Toshiba service
service. representative.
(L FPD I/F) PWB is not installed. SM0510 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
X-ray disabled.
(L FPD I/F) PWB control is SM0512 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
impossible. X-ray disabled.
(L FPD I/F) PWB image size SM0518 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
error.
(L FPD I/F) PWB error. SM0520 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(L FPD I/F) Test pattern error. SM0566 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Call service.
(L FPD) I/F PWB ver. SM1437 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
correction impossible.
(L OPTI/F) Communication SM0145 Communication with the lateral OPTI/F is disabled.
error. Reboot system. Fluoroscopy cannot be started. Reboot the system.
Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(L HV-GEN.) Communication SM0114 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
failed. X-ray disabled.
M MAP SAVE failed. SM0010 Map images could not be saved.
SM0024
1) Select the map images and then try again.
2) Delete unnecessary map images and then try again.
3) If map images cannot be saved even after the above
steps, contact your Toshiba service representative.
MAP images cannot be SM0004 Map images cannot be transferred. Select an image other
transferred. than a map image and try image transfer again.
MAP  RUN failed. SM0009
The Map  Run function could not be executed.
1) Select and display the map image and then try again.
2) Confirm that the original image for the map image exists.
3) If the Map  Run function cannot be executed even
after the above steps, contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Mask-record DSA. Operation SM0094 Mask images are acquired during DSA. Wait until DSA is
disabled. completed and then try again.
MASK SELECT failed. Select SM0026 Only map images can be specified as masks. Save the
Map image. image to be used as a mask as a map image. Select this
map image and then try again.
Measurement application has SM1089 Wait until the application has started up.
started in control room.
Mode switched to HSBP SM0507 The mode switches to high-speed biplane fluoroscopy.
fluoroscopy.
Move arm to set position. SM0523 Move the C-arm to the set position.
SM0555
SM0999

No. 2B308-200EN*E
444
 Message Action
M Move arm to end position. Then SM0534 Move the C-arm to the end position of rotational DSA and
select [Set End]. SM0537 then press the Set End button.
SM0547
SM1025

Move arm to start pos. Then SM0535 Move the C-arm to the start position of rotational DSA and
select [Set Start]. SM1026 then press the Set Start button.
Move tabletop to 1st position. SM0359 Move the tabletop to the first stage and then press the [1st
Then select [1st Stage]. SM0472 Stage] button.
Move tabletop to trifurc. ROI SM0358 Move the tabletop of the catheterization table to the ROI
Then select [Main Stage]. and press the [Main Stage] button.
N No data in the calibration table. SM0395 Create calibration images.
No DDS trans data found. SM1451 Perform fluoroscopy/radiography again and then transfer
DDS image not sent. the image. If the error is not resolved, contact your Toshiba
service representative.
No images transferred to recon SM0391 Perform transfer again. If transfer is disabled, check the
PC. cause at the reconstruction PC.
Normals file could not be read. SM0832 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Normals file format is incorrect. SM0836 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Normals file name is incorrect. SM0819 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Normals file version is incorrect. SM0833 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
No transfer. Other images SM0385 After transfer is completed, perform transfer again.
being sent to 3D WS.
No transfer. Try again after 3D SM0388 After calibration is completed, perform transfer again.
calibration.
No transfer. Try again after SM0393 After reconstruction processing for the image being
recon processing. transferred is completed, transfer the next 3D reconstruction
image.
No transfer. Currently SM0392 After reconstruction processing for the image being
transferring other images. transferred is completed, transfer the next 3D reconstruction
image.
No transfer. Try again after SM0390 After processing at the reconstruction PC is completed,
processing at recon PC. perform transfer again.
Not analysis target. Cannot SM0919 Use images selected from the same dynamic image.
start analysis. SM0926

O Offset data error. Change SM0571 Change the pulse rate for the frontal plane.
F-side fluoro pulse rate.
Offset data error. Change SM0573 Change the acquisition rate for the frontal plane.
F-side acquisition rate.
Offset data error. F-side SM0575 Fluoroscopy and radiography for the frontal plane is
radio/fluoro disabled. disabled. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Only normal fluoro enabled. SM0557 The mode automatically switches to normal fluoroscopy.
Switched to normal fluoro.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
445
 Message Action
O Operation disabled during SM0085 Operation is disabled during concurrent display of normal
simultaneous display. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). Try again when concurrent
display is not being performed.
Operation disabled during SM0087 Operation is disabled during fluoroscopic peak tracing.
PEAK-trace. Wait until fluoroscopic peak tracing is completed and then
try again.
Operation interrupted during SM0088 Operation is disabled during fluoroscopic peak tracing.
PEAK-trace. Wait until fluoroscopic peak tracing is completed and then
try again.
Operation interrupted during SM0086 Operation is disabled during concurrent display of normal
simultaneous display. fluoroscopic images and processed fluoroscopic images
(zoomed fluoroscopic images, fluoroscopic subtraction
images/landmark images). Try again when concurrent
display is not being performed.
Operation disabled during SM0089 Stop image playback on the system monitor and then try
F-MASK/F-SUB(ADD). again.
OR table comm error. SM1346 A communication error with the operating table has
Operation is limited. occurred. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
OVERLOAD Exposure SM0119 This error message is displayed in either of the following
disabled. Check technique. cases.
1) The radiographic conditions entered in manual setting
mode are not appropriate*1) and radiography is not
possible. Correct the conditions.
*1) kV, mA, msec, focal size, acquisition rate,
acquisition time
2) The HU of the X-ray tube unit has reached 90%. The
action differs before and after radiography.
Before radiography : Radiography cannot be started
with HU90% or more. Wait until
the HU decreases to the proper
level.
During radiography : Radiography can be continued to
HU100% even if this message is
displayed. After radiography is
completed, wait until the HU
decreases to the proper level.
Override button pressed. Start SM0556 The settings are cleared because the override button was
setting from 1st step. pressed. Perform setting again.
P Path not found. SM0810 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Perform fluoroscopy to SM0370 Perform fluoroscopy. The radiographic conditions are
determine rad. conds. automatically set.
PHOTO SAVE failed. SM0011 Photo images could not be saved.
SM0025
1) Select an image other than a photo image and then try
again.
2) Delete unnecessary photo images and then try again.
3) If photo images cannot be saved even after the above
steps, contact your Toshiba service representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
446
 Message Action
P Pixel size is outside range. SM0771 Perform calibration again.
Pixel Shift failed. SM0462 Pixel shift processing failed.
Playback disabled during SM0084 Wait until fluoroscopy/radiography is completed and then try
fluoro./radiography. again.
Playback on system monitor. SM0095 Stop image playback on the system monitor and try again.
Playback interrupted.
PreProc1 is not installed. SM0106 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Backup fluoro. continued.
PreProc1 is not installed. HSBP SM0497 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
is disabled.
PreProc1 is abnormal. SM0111 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Switching to backup fluoro.
PreProc1 is abnormal. HSBP is SM0499 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
disabled.
PreProc2 is not installed. SM0107 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Backup fluoro. continued.
PreProc2 is not installed. HSBP SM0498 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
is disabled.
PreProc2 is abnormal. SM0112 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Switching to backup fluoro.
PreProc2 is abnormal. HSBP is SM0500 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
disabled.
Preset information related to the CU0067 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
detailed parameters of the
transfer destination could not be
acquired.
Preset information related to the CU0069 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
detailed parameters of the
transfer destination could not be
saved.
Press Trigger SW. SM0531 Press the auto-positioning start button on the tableside
console or press the Arm/tabletop operation start lever of
the tableside console. Confirm that the console is
configured for the system.
Press trigSW. Arm moves to SM0521 Press the auto-positioning start button on the tableside
preset position. SM1017 console or press the Arm/tabletop operation start lever of
the tableside console. Confirm that the console is
configured for the system.
Processing failed. Change to SM0017 Fluoroscopic processing has failed. Normal fluoroscopy
normal fluoro. mode is entered. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Q Quality may fall if rad. performed SM0756 Check the status of halation on the monitor and perform
with a lower gain. gain adjustment. It is recommended that the image quality
be checked by test shot after gain adjustment is performed.
R Rad. disabled. Confirm SM0496 Confirm that preparation for radiography is completed.
preparation completed.
Radial analysis is not possible. SM0882 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
447
 Message Action
R Regional analysis is not possible. SM0885 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Radiography could not be SM0759 Retry start of radiography.
started.
Retry.
Radiography could not be SM0760 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
started.
Call service.
Radiography in progress. SM0090 Operation is disabled during rotational DSA. Wait until
Operation disabled. rotational DSA is completed and then try again.
Radiography in progress. SM0091 Operation is disabled during rotational DSA. Wait until
Operation interrupted. rotational DSA is completed and then try again.
Radiography is disabled. Adjust SM0548 Adjust the SID and FOV again. (*This message is
SID/FOV again. displayed when the SID or FOV is reset to a setting suitable
for 3D radiography. If the value is correct, subsequent
operations are possible.)
Radiography is performed with SM0259 The dose on the frontal side is automatically increased in
higher F-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0260 The dose on the lateral side is automatically increased in
higher L-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0257 The dose on the frontal side is automatically decreased in
lower F-side dose. radiography.
Radiography is performed with SM0258 The dose on the lateral side is automatically decreased in
lower L-side dose. radiography.
Radioscopie L interrompue SM0699 Turn OFF the fluoroscopy switch.
(minu. 10 mn) Red. radiosc. To resume fluoroscopy, turn ON the fluoroscopy switch.
RAID error. NONREDUNDANT SM0154 Although radiography, fluoroscopy, and playback are
possible, the RAID is highly likely to be faulty. Immediately
archive the data to external storage media. Contact your
Toshiba service representative.
RAID error. Radiography and SM0152 Writing to or reading from the RAID is not possible. Contact
F-REC disabled. your Toshiba service representative immediately.
Recon PC may not be booted. SM0389 Confirm that the reconstruction PC has been booted.
Check status.
Reference file is damaged. SM0843 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Report cannot be created. No SM0921 Set all the trace lines and then perform saving.
analysis result.
Restriction line crosses SM0766 Draw the restriction line again so that it does not cross the
centerline. traced vessel centerline.
Return arm to rotation start SM0529 Move the C-arm to the start position for rotational DSA.
position.
Return tabletop to rotation start SM0530 The tabletop position has shifted. Adjust the tabletop
position. SM1053 position.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
448
 Message Action
R ROI filter operation error. SM1400 ROI filter operation error. Reset the power. If the same
Call service. error message is displayed even after the power is reset,
contact your Toshiba service representative.
<Power resetting procedure>
1. Press the [Emergency Stop] button.
2. Wait for 5 seconds and then press the [Power Reset]
button on the control panel of the catheterization table.
ROI set out of range. Adjust SM0376 The ROI cannot be set. Adjust the tabletop longitudinal
table long. position. SM0476 position.
S Save/transfer destination not SM0040 The storage destination or transfer destination may not be
set. set. Contact your Toshiba service representative. Check
the settings in Utility mode.
Saving is not possible after SM0605 Saving is disabled before the radiographic conditions are
radio. conds. are set. set. Perform operation again after completing the current
operation.
Saving of mask image failed. SM0018 The system has failed to register the generated mask image
as the map image. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
S-DSA in progress. Operation SM0092 The operation is disabled during stepping DSA. Wait until
disabled. stepping DSA is completed and then try again.
S-DSA in progress. Operation SM0093

interrupted.
Select [Confirm Cond.]. SM0527 Press the Confirm Cond. button.
SM1019

Set arm ceiling rot. to preset SM0351 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
angle of 0 or +90. the preset position and perform the operations again.
Set arm ceiling rotation angle to SM0549 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
preset position. SM0550 the preset position.
SM1000
SM1001

Set arm ceiling rot. angle to SM0604 Set the support column rotation angle of the CAS-830B to
preset rot. start pos. SM1002 the same angle as the end position setting for rotational
DSA.
Set arm main rotation angle SM0473 Operate the system after setting the C-arm rotational angle
within ±30°. SM1136 in the range of ±30 degrees.
Set arm slide angle within ±30°. SM0474 Operate the system after setting the C-arm sliding angle in
SM1137 the range of ±30 degrees.
Set arm within ±120°. Then SM0536 Set the C-arm operation angle for rotational DSA in the
select [Set End]. SM1038 range of ±120 degrees and then press the Set End button.
Set arm within ±120°. Then SM0542 Set the C-arm operation angle for rotational DSA in the
select [Set Start]. SM1037 range of ±120 degrees and then press the Set Start button.
Set arm column to 0/±90° or use SM0270 Set the C-arm support column rotation angle to 0°, 90°, or
anatomical angle control. SM0307 -90° and then tilt the tabletop.
Alternatively, switch to anatomical angle control and then tilt
the tabletop.
Set ceiling long/lateral pos. to SM0540 The longitudinal position or lateral position of the ceiling
rot. end position. SM1029 support unit has been changed. Adjust the setting so that
the longitudinal and lateral positions of the ceiling-
suspended support column at the start position and end
position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
449
 Message Action
S Set floorbase rot angle outside SM1139 Set the floor base rotation angle in the range between 90°
-90° to +90° range and -90°.
Set rot. Start pos. on rot. orbit SM0492 Set the start position for rotational DSA on the C-arm
including ROI. rotational orbit that passes through the radiographic position
of the ROI.
Set rotation speed again. Then SM0546 Set the C-arm movement speed for rotational DSA again.
perform radiography.
Set SID to rotation end position. SM0538 The SID has been changed. Set the SID values at the start
SM1027 position and end position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition
so that they are the same.
Set so that start & end pos. are SM0543 Set both the Start and End positions on the C-arm orbit that
same rotation orbit. SM1031 can reproduce the movement of either C-arm rotation or
C-arm sliding.
Set support column rotation SM0541 The support column rotation angle of the support unit has
angle to rot. end pos. angle. SM1105 been changed. Adjust the setting so that the support
SM1030 column rotation angles at the start position and end position
SM1124 of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
Set tabletop long/lateral pos. to SM0539 The longitudinal position or lateral position of the
SM1028
rot. end position. catheterization tabletop has been changed. Adjust the
setting so that the longitudinal and lateral positions of the
catheterization tabletop at the start position and end
position of rotational DSA/DA acquisition are the same.
Set tabletop lateral movement to SM0298 Set the tabletop lateral movement to the center position.
center.
Set the C-arm rotation angle to SM0607 Set the C-arm rotation angle to 0°.
SM1141
0°
Set the C-arm slide angle to 0° SM0608 Set the C-arm slide angle to 0°.
SM1142

SETUP has started in Utility. SM0911 Terminate setup and then start a new analysis.
Set SID/FOV to orig pos. SM0471 Set the SID/FOV to the original position and then press the
SM0489
Then press radiog. SW. radiography switch.
SM0998

Set table sup. column rot. angle SM0297 Set the tabletop column rotation to 0°.
to 0°.
Simultaneous display failed. SM0082 Simultaneous display of the fluoroscopic image and
Switching to normal fluoro. processed fluoroscopic image (magnified fluoroscopic
image, fluoroscopic subtraction image, landmark image)
has failed. The system switches to normal fluoroscopy
mode. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Slager analysis is not possible. SM0893 The appropriate analysis result could not be obtained. It is
recommended that tracing be performed again.
Specified restriction line is SM0774 Draw the restriction line again.
incorrect.
Specified valve position is SM0816 Perform tracing again to specify the correct valve position.
incorrect.
Specifying corrected edge is not SM0781 Of the two lines drawn by vessel contour detection, select
possible. one line as the correction target.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
450
 Message Action
S Support unit is operating. SM0044 Release the operation switch to stop the support unit.
SM0052

Start of analysis application SM0902 The file may be damaged. Contact your Toshiba service
failed. representative.
In LVA (BP) analysis, analysis for an inappropriate image
may have been attempted. Switch to an appropriate image.
Still image saving failed. SM0021 The system has failed to save the still image and the LIH
image during fluoroscopy. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Storage error. No image SM0020 The system has failed to register the fluoroscopic dynamic
recorded. image. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
SUB/UNSUB disabled for SM0013 The system has failed to generate a mask image. Normal
selected image. fluoroscopy mode is entered. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
Support unit is parked. SM0122 The arm is at the park position. Some operations are
SM0123
restricted.
(Support unit) Commun. failed. SM0043 Communication with the support unit is broken. Contact
SM0051
Auto-pos. is limited. your Toshiba service representative.

(Support unit) Commun. failed. SM0554 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
S-DSA disabled.
(Support unit/table) Comm SM0552 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
failed. Rad disabled.
Switching to backup study SM0080 The study protocol was switched to the backup study
protocol protocol. Use the system as is.
System startup error. Call SM0495 System startup error. Contact your Toshiba service
service. representative.
System disk error. Call service. SM0459 The system disk is abnormal. Contact your Toshiba service
representative.
System start abnormal. Call SM0132 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
service.
System start failed. Backup SM0097 The system has failed to start up. Restart the system.
fluoro. continued. Contact your Toshiba service representative.
(System cont.) Humidity error. SM0128 Adjust the air conditioning.
Adjust air conditioning.
(System cont.) Temp. error. SM0129 Adjust the air conditioning.
SM0130
Adjust air conditioning.
(System cont.) Temp. error. Sys SM0131 Adjust the air conditioning. Contact your Toshiba service
will shut down in 5 min. representative.
(System I/F) PWB abnormal. SM0147 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
HLC warning not generated.
(System I/F) PWB abnormal. SM0146 Reboot the system. If this message is displayed again,
Reboot system. contact your Toshiba service representative.
T Target blood vessel bends too SM0777 Perform tracing again in another section of the vessel.
much.
Target blood vessel diameter is SM0772 Check the detection result.
too large.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
451
 Message Action
T Target images for 3D SM0386 Acquire 3D reconstruction images.
reconstruction do not exist.
Transfer of filming image failed. SM0041 The system has failed in the transfer of the printing image
(image transfer to Printing mode). Try again. If the transfer
fails again, contact your Toshiba service representative.
(Table) Commun. failed. SM0065 Communication with the table is broken. Contact your
Auto-pos. is limited. Toshiba service representative.
The backup files could not be HP0064 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
transferred.
The backup files transfer HP0065 Confirm that the destination system has been started up
destination cannot be found. normally and then retry. If this message is displayed even
after retry, contact your Toshiba service representative.
The disk is not ready. HP0032 Confirm that the disk is inserted correctly. If disk mounting
is being performed, wait until the disk mounting process is
completed before retry.
The free space for user account HP0059 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
management is insufficient.
The preset information related to PB0114 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
the (auto server) could not be
acquired.
There is no license. SM0901 Restart the system.
There are no applicable images. SM0006 There is no applicable image for this function. Wait until an
applicable image is generated and then try again.
Tilt abnormal. Set tabletop tilt to SM0456 Set tilt angle of the tabletop to 0 degrees.
0°. SM0457
SM0485

Tilt disabled. Set ceiling long. to SM0455 Set the ceiling longitudinal position to a value of 30 cm or
30 cm or more. more and perform the tabletop tilting operation.
Tilt disabled. Set tabletop long. SM0453 Set the tabletop longitudinal position to 50 cm or more and
to 50 cm or more. then tilt the tabletop.
Tilt disabled. Set tabletop SM0451 Set the tabletop rotation angle to 0° and then tilt the
column rot. to 0°. tabletop.
Too few dots that specify SM0783 Draw a trace line with more vessel centerline specification
centerline. points.
Too many dots that specify SM0784 Too many vessel centerline specification points. Draw the
centerline. trace line again.
Too many segments on SM0765 Draw a trace line with fewer specification points.
centerline.
Trans in prog for 3D recon. SM0558 Perform playback after image transmission has been
Playback is interrupted. completed.
Tube bearing lube solid. SM0252 Wait for some time or select reduced operation mode.
Select reduced op. or wait.
Tube switching error. SM0458 The X-ray tube switching circuit is abnormal. Switch to the
Select other C-arm. other arm.
(Tube 1 FPD) Humidity high Call SM0751 Adjust humidity in the examination room so that it is
service. between 35% and 70%. If the error message is displayed
(Tube 1 FPD) Humidity low Call SM0752 when humidity of the examination room is within the
service. specified range, contact your Toshiba service
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
452
 Message Action
T (Tube 1 FPD) Temp. error. SM0592 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Shutdown after study.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temp. high. End SM0745 Terminate the examination and contact your Toshiba
study and call service. service representative.
(Tube 1 FPD) Temperature low. SM0746 Adjust temperature in the examination room so that it is
Call service. within the range specified in the operating requirements.
If the error message is displayed when the temperature of
the examination room is within the specified range, contact
your Toshiba service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Humidity high SM0753 Adjust humidity in the examination room so that it is
Call service. between 35% and 70%. If the error message is displayed
(Tube 2 FPD) Humidity low Call SM0754 when humidity of the examination room is within the
service. specified range, contact your Toshiba service
representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temp. error. SM0597 Contact your Toshiba service representative.
Shutdown after study.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temp. high. End SM0747 Terminate the examination and contact your Toshiba
study and call service. service representative.
(Tube 2 FPD) Temperature low. SM0748 Adjust temperature in the examination room so that it is
Call service. within the range specified in the operating requirements.
If the error message is displayed when the temperature of
the examination room is within the specified range, contact
your Toshiba service representative.
W W01 Set table column rotation SM0448 Set the tabletop rotation angle to 0°.
to center.
W02 Step-slide set incorrectly SM0449 Move the tabletop toward the foot-end in the longitudinal
Move tabletop to long. direction and then set step-sliding.
Center
W05 Release the step-slide SM0450 Release the Step-sliding test button.
switch.
W10 Sup. col. not at rot. set SM0265 Set the support column rotation position to the set position
pos. Op is limited. to operate the support unit.
W11 Parking. Manual SM0266 When the support unit is at the park position, the operations
operation is not possible. SM0303 are disabled in order to ensure safety. To operate the
support unit, move it to the set position.
W12 Tube not at set position or SM0267 Move the X-ray tube assembly to the set position or park
park position. SM0304 position.
W12 Interference with floor. SM0452 The catheterization table cannot be operated in the
Op. is limited. direction toward the floor. Operate the table in the direction
away from the floor.
W13 Outside isocenter area. SM0268 Carefully operate the support unit to avoid contact.
Avoid interference. SM0305

W14 Head end outside long. SM0269

The -arm approaches the C-arm. Move the -arm to the
operation range. SM0306 patient foot end.
W14 Tilt disabled. Step-slide SM0454 During step-sliding setting, tabletop tilting is disabled.
being set.
W18 Other arm not in Park pos. SM0273 Move the other support unit to the park position.
Operation is limited. SM0308

No. 2B308-200EN*E
453
 Message Action
W W20 Detector front touch SM0274 The support unit and catheterization table are automatically
sensor actuated. SM0309 stopped and their movements are limited. Press the
override switch, gently move the touch sensor away from
the point of contact, and correct the cause.
W21 Tube touch sensor SM0275 The support unit and catheterization table are automatically
actuated. SM0310 stopped and their movements are limited. Press the
override switch, gently move the touch sensor away from
the point of contact, and correct the cause.
W22 Arm touch sensor SM0276 Movements of the main rotation axis and slide axis of the
actuated. SM0331 support unit stop immediately. Press the override switch,
gently retract the section that is in contact, and eliminate the
cause.
W27 Touch sensor invalid. SM0281 The touch sensor signal is set as invalid. Contact your
Call service. SM0312 Toshiba service representative to set it as valid for safety.
W30 Interfer. with tabletop. SM0282 The tabletop and the support unit are in the interference
Support unit op. is slow. SM0313 area.
W31 Interfer. with table col. SM0283 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Support unit op. is limited. SM0314 table support column. Move the C-arm in the opposite
direction.
W32 Interfer. with floor. SM0284 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Operation is limited. SM0315 floor. Move the C-arm in the opposite direction.
W33 Interfer. with wall. SM0285 The C-arm cannot be moved in the direction toward the
Operation is limited. SM0316 room wall. Move the C-arm in the opposite direction.
W34 Interfer. with tabletop end. SM0286 The tabletop and the support unit are in the interference
Support unit op. slow. SM0317 area.
W35 Interfer. with other arm. SM0287 An interference warning is actuated. Move the support unit
Op. is limited. SM0318 outside the interference range and then perform operation.
For biplane systems, the support unit automatically stops
and cannot be operated in the direction in which contact
occurs. In this case, release hands from the operation
switch once to enable operation. Be extremely careful to
avoid contact.
W39 Tilt abnormal. Set SM0602 Set the tilt angle of the tabletop to 0 degrees.
tabletop tilt to 0°. SM0603

W3B Table operation is limited. SM1348 Movement of the operating table is restricted.
W40 Data out of range. SM0072 This position is outside the auto-positioning data save
Check position. SM0289 range. Check the position.
SM0319

W41 Unable to STORE SM0071 An attempt was made to save the data to a number for
position. Select another SM0290 which auto-positioning setting is not permitted. Specify
No. SM0320 another number.
W42 Unable to STORE SM0049
The biplane position can be saved only when the -arm is
position. Move -arm to SM0291 positioned within the isocenter permissible range. Move the
SM0321
isocenter area. -arm into the isocenter permissible range.
W43 Unable to STORE SM0047 Auto-positioning data can be saved only when C-arm
position. Set column to SM0055 support column rotation is at the set position. Move the
90/0/-90. SM0292 support column to the set position.
SM0322

No. 2B308-200EN*E
454
 Message Action
W W44 Unable to STORE SM0050 The position cannot be saved when the X-ray tube
position. Move X-ray tube SM0058 assembly of the -arm is not at the set position. Move the
to set position SM0293 X-ray tube assembly to the set position.
SM0323

W45 Unable to STORE SM0048 Set the support units apart and save the data again.
position. Interference area SM0056

for BP. SM0294

SM0324

W46 Unable to STORE SM0046 Auto-positioning data in the interference area cannot be
position. Interference SM0054 saved. Move the C-arm to the appropriate position.
area. SM0295
SM0325

W55 Push collimator lever to SM0948 Automatic control for FPD rotation is cancelled. Push the
display head-up image. SM0959 collimator lever on the tableside console. The system re-
enters automatic control mode.
W92 Error in op. panel. SM1435 Failure of the tableside console or satellite console (option).
Support unit operable. Contact your Toshiba service representative to arrange for
repair.
<Failure of the tableside console>
The arm rotation/sliding joystick is faulty. The joystick
remains tilted and does not return to the center position. As
a result, the arm is moved by simply pulling the arm/tabletop
operation start lever.
Use the optional satellite console to operate the arm until
the tableside console has been repaired.
It is still possible to operate the arm using the tableside
console, but in this case, be sure to follow the instructions
below.
If the arm starts moving by simply pulling the arm/tabletop
operation start lever, immediately tilt the arm rotation/sliding
joystick in the intended direction or release the lever to stop
arm movement.
<Failure of the satellite console (option)>
The C-arm operating lever on the satellite console is faulty.
The lever remains tilted and does not return to the center
position. As a result, the arm is moved by simply pressing
the button at the top of the lever.
Use the tableside console to operate the arm until the
satellite console has been repaired.
It is still possible to operate the arm using the satellite
console, but in this case, be sure to follow the instructions
below.
If the arm starts moving by simply pressing the button at the
top of the lever, immediately tilt the lever in the intended
direction or release the lever to stop arm movement.
W99 Service mode interlock SM0296 The system is in service mode and interlocks are
released. SM0326 overridden. This condition is dangerous. Contact your
Toshiba service representative.
Watch flow of contrast med. SM0375 Acquisition of contrast image is started. Start tabletop
Step tabletop to follow med. stepping operation when contrast medium reaches the
second stage.
Writing to the disk failed. HP0033 Confirm that the disk is not write-protected.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
455
 Message Action
X X10 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or large focus
X11 HV GEN. error. SM0246 become possible (automatic focus selection).
Change focus. After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
Call service. representative.
X12 HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X14 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The large focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or medium focus
SM0246
become possible (automatic focus selection).
X15 HV GEN. error. After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
Change focus. representative.
Call service.
X16 HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X1D HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small or large focus
become possible (automatic focus selection).
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X1E HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium and large focuses cannot be used.
Change focus. Fluoroscopy and radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small focus become
possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
456
 Message Action
X X1F HV GEN. error. SM0246 The medium and large focuses cannot be used.
Change focus. Fluoroscopy and radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
fluoroscopy and radiography with the small focus become
possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X20 HV GEN. error. SM0246 The small focus cannot be used. Fluoroscopy and
Change focus. radiography are disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and
X21 HV GEN. error. SM0246 fluoroscopy and radiography with the medium or large focus
Change focus. become possible (automatic focus selection).
Call service. After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X22 HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X2D HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X2E HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X2F HV GEN. error. SM0246

Change focus.
Call service.
X30 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X31 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X32 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X33 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
457
 Message Action
X X34 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
X38 HV GEN. error. SM0247
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
Radio. Disabled After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
Call service. representative.
X39 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3A HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3C HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3D HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3E HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X3F HV GEN. SM0248 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
temp. high. SM0253 disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X40 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
SM0247 fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
X41 HV GEN. error.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
Radio. Disabled
representative.
Call service.
X42 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X43 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
458
 Message Action
X X44 HV GEN. error. SM0247 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
Radio. Disabled disabled to ensure safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
X48 HV GEN. error. SM0247 representative.
Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X49 HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4A HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4C HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4D HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4E HV GEN. error. SM0247

Radio. Disabled
Call service.
X4F HV GEN. SM0248 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
temp. high. SM0253 disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X52 HV GEN. SM0249 Radiography cannot be performed. Fluoroscopy is also
error. Use cont disabled to ensure safety.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and pulsed fluoroscopy become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
459
 Message Action
X X53 HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
temp. high. SM0253 fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
Select reduced safety.
op. or wait. If the system does not recover even after several minutes
have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X54 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
error. Use cont fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
fluoro./radio. safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X62 HV GEN. SM0249

error. Use cont

fluoro./radio.
Call service.
X63 HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
SM0253
temp. high. fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
Select reduced safety.
op. or wait. If the system does not recover even after several minutes
have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X64 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy cannot be performed. Continuous
error. Use cont fluoroscopy and radiography are also disabled to ensure
fluoro./radio. safety.
Call service. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy and radiography become possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
460
 Message Action
X X70 HV GEN. SM0249 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use cont Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
fluoro./radio. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
SM0249
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
X71 HV GEN. representative.
error. Use cont
fluoro./radio.
Call service.
X72 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X74 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X75 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X76 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X77 Tube bear- SM0252 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
ing lube solid. Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Use reduced If the system does not start up after 15 minutes, press
op. or wait. [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
461
 Message Action
X X79 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X7B HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X7C HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X7D HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
temp. high. SM0253 Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X7E HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X80 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X81 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
462
 Message Action
X X82 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X84 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X85 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X86 HV GEN. SM0251

error. Use
cont. fluoro.
Call service.
X87 Tube bear- SM0252 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
ing lube solid. Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Use reduced If the system does not start up after 15 minutes, press
op. or wait. [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X89 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X8B HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery. If the
Call service. system does not recover, insufficient cooling water is a
likely possibility.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba service
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
463
 Message Action
X X8C HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X8D HV GEN. SM0248 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
temp. high. SM0253 Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
Select reduced If the system does not recover even after several minutes
op. or wait. have passed for system cooling, press [Reset] or restart the
system for recovery.
If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X8E HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X92 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery. If the
Call service. system does not recover, insufficient cooling water is a
likely possibility.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba service
representative.
X96 HV GEN. SM0251 Pulsed fluoroscopy and radiography cannot be performed.
error. Use Continuous fluoroscopy is also disabled to ensure safety.
cont. fluoro. Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] to separate the defective section.
The system enters reduced operation mode and continuous
fluoroscopy becomes possible.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
464
 Message Action
X X99 HV GEN. error. SM0254 Press [Reset] or restart the system for recovery.
Call service. If the system does not recover, the system may be
defective.
Press [Reduce] and then complete the study.
After the study is completed, contact your Toshiba
representative.
X9A HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
X9B HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
X9D HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA0 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA1 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA3 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA4 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA7 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA8 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XA9 HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
XAF HV GEN. error. SM0254

Call service.
X-ray exposure sw error in exam SM0383 Turn OFF the X-ray exposure switch for radiography and
room. Reboot system. fluoroscopy and reboot the system.
SM0384 If the same message is displayed again after the system is
X-ray exposure sw error in
rebooted, contact your Toshiba service representative.
control room. Reboot system.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
465
INFX-8000C pre-operational check table MM/DD Examination room No.
Name of person performing the checks: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Confirm that the operating environmental conditions are satisfied.
Confirm that each unit has been cleaned and sterilized.
Confirm that the control switches are not stained.
Confirm that the cables are not cut, caught, bent, or twisted.
Confirm that there is no object that may cause interference within the operation
ranges of the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that the TV monitor is fixed to the monitor suspension unit.
Confirm that there is no abnormal sound, unusual smell, or temperature
increase.
Confirm that no error message is displayed on the system console monitor.
Confirm that communication with the patient in the examination room is
possible using the intercom microphone.
Confirm that the tableside console is located at the registered position.
Confirm that the drive power of the support unit and catheterization table is
turned OFF when the Emergency stop button is pressed.
In the emergency stop status, confirm that the drive power can be turned ON
using the Power reset button of the catheterization table.
Confirm that the FPD touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the X-ray beam limiting device touch sensor operates normally.
Confirm that the support unit, catheterization table, and monitor-suspension
unit operate normally, that operation is smooth, and that there is no backlash,
abnormal sound, or unusual smell.
Confirm that fluoroscopy and radiography can be performed (with an absorbing
object positioned on the catheterization table).
Confirm that the LEDs of the X-ray tube assembly Ready indicator and the
X-ray ON indicator light at the correct timings.
Confirm that an appropriate brightness is set by the ABC function.
Confirm that the FOV size can be switched during fluoroscopy.
Confirm that no abnormal sound is generated during X-ray exposure (such as
a rotation sound from the X-ray tube assembly).
Confirm that X-ray generation can be stopped at any given point in time.
Confirm that the functions assigned to the function buttons of the footswitch
can be performed.
Confirm that the emergency power supply cable is prepared. (*1)
Confirm that the battery of the wireless footswitch is charged. (*1)
Confirm that the green LED of the wireless footswitch lights. (*1)
Confirm that the orange LED or red LED of the wireless footswitch does not
light. (*1)
*1) When the wireless footswitch (option) is used.

No. 2B308-200EN*E
466 E
 LEGAL MANUFACTURER

1385, SHIMOISHIGAMI, OTAWARA-SHI, TOCHIGI-KEN 324-8550, JAPAN